Home

6000i CNC User`s Manual - Acu-Rite

1. 1050 to 1055 Actual absolute position X Y Z U V W NOTE These variables are not valid during compensations such as tool radius scaling mirroring and rotation or while in transitional moves such as corner rounding and chamfering Current UVW dimension 90 abs 91 incr 17 8 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features User Variables Certain variables are set aside for the programmer to use These may be useful when programming macros You can read from or write to these variables They are divided into four categories e Local variables 1 to 99 These variable numbers can be used only within the body of a subprogram or macro The CNC generates an error message if you program these variables in the main program Values do not hold from one subprogram to another In this way the same variables can be used in separate subprograms with different values e Common global variables 100 to 219 Read Write These variables can be used anywhere in the program or subprogram and their value will remain e Read only variables 220 to 249 These variables can only be set in the main program Once set the variables can be used in subprograms or macros as read only variables e Static global variables 260 to 279 Read Write These variables can be used anywhere in the program or subprogram and their value wil
2. E zIRPock dxf user E DXF DAVE DXF 6 EngineCase02 dxf 6 EngineCase03 dxf G169 Example 1 g MO g MERC OD G This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES 0 625 End Mil 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill 0 125 Extended Drill 6 32 Extended Roll Tap 0 406 End Mill 0 807 Drill 0 250 End Mil 09 17 08 e Jeme 0 se o E L ee fee CHANGE LAYOUT1 Figure 10 3 Change Layout Screen e Select Show Details SHIFT F7 to show the Program Manager details part program names ending with G extensions along with size date and time of last edit Refer to Figure 10 4 Show Details screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 10 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Management Size Type Date 1kB Program f 17 01 2008 09 53 1kB Program f 25 10 2006 14 31 1 11kB Program f 19 12 2005 09 10 6KIFANI G 9kB Program f 10 02 2005 18 04 2 COMP W SML M 1kB Macro file 16 07 2007 08 54 user G169 Example 1 g 1kB Program f 24 01 2007 15 00 MO g 1kB Program f 17 01 2008 09 51 MERC OD G 1kB Program f 14 10 2003 16 16 MERC3 G 1 488 kB Program f 14 10 2003 16 19 1kB Program f 02 02 2006 15 28 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from coll
3. ANILAM 5 68 10 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms The spindle will then come on counter clockwise at the RPM specified in the calibAndToolMeasurementRPM machine setup parameter and retouch the probe twice once at the feedrate that is in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium machine setup parameter and again at the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup parameter The tool length register for that tool is now updated and any value in the length wear register will be reset to zero Then the Z axis will rapid up above the probe stylus the distance specified in the ZRetractAmount machine setup parameter Then it will rapid the X amp Y axes over the center of the probe and turn the spindle on in reverse The machine will move the tool s edge off to one side of the probe stylus in the direction indicated in the probeOrientation machine setup parameter before making a guarded move down 0 1 2 54 mm or whatever value has been placed in the E cycle parameter The machine will then touch the tool to the probe stylus on two opposite sides at the feedrate specified in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium machine setup parameter with the spindle running at the RPM specified in the calibAndToolMeasurementRPM machine setup parameter backing up 0 02 0 508 mm after each first touch then retouching at the feedrate specified in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup parameter calculating the diameter of the tool
4. ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Introduction Getting Started Before you start to write a program determine the work holding device and the location of Part Zero the point to which all movement is referenced Since absolute positions are defined from Part Zero try to select a location that directly corresponds to dimensions provided on the part print such as the lower left corner of the work Then you can develop a program using a procedure similar to the one that follows 1 To enter the Program Manager from the Manual screen press Program F2 Create a program name for the part 2 Enter the Program Editor Edit F8 to open the new program and start writing blocks 3 The first block of any program is usually a safe start position and tool change position a position away from the work where the axes can return for safe tool changing The first block is normally also used to specify the units of measurement Inch MM mode of operation Absolute move type Rapid and to cancel all auxiliary functions Tool Offsets Spindle and Coolant Typical first blocks G70 G90 GO G28 Z0 M5 4 Subsequent blocks in the program set Spindle information call Tool number turn on Coolant and make the initial move toward the work 5 The remaining blocks in the program describe the required moves Canned Cycles and Tool changes to complete the machining 6 The next to the last block in the program returns the axes to
5. The distance to go down from the top of part to find X amp Y coordinate of the center This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle will bring the probe stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the top 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1 2 54 mm if not set Optional The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to find the top of the part The default if Q is not set or set to 0 is 0 1 beyond the edge of the boss hole If Q is set to 1 the default is the current probe position Optional Continued 5 86 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 48 G144 Address Words Continued Address Word Description The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the part The default is the current probe position Optional This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the coordinate entered relative to the current active work coordinate before finding the boss hole center Optional Same as I only for the Y axis Optional ar Optional Work Coordinate to update with the center location in X and Y axes lf set work coordinate will be updated Work coordinate register will not be updated
6. 1 Note O 0FF 1 ON N12 Gol Z4 5 Raul FIZ Pil N13 XL Yi N14 X2 N15 X3 N16 X5 N17 G80 In the above example the hole at N15 will be skipped If N11 read N11 1000 O then N15 would be executed The slash code can be placed anywhere in the block provided it does not exclude code necessary to complete that operation Itis therefore recommended the code be used as shown above 1000 is reserved for block skip use All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Selective Block Skip The 6000i control has nine 9 optional block skip switches The code followed by a number 1 through 9 will activate the corresponding switch Example N11 1002 1 Note Q OFF 1 ON N12 Gol Ad Rak E2 Bull NS XL Tl N14 X2 co NIS X3 N16 X5 N17 G80 In the above example the hole at N15 will be skipped If N11 read N11 1002 0 then N15 would be executed 1001 through 1009 are reserved for optional block skip use Parameters and Variable Registers A macro is a series of instructions designed to achieve a specific result for a given set of constraints For example a rectangular pocket of any size always has four sides four corner radii and a depth Therefore you can cut many pockets of different sizes using a similar tool path with longer or shorter moves for the tool path If a suitable program pro
7. ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Drilling Tapping and Boring Canned Cycles G81 to G89 When you activate a drilling cycle it executes after each programmed position until you cancel it NOTE The P entry return height is optional and you do not need to provide it If you do not specify P the CNC will set it to R Keep the following in mind for drill cycles e P dimension is optional If it is not given the retract height will be the same as the Z start height R dimension e F feedrate is optional If it is not given the current feedrate is used e All start heights R and finish heights P as well as Z dimensions are absolute dimensions e P must be greater than R or an alarm will be given e For all peck drill cycles G83 and G87 R start height must be 0 1 or 2 mm above the work surface e G84 Tapping uses S word for Spindle Yes No Your machine must be equipped with spindle M functions to use G84 e Z axis depth can be changed by placing a new Z depth on the same line as the X and or Y axis location of the hole you want the new depth applied A Z address on a line of its own will cause the control to drill the new depth at the current location The following topics are described Drilling Off G80 Basic Drill Cycle G81 CounterBore Drill Cycle G82 Peck Drill Cycle G83 Tapping Cycle G84 Boring Bidirectional Cycle G85 Boring Unidirectional
8. ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Contents Restore Canceled Edits to a Program Block cococcccccccccccocncocncconococonnnnconnnonnnconnnnnnnoncnonancnnnnnos 6 9 Inserting Text without Overwriting Previous TeXt cooocccocccconcconncccnocococncnnonnnoncnoncnnonnnnnnnoncnonancnnnnnos 6 9 Inserting Text and Overwriting Previous TexXt oocccocccocccconncocnccocnnocnconnnonnnnnnnnonnnnnnnonononanonannnonnnonos 6 10 Advancing to the Beginning or End of a Block ooccoccccoccconcccccncocnconcncnoncnanonncnoncncnnnnnnnnnonnnonos 6 10 Advancing to the First or Last Block of a Program oocccoccccoccccccncocncocnconcnoncnconnnoncnoncncnnnnnnnnnonanonos 6 10 Searching the Program Listing for Specific Text occoocccoccccocnccnnoconncccnnonnconnocnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonaninos 6 11 Find Replace Description from Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu ccccecceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeaeeees 6 12 Replacing Typed Text with New Text ooccoocococoocccocccococonocononcocononononononnnnononononanonnnnnnonanenanenannns 6 13 Going to a Block of the Program LiStiNgQ ooccoccccocncocncocnconnnoncncnnnonononnnnonnnonnnonncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnons 6 13 Scrolling TArOUGM the Program a lO 6 14 Paging Through the ProgramM oocoocccoccccccccnconocononcnonnnconocononnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonanonnnennnnanennnennnnaninaninss 6 14 sering Blank LMC o es e e o o E dl 6 14 Copying Prograny BlOGKS sesupe enn nceeaest en
9. F10 Screen Soft Keys Soft Key Function ShutDown Ft Shutdown the CNC Cancel Cancel the shutdown and return to Manual screen 3 14 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Messages Msgs SHIFT F1 On the Manual screen refer to Figure 3 2 Manual Screen press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Manual Shift screen refer to Figure 3 3 Shift Screen from Manual Screen Refer to Figure 3 8 c01 02df ERROR Corner radius in parameter U must be less than 1 2 the length amp width Log Delete i WITH MESSAGE Figure 3 8 Messages Screen Table 3 6 describes the Messages screen active soft keys Table 3 6 Msgs SHIFT F1 Screen Soft Keys Soft Key Function Info O A The Messages information is displayed The Messages internal information is displayed Log Files The Messages Log File is displayed For more detailed information on Log Files see 6000i CNC Technical Manual P N 627787 21 Section 6 Error Messages and Log Files Delete All F6 Delete all messages Delete the message highlighted Exit mo Displays the Manual screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 3 15 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Activating Manual Mode Rapid or Feed Turn the JOG rotary switch to cycle thro
10. G120 Dwell Refer to Section 4 Dwell G4 Exact Stop Refer to Section 4 Programming Non modal Exact Stop G9 Stroke Limit Refer to Section 4 Setting Stroke Limit G22 Reference Point Return Refer to Section 4 Reference Point Return G28 Return from Reference Point Refer to Section 4 Return from Reference Point G29 Fixture Offset Refer to Section 4 Fixture Offset Work Coordinate System Select G53 Exact Stop Mode Refer to Section 4 In Position Mode Exact Stop Check G61 Contouring Mode Refer to Section 4 Contouring Mode Cutting Mode G64 Macro Call Single Refer to Section 4 User Macros G65 G66 G67 Macro Call Modal Refer to Section 4 User Macros G65 G66 G67 Cancel Modal Macro Refer to Section 4 User Macros G65 G66 G67 Zero Set Refer to Section 4 Absolute Zero Point Programming G92 BlockForm Refer to Section 4 BlockForm G120 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 7 11 25 January 08 ANILAM M Functions 7 12 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help The M Code functions have the following functional groups e All All M Codes are listed including user defined M Codes e Basic M Functions e Cooling Cleaning and Lubrication e Spindle Functions e Tool Change The following topics are described Basic M Functions Cooling Cleaning and Lubrication Sp
11. The address and modifier must be accompanied by an ampersand amp Place the ampersand amp between the address word to be modified and the modifier The address word is programmed first followed by amp followed by the modifier followed by the value The modifier is non modal and is applied only to the address word it accompanies Example G02 X2 0 Y1 0 I amp A1 5 J amp A1 0 The example forces the and J center of an arc to be in Absolute Mode and J are incremental by default Assume the axes are at X1 Y1 Table 17 1 lists the available modifiers Table 17 1 Modifiers Force the address word to be in Absolute Mode Do Force the address word to be in Incremental Mode E Force the address word to be in Inch Mode Mo Force the address word to be in Millimeter Mode All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 1 25 January 08 ANILAM Block Separators CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Block separators can be used to place several functions on one line of a program This is useful in Manual Data Input MDI Mode because you can combine several commands on one line at the command line Example 1 will execute five moves on the machine when you press START Each move is separated by the block separator Example 1 G90 G01 X0 YO F30 X3 Y 2 X0 YO Example 2 will move the axes linearly to XO YO then CW to X1 Y1 then linearly to X2 Example 2 G90 G01 X0 YO F10
12. The axes may be moved using the Manual Panel or by the soft keys Manual Date Input MDI moves are not allowed Any Tool Length Offset can be changed while in Jog Return mode Diameter offsets SHOULD NOT be altered with in Jog Return mode if the current diameter offset is altered the new value WILL NOT take affect until the next time it is activated ONLY THE CURRENT TOOL LENGTH OFFSET should be altered with in this special mode In this way if a tool breaks while in an operation the user may replace the tool re set the tool length offset and return the tool to the cut without aborting the program This is very useful and saves a great deal of time if a tool breaks while in the middle of a canned cycle or an extremely long cut All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 11 11 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Running Programs Jog Return Soft Keys After the axes are halted by the HOLD key and JOG F2 is pressed a new strip of soft keys related to the Jog Return function is displayed Restart Pos F1 Sends the axes to a pre determined point the position before halted by the HOLD key Tool F7 Activates the Tool screen Handwheel F8 Enable or disables handwheel moves Return F10 Return to the Single Step or Auto screen The following topics are described 4 TOOL F7 a HANDWHEEL F8 a RETURN F10 TOOL F7 Tool F7 when pressed displays the CNC s Tool Page This a
13. delete a character 6 7 F3 delete a program 10 8 F7 to delete text 2 8 Block F4 deleting program block 6 8 groups of programs 10 12 DELETE key single value to clear 9 5 desktop icon off line software 14 2 diameter machine status display 3 11 offset tool page 9 15 diameterOfSpindleProbeGauge description 5 77 diameterOfToolProbeGauge description 5 60 5 62 direct transfer variables 17 13 disclaimer iil disengage servos 3 6 display DXF double window size 16 6 DXF fit window 16 6 DXF half window size 16 6 DXF window zoom 16 6 DXF window zoom in DXF 16 6 gauge description 3 4 screen from SHIFT Manual illustration 3 4 screen soft keys listed 3 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index Display Program F8 display Draw image program and dashboard 8 3 screen illustration 8 3 distance to go display mode description 11 6 manual screen area 3 10 DO END conditional statement 17 28 double window size display DXF 16 6 dom degrees per minute defined 15 1 draft angle pocket cycle G73 description 5 14 edit help 7 10 Draw F7 viewing program 8 1 CNC code view tool paths 16 4 exit 8 7 program requirements 8 2 real time mode description 8 1 screen illustration 8 2 simulation mode description 8 1 operation mode 8 7 screen description 8 7 to activate 8 2 starting 8 2 usi
14. 1 0 True 1 1 False 0 0 False 0 1 False 1 0 False True Comparative Terms You can compare variables with variables and variables with constants using equality and inequality operators The following topics are described a Equality Operators a Inequality Operators Equality Operators N700 IF 120 125 THEN or GOTO Block N700 compares the contents of variable 120 with the contents of variable 125 If the contents are equal then the expression is true and THEN or GOTO directs the program Otherwise the expression is false At Block N740 the contents of variable 130 are compared with the constant 360 The result of the comparison is identical to the first case 17 30 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Inequality Operators NOT N760 WHILE 135 137 DO 10 N790 END 10 The exclamation mark symbolizes NOT Therefore Block N760 instructs the CNC to continue the loop to N790 while the contents of variables 135 and 137 are not equal condition true When the contents of the variables become equal the expression is false and the loop terminates GREATER THAN N800 IF 122 gt 134 GOTO 830 The symbol gt symbolizes GREATER THAN Therefore Block N800 instructs the control to go to GOTO or jump to Block N830 if the contents of variable 122 are greater than the contents of variabl
15. 2 54 mm if not set Optional The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to find the top of the part The default is toward the corner being found 0 4 10 16 mm Optional Continued 5 82 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 46 G142 Address Words Continued Address Word Description The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the part The default is toward the corner being found 0 4 10 16 mm Optional This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the coordinate entered relative to the current active work coordinate before finding the corner Optional Same as I only for the Y axis Optional NI Same as l only for the Z axis Optional Work Coordinate to update with edge location in X and Y axes If set work coordinate will be updated Work coordinate register will not be updated if not set and a warning message will tell the operator no update has taken place if W is not set Optional To use the Outside Corner Finding Cycle 1 Place the probe in the spindle 2 Manually jog the probe stylus less then 0 1 2 54 mm away from the outside of the corner you wish to find in X amp Y If H 1 the Z axis should be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part otherwise the Z axis should be at the side picking depth 3 Type
16. 8 T5 6 32 Extended Roll Tap T6 0 406 End Mill T7 0 807 Drill T8 0 250 End Mill T9 0 169 Drill T10 0 209 Drill T11 0 500 Drill T12 0 120 Drill Tools are Setor the top of the right hand fixture Phvsical ysica Left side of fixture 7 A i line A m numbers Delete Page Page Edit Hop ete gt ooe TGR oe vove Soft Key Labels EDIT Figure 6 1 Edit Screen You can write and edit programs from the Edit screen The Edit screen provides the following areas Program Name The name of the program listed on the screen Program Listing Area of the screen where the program is listed Soft Key Labels These labels define soft key functions Some soft keys when pressed activate screens that contain additional features 2 Press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Manual Shift screen refer to Figure 6 2 Refer to Table 6 1 Edit Soft Keys 6 2 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Editor 5 QQ N e O wo 9a HO PF WN ES ANILAM This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill T4 0 125 Extended Drill T5 6 32 Extended Roll Tap T6 0 406 End Mill T7 0 807 Drill T8 0 250 End Mill T9 0 169 Drill T10 0 209 Drill T11 0 500 Drill T12 0 120
17. All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Skew Error Find G147 Format G147 Qn Sn Dn Hn En Vn An Bn In Jn Kn e G68 axis rotation cannot be used with G147 skew error find e Skew error is only supported for along the side edge of a part relative to the X Y plane e Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle e A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe and that tool offset active before using this cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating tool length offsets e A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate active before using this cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating work coordinate offsets e The probe must be pre positioned to the proper spot in relation to the part in accordance with the specified S parameter as described below or an I J and or K should be included for pre positioning e The G147 Skew Error Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from the manual mode Refer to Table 5 51 Table 5 51 G147 Address Words Address Word QO Finds the skew angle but does not activate skew compensation Q1 Finds the skew angle and activates skew compensation Q2 Activates skew compensation with the current skew value but will not
18. Example of indirection N30 200 51 456 N40 201 200 N50 G90 G1 X 201 F200 At Block N40 variable 201 200 Only when the second level of indirection is used at N50 does variable 201 contain the contents of variable 200 causing the X axis to move to position 51 456 Up to four levels of indirection can be used All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 7 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features System Variables Certain variables are set aside as CNC system variables Some may be useful for you to know when programming macros The system variables range from 1000 to 1099 Most of these variables are read only You cannot write information to them There are a few exceptions to this rule Refer to Table 17 3 for a list of available system variables Table 17 3 System Variables 1000 Block skip variables read write 1001 to 1009 Selective block skip 1010 to 1015 Commanded ABS tool position x y Z U v w NOTE These variables are not valid during compensations such as tool radius scaling mirroring and rotation or while in transitional moves such as corner rounding and chamfering Current G motion mode 0 rapid 1 feed 2 cw arc 3 ccw arc 5 ellipse 6 spiral Acute angle for rounding compensated intersections default 15 0 of look ahead blocks for cutter comp R W 1041 Current program tool compensation 40 off 41 left 42 right
19. Finish cycle feedrate Finish stock If K FinFeed is set the CNC automatically executes a finish pass after it roughs out the pocket at K FinFeed feedrate The finish stock amount applies to the sides and bottom unless M SideStock is defined then S FinStock will only apply to the bottom If you do not specify a value finish stock is not left jae stock side If not set the cycle will use the S BE value anal The depth per pass If a deep pocket is necessary it might not be feasible to take all the stock in one cut so the Depth of Cut can be programmed to allow two or more passes RetractHgt Retract height The Absolute Z position at the start and end of the cycle Caution The Z axis will rapid to this position before traversing to the X and Y staging position All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 25 25 January 08 ANILAM Islands G162 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Format G162 An Bn Cn Dn En This cycle allows islands in irregular pockets Pockets with Islands must be programmed using subroutines More than one G162 Island cycle can be programmed at a time They may be strung together or on separate lines Islands can be programmed inside of islands Five islands can be put on a line The subroutine number is used as inputs Refer to Table 5 19 Islands that are defined to be avoided on the inside of an irregular pocket are done so by using the
20. G Codes In Position Mode Exact Stop Check G61 While the In Position Mode G61 is active the CNC approaches target and performs an in position check before the next move is executed Refer to Table 4 18 The CNC comes to a complete stop at the completion of each command This could cause tool dwell marks to appear on the work but prevents the CNC from rounding off sharp corners Table 4 18 G61 and Associated G Code Formats Code Format Action G9 Xx x Yx x Activates Non modal In Position Mode Complete stop only in this block G61 Xx x Yx x Activates Modal In Position Mode CNC stops to verify location of each endpoint G64 Cancels G61 and activates the Contouring Mode Continuous Path Mode NOTE Rapid moves are always performed in In Position Mode G61 is modal and remains in effect until canceled Use Contouring Mode G64 to cancel the G61 Non modal In Position Mode G9 remains active only for a single block NOTE The In Position and Continuous Path Tolerances are defined in the Setup Utility The In Position Tolerance should be closer to target than the Continuous Path Tolerance All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 23 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Contouring Mode Cutting Mode G64 The Contouring Mode G64 also known as Continuous Path Mode or Cutting Mode is active at power on Refer to Table 4 19 It is
21. G90 G70 G0 G17 TO ZO XO YO T1 5000 MILL G90 GO X1 Y1 Z 1 F40 G65 P3 X4 Y4 Z 55 G90 GO Z 1 TO ZO XO YO M30 O99 parameters passed X 24 length of window in X axis Y 25 width of window in Y axis Z 26 absolute tool depth G65 Macro Programming Macro Subprogram This macro can mill any size window L x W at any Z depth To change the pocket size change the parameters on Block 10 X Y Z The CNC will execute the macro only once at the current position G65 is not modal Example N22 N23 N24 N25 N26 N27 N28 N29 N30 N31 03 WINDOW MACRO G90 G1 ZH26 G91 G41 Y 25 2 X 24 2 Y 25 X 24 YH25 X 24 2 G40 Y 25 2 M99 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features G66 G67 Macro Programming This example is a modal macro program to mill slots in a plate at various locations In contrast to the G65 single call macro in Example 1 G66 modal macro call applies the macro to all subsequent moves until canceled by G67 Program G67 after the last slot location Example N1 0101 SLOTCALL G N2 G90 G70 GO G17 N3 TO ZO N4 XO YO N5 11 D 25 L 1 F30 N6 G66 P1255 X5 Y1 Z 1 A5 B12 C5 N7 X1 Y2 N8 X2 Y4 N9 G67 N10 G90 GO TO ZO N11 XO YO N12 M2 N13 N14 SLOTMAC G This program calls SLOTMAC G a program in another file The file inclusion bloc
22. Most positions are identified by there X Y and Z coordinates A position two inches left three inches back and four inches up has an X coordinate of X 2 0 a Y coordinate of Y3 0 and a Z coordinate of 24 0 The following topics are described a Polar Coordinates a Absolute Positioning a Incremental Positioning Tool Tip Reference Z Y LOCATEPOSIT Figure 1 2 Locating Positions All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 1 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Introduction Polar Coordinates Polar Coordinates define points that lie only on a single plane Polar coordinates use the distance from the origin and an angle to locate points Refer to Figure 1 3 Position DN Distance Angle 0 Origin Figure 1 3 Polar Coordinate System Absolute Positioning In Absolute Mode all positions are measured from Absolute Zero Absolute Zero is not a fixed position on the machine It is a selected point Refer to Figure 1 4 Part Zero XO NU All Positions Measured From Part Zero ABSOLUTE Figure 1 4 Absolute Positioning You can set Absolute Zero X0 YO anywhere Usually it is set at a position that enables you to use the dimensions specified on the blueprint This is also called setting the Part Zero The Absolute Zero Part Zero can be moved as often as necessary either manually or in a program 1 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without
23. N12 153 3 4 N13 M98 P1 N14 17 18 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features It may be more convenient to use macro call G65 Pn or G66 Pn to pass variables to the subprogram by letter address This is how a canned cycle operates Refer to Example 2 Values are passed on for parameters A B and C Example 2 N20 G65 P1 A2 B3 C3 4 N21 Macro call G65 Pn contains a loop option Ln Where n is the number of repetitions of the subprogram called N20 G65 P1 A2 B3 C3 4 L3 Notas Macro 1 will be called three times Ln equals 3 When parameters are passed to a macro body by letter address the contents of the parameters are stored in local variables Refer to Table 17 5 Table 17 5 Letter Addresses R 18 S 19 T 20 U 21 V 22 W 23 x 24 Y 25 z 26 Letter addresses G L N O and P cannot be used for parameter passing All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 19 25 January 08 ANILAM 17 20 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features G65 Macro Programming Main The following is an example of a simple macro program In this example the macro is a window milling cycle designed to mill a square or rectangular window through a part Example N1 N2 N3 N4 NS N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 O99 WINDOW MACRO CALL
24. Pop up Menu Description Start of Block The cursor returns to the beginning of the block See Advancing to the Beginning or End of a Block End of Block The cursor advances to the end of the block See Advancing to the Beginning or End of a Block Goto Block Use to move to any line in the Program Listing See Going to a Block of the Program Listing Start of Prog The cursor returns to the first block of the program See Advancing to the First or Last Block of a Program End of Prog The cursor advances to the last block of the program See Advancing to the First or Last Block of a Program All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 6 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Editor Edit Funct F8 Description from Edit Screen Press Edit Funct F8 to display the Edit Funct pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 4 and Table 6 3 13 GO X0 Y 5 Insert Block 14 M2 T Find Replace 16 O1 Subroutine for outside of pocket Mark Bik ON 17 G41 to Indicate which side the cutter is OF sk Bik OFf 18 G41 19 G0X5 Y5 Copy 20 G1 X13 Paste 08 38 38 Delete Page Page Edit EDIT FUNCT POP UP Figure 6 4 Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu Table 6 3 Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu Description babel Function Insert Block Insert a program block at the cursor See Inserting a Program Block Find Replace Use to search blocks for specific text s
25. Refer to Section 4 Probe Move G31 for more details If Probing has been added post sale beside Machine Parameter changes there may be Programmable Logic Controller PLC program modifications required The tool probe cycles are only supported on machines with automatic spindle forward reverse and spindle speed and homing with a permanent X Y and Z machine position The method described assumes the use of negative tool length offsets In this method the Tool Length Offset TLO in the length column for each tool represents the distance from the tool tip at machine home to top of work piece and is a negative number This method does not require the use of any Z work coordinate offset to be active This procedure will find the effective tool diameter by turning the spindle on in reverse and touching two sides of the probe stylus then storing the tool s diameter in the tool s diameter offset table The spindle probing cycles are designed to assist in part setup Using these cycles one or more features edges of a part can be measured Using the data obtained with these measurements calculations are made that can be used to set a given fixture offset It is also possible to find the orientation angle of a part so as to not always have to align the part exactly Tool and spindle probing does not allow rotation scaling and mirroring Plane will be set to XY G17 when these cycles are complete The following topics are describe
26. T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill ENDMILL CYCLE Figure 7 9 EndMill Cycle Screen From Milling and Profiles select Thread Mill Cycle G181 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 10 1 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A ej APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill oe T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill D THREAD MILL CYCLE Figure 7 10 Thread Mill Cycle Screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 7 23 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help From Milling and Profiles select Engrave Cycle G190 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 11 0 0000 f iy a z This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill ENGRAVE CYCLE Figure 7 11 Engrave Cycle Screen From Drilling Cycles select Basic Drill Cycle G81 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 12 al 2 E 4 5 6 7 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill a 0 125 Extended Drill A A lp
27. climb milling is reversible Required D dimension climb CCW D dimension conventional CW XCenter X Center of the pocket in X axis Defaults to current position YCenter Y Center of the pocket in Y axis Defaults to current position DepthCut Maximum Z depth per pass Example If Z is programmed to be 1 and B to be 5 the pocket will be roughed out in two levels B is programmed as a positive dimension Defaults to tool diameter depth less finish stock RoughFeed Ramp in rough feed The tool will ramp into the first depth of cut with a spiral move from the I D of the pocket to the O D of the pocket The feedrate for this move is programmed as I After the ramp in move the tool will rough mill the pocket at feedrate I Defaults to last programmed feedrate FinFeed K Fiistpassfeedrato Defaults to last programmed feedrate Finish stock amount per side including bottom If you enter a negative value stock will be left but no finish pass will occur If not programmed no finish stock is left Stepover A Maximum tool stepover must be less than tool diameter If A dimension outward spiral If A dimension inward spiral On inward Spirals the tool moves to O D at O degrees and begins the roughing process there 3 o clock Defaults to tool radius RetractHgt Z axis absolute retract height must be equal to or above H Executed in rapid Defaults to H StartHgt dimension All rights reserved
28. feed block description 4 37 feed move end point G1 linear interpolation illustration 4 5 feed move end point G1 description 4 5 feed move G1 edit help 7 5 programming example 4 5 feed machine status display 3 11 Feed move 3 18 feedrate FEED description 4 37 FEED edit help 7 5 adjustment 3 16 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE adjusting 3 16 setting 3 11 switch adjusting 3 16 switch illustration 3 8 file inclusion description 17 31 Find F8 description 9 4 tool number description 9 9 Find in Table SHIFT F8 description 9 10 Find next F2 Replace with feature 6 13 search specific text 6 11 Find previous F1 Replace with feature 6 13 search specific text 6 11 Find what find replace screen 6 11 find specific text 6 11 Find Replace F8 screen illustration 6 11 Find what feature 6 11 Replace with feature 6 13 soft keys description 6 12 first block 1 2 fit window display DXF 16 6 fixture offset table description 4 18 illustration 4 19 Index 8 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index to activate 4 19 to adjust 4 19 to change 4 19 fixture offsets G53 description 4 18 edit help 7 11 examples 4 20 flat bottom boring cycle G89 description 5 8 edit help 7 9 floppy disk USB 13 2 four axis programming description 15 1 frame pocket cycle G75 description 5 16 edit help 7 10 functions description 17 5 listed operators 17 5 G G ext
29. move e Inthe Real Time DRAW Mode the CNC displays the machine moves in the viewing area as it runs the program in Auto or Single Step Mode Refer to Section 11 Running Programs for instructions on how to run DRAW while cutting a part When you select Draw F7 from the Program Manager Draw Simulation Mode is activated The CNC draws the part without machine movement When you start DRAW from Auto or S Step Modes Real Time Draw Mode is activated The CNC draws the part while it is machining it The following topics are described in this section a Starting Draw o Draw Screen Description a Exiting Draw All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 8 1 25 January 08 ANILAM Starting Draw 8 2 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Viewing Programs with Draw Draw Simulation Mode is started from the Program Manager You can make some changes from the soft keys while a simulation is running In Draw Simulation Mode the CNC does not hold the operation of the program for Dwells and tool mounts and other machine related features NOTE G120 BlockForm must be defined in the program that is using Draw and a tool with a diameter defined must be active in the program for Draw to work To activate Draw Simulation Mode 1 In the Program Manager highlight a program and press Draw F7 The Draw graphic screen activates 2 Press Run F1 Refer to Figure 8 1 Refer to Table 8 1 Draw Screen Soft Keys fo
30. rerun the cycle on the part NOTE If Q2 is used all other G147 parameters are ignored NOTE Before using G147 Q2 you must have called G147 at least once with QO or Q1 or the error message Skew error has not been found is displayed Skew compensation will be activated around the current active work coordinate and will only work from within the program being run Skew compensation cannot be activated directly or indirectly using G147 from the MDI mode The operator can run the G147 from MDI but must place G147 Q2 inside the program for skew compensation to take effect A G53 work coordinate call will deactivate skew compensation necessitating a re issuance of G147 Q2 to activate skew compensation Using Q1 or Q2 will default the control to G90 Absolute If you are in G91 Incremental you will need to switch back after the cycle has been run Optional Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 91 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 51 G147 Address Words Continued Address Word Description Estimated amount of angle from 3 O clock Default is 0 which will cause the cycle to find the angle of the back edge of the part starting its first pick in the upper left corner and making the second pick to the left of that as you are facing the surface being picked Examples S 90 would start in the lower left side p
31. starting block select using arrow keys 11 8 switch from single step mode 11 6 automatic mode defined 11 1 tool changer 5 8 9 11 auxiliary keyboard single value to clear 9 5 axis address unary minus example 17 13 Index 2 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index approach 5 32 descriptions 1 3 four axis types linear description 15 1 rotary description 15 1 of motion illustration 1 4 rotation G68 canceled by G92 4 33 description 4 28 examples 4 29 scaling G72 4 32 scaling G72 canceled by G92 4 33 select key illustration 3 8 selecting 3 18 B back up on USB memory stick 1 2 background programming soft key description 11 3 ball end mill length offsets using 9 21 setting TLO illustration 9 22 tool diameter compensation using 9 21 basic drill cycle G81 description 5 3 edit help 7 9 screen illustration 7 24 basic M functions description 7 12 basic modal functions listed 7 5 BG Prog SHIFT F3 auto mode screen 11 3 single step screen 11 3 Bin F4 description 9 8 blank line to insert 6 14 block end of program feature 6 10 end of feature 6 10 goto feature 6 13 insert feature 6 8 number 3 11 program area label 3 11 selective skip description 17 11 separators description 17 2 skip variables description 17 9 skip description 17 10 start of program feature 6 10 start of feature 6 10 Block search Find F8 soft keys listed
32. will return after reaching the intermediary point The machine traverses to the G28 intermediate point N1 then to the programmed coordinate N2 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Move Reference from Machine Home G30 Move Reference from Machine Home G30 is used to move an axis in relation to machine home without being influenced by tool or fixture offsets Move will be rapid or feed depending on active GO Rapid Move or G1 Feed Move to a program start position Refer to Table 4 15 Format G30 Xx Yy Zz Vu xyzu coordinates X Y Z and U of G29 move The CNC commands a move from Machine Home to the G30 coordinates Table 4 15 G30 Address Words Label Address Description Word G30 move in X G30 move in Y G30 move in Z G30 move in U Probe Move G31 Refer to Section 17 Advanced Programming Features Probe Move G31 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 17 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Fixture Offset Work Coordinate System Select G53 Format G53 Oxx Xn Yn Zn Un Wn C Use the work coordinate system G53 commonly known as fixture offsets to shift Absolute Zero to a preset dimension G53 dimensions are referenced to Machine Zero G53 cancels Mirroring G100 Axis Rotation G68 and S
33. 2 UO drill a spiral series of holes 36 degrees and X 0 500 inches apart each Set XO at the right end YO at the cylinder s centerline UO at a pre milled keyway on the cylinder Measure tool offsets from the top of the cylinder with Y axis at 0 Table 15 1 Four Axis Example 1 4 AX DRL SET shortestDistance to off G90 G70 GO M5 G28 Z0 G53 O1 GO X0 YO U0 11 3 CENTERDRILL M3 S2400 G81 Z 22 R 1 F12 M98 P1 T2 3 8 DRILL M3 S1850 G53 O1 RE ACTIVATE OFFSET CANCELED IN SUBR 1 G87 Z 1 R 1 F14 1 18 J 012 K 1 U 3334 M98 P1 M2 O1 ROTARY HOLE LOCATIONS G0 G90 X 75 YO UO LOOP 9 GO G91 U36 END G0 G90 X 2 UO LOOP 9 G0 G91 X 5 U 36 END G80 M5 GO G90 G28 Z0 CANCELS G53 OFFSET XO YO UO M99 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 15 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC Programming and Operations Manual P N 627785 21 Four Axis Programming Example 2 Mill Mount the fourth axis as described above Mount a part 3 inches in diameter and 5 inches long on the face of the rotary table The part has a 0 25 inch radius turned on the end shortestDistance is set to off Table 15 2 shows a milling example only Assume that a series of six 0 25 inch wide grooves must be milled 60 degrees apart 0 25 inch deep at the start tapering up to 0 125 inch deep and rotating 15 degrees at the far end The groove must follow the end contour of the part radius Set XO at the right end YO at the cylinder cente
34. 4 G91 X1 5 X38 1 Hole 3 moves from 2 to 3 in incremental G91 X1 0 X25 4 Y 1 25 Y 31 75 Hole 4 Incremental X 2 5 X 63 5 Hole 5 Incremental G90 X1 5 X38 1 Y 2 5 Y 63 5 Hole 6 Absolute N12 G80 TO ZO Cancel drill cycle G80 cancel tool TO and rapid Z to zero ZO N13 X 3 0 X 75 Y1 0 Y25 Move to X 3 Y1 for part change N14 End Program All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 9 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Pattern Drill Cycles Use the drill bolt hole cycle G79 to drill a partial or full bolt circle A drill cycle G81 to G89 must be programmed prior to G79 You can move around the pattern clockwise or counterclockwise either point to point or along a radius G79 calculates the hole locations The cycle uses the Polar Coordinate System for dimensions When the G79 cycle is completed you must cancel the cycle G80 Drill Bolt Hole Cycle G79 Format G79 An Hn Dn Xn Cn Yn Bn Rn Table 5 10 G79 Address Words PI Label Word Description StartAngle Angle of the first hole Required Number of holes in full bolt circle Required LH Diameter Diameter of bolt circle Tool will normally move from hole to hole in a CCW positive direction For CW direction D negative Required XCenter Absolute X center of the bolt circle Defaults to current position IndexAngle Rotates the Polar Coordinate
35. 4 17 return from G29 4 16 return from G29 edit help 7 11 return G28 4 15 return G28 edit help 7 11 remaining seconds in a dwell 3 11 reminders tool page 9 7 rename program 10 11 Replace F6 Replace with feature 6 13 replace specific text 6 11 required entry fields description 7 3 reset after stop 3 6 reset servo drive 3 2 resetting the servos 3 6 Restart Pos F1 jog return screen description 11 12 restarting a program 11 4 restore block feature 6 9 cancel edits to block feature 6 9 deleted blocks using Undo SHIFT F3 6 9 Return F10 exit Find Replace screen 6 11 jog return screen description 11 12 return from reference point G29 edit help 7 11 right hand tool compensation illustration 9 17 rotary axis programming conventions 15 2 programming description 15 1 programming in absolute 15 2 programming in incremental 15 2 rotation G68 edit help 7 10 Index 22 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index rotation scaling and mirroring description 7 10 RPM machine status display 3 11 Run F1 run Draw program 8 2 run program without pause 8 7 running program one step at a time 11 2 programs 11 1 run time timer description 11 10 S saving edits 6 7 scaling G72 edit help 7 10 S Code description 12 1 function description 12 1 screens Auto illustration 11 7 basic drill cycle G81 screen illustration 7 24 Change Layout
36. ANILAM P N 627785 21 Edit Help Refer to Figure 7 3 and Figure 7 4 Specify the appropriate Absolute or Incremental Mode for the angle and center point The direction Cw Ccw of the Arc and the sign of the angle control the path of the tool If the Z axis starting and end positions differ the arc will be a helix 90 _ Absolute 60 Position Cow Tool Path Cw Tool Path o Absolute Angle Center Point Reference Absolute Position Starting Point Present Position Figure 7 3 Absolute Mode Center Angle Arc Incremental 60 deg Postion Start Point Center Point Current Position Incremental CTR ANGARC Figure 7 4 Incremental Mode Center Angle Arc All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 1 7 25 January 08 ANILAM 7 8 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help Table 7 2 G2 Address Words Address Label Word Description End X X endpooint Required Horizontal End Y endpoint Required fae R Radius of arc Radius of arc Required Table 7 3 G3 Address Words Address Label Word Description End X X endpoint Required Horizontal End Y endpoint Required et R Radius of arc Radius of arc Required All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help Milling and Profiles ANILAM The Milling and Profiles enables G170 G171 G172 G175 G176 G181
37. Activating Absolute G90 or Incremental G91 MON cccoccccccccccnccccconcccncncooncnncnoncnonncnnnnnnonnnnnos 4 33 Absolute Zero Point Programming GQ2 cooccccccccccncccnococnnccnnoncnoncnnonnnonnnnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnennonaninnnnns 4 33 Mirroring G TOO a eo 4 34 Bl ckForm 6120 ieres e a Taa aa 4 35 Programmable Temporary Path Tolerance G1000 ocooocccocccoccccccncccncconccncnnncncnnnnoncncnnncnaninnnnnnnns 4 36 Feedrate FEED xssccscte a a 4 37 Section 5 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Cameo eS ti ce Ree 5 1 Drilling Tapping and Boring Canned Cycles G81 to G89 ooccccccccccccccccocncocnnconnnncnnnnnnnncnonononanonos 9 2 DANNO OM GO A A renee A 5 3 Basic DIVOCE SNS AS A AE A A 5 3 CounterBore Drill Cycle G82 ocococccoccoccnocococonncoonocanocnnnonononanonnnnonnnonannnnnnonnnonanonarnnnnnenaness 5 3 POC Al Ye AE AAA A dace crete naa eee a aga SL eeteeRee ae 5 4 Tapping eycle GCF inician did 5 5 Boring Bidirectional Cycle OS os 5 6 vi All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Contents Boring Unidirectional Cycle G86 ccooccccocccoccononoconoconononnnnanonanoconnnnnnonanonannnnnnonanonannenanenanenanes 5 6 Chip Break Cy Cle GO Pc hse a eas aan illa setae 5 7 Flat Bottom BonnG Cycle G89 nica 5 8 DIN IEXaMDlS a o od io EE O 5 8 Pattern A RR hee ee 5 10 Drill Boll Aole Cy Cle C79 sii e lee Die sce
38. Address Words Continued Address Word Description The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the part The default is toward the corner being found 0 4 or 10 16 mm Optional This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the coordinate entered relative to the current active work coordinate before finding the corner Optional Same as I only for the Y axis Optional Ko Optional Same as I only for the Z axis Optional Work Coordinate to update with edge location in X and Y axes If set work coordinate will be updated Work coordinate register will not be updated if not set and a warning message will tell the operator no update has taken place if W is not set Optional To use the Inside Corner Finding Cycle 1 Place the probe in the spindle 2 Manually jog the probe stylus 0 1 2 54 mm away from the inside of the corner you wish to find in X amp Y If H 1 the Z axis should be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part otherwise the Z axis should be at the side picking depth 3 Type G143 Qn Wn If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated for every corner you wish to find or whose position you want to reestablish CAUTION When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions later in this document or use the I J or K cycle parameters for the sam
39. Basics OO UOC O do The Console The CNC console consists of a 12 1 inch color flat panel liquid crystal display LCD keypad soft keys and manual panel MP 6000M or MP 6001M Manual Panel Refer to Figure 2 1 ANILAM 6000 La e o Le e la 1 morio 9 Co C e RJ Cs Cz LCD v w 4 x 2 5 fas Keypad 2 ua la ia lo bs at Soft Keys r F2 ra rs Fs re Fz Fe re Feo Manual o 0 0 0 Panel gt ry G N OQ e pest a Q SPINDLE EN E Console6000i Figure 2 1 CNC Console All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 2 1 25 January 08 ANILAM Keypad 2 2 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 CNC Console and Software Basics The following topics are described a Alphanumeric Keys a Editing Keys Refer to Figure 2 2 The keypad to the right of the LCD has the following areas Alphanumeric Keys This area consists of the letters of the alphabet Edit Keys JIE s Le Le lel Ls Le Le 5 a e aa fe Bes 1 la le NB le e ke Eo A G O O O O ajaja B AE KEYPAD listed sequentially from A to W and also includes the CLEAR key lower right the numerical keypad 0 through 9 and the SPACE key lower left This area contains the SHIFT left ENTER right and the cursor control keys ARROWS CLEAR Key SHIFT Key Character Alphanumeric Keys Primary Character
40. Code Listing Label and Description Rapid Move Axis moves made at rapidrate See also Table 7 4 Most Common Modal G Codes Feed Move Axis moves made at feedrate See also Table 7 4 Most Common Modal G Codes Arc CW Sets clockwise circular interpolation See also Table 7 4 Most Common Modal G Codes Arc CCW Sets counterclockwise circular interpolation See also Table 7 4 Most Common Modal G Codes G4 Dwell Programs a timed or infinite dwell Exact Stop Non modal exact stop check Activates exact stop check for a single block G17 XY Plane Sets default XY plane See also Table 7 4 Most Common Modal G Codes XZ Plane Sets default XZ plane See also Table 7 4 Most Common Modal G Codes 7 14 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help ANILAM Table 7 5 Edit Help G Code Listing Continued Label and Description YZ Plane Sets default YZ plane See also able 7 4 Most Common Modal G Codes 622 Stroke Limit Activates deactivates software limits Reference Point Return Return to Machine Home directly or through an intermediary point Return from Reference Point Return from Machine Home to the coordinates specified G29 Xn Zn Compensation OFF Tool radius compensation cancel G41 or G42 Compensation LEFT Tool radius compensation LEFT Compensation RIGHT Tool radius compensation RIGHT Fixture Offset Shifts the location of Abs
41. Converter and returns to the Program page Be sure to Save F8 any work done before exiting Anything not saved will be lost If shapes have been created a message Exit Y N is displayed This is a reminder to be sure you have saved your work The following topics are described l l l l Fitting the Display to the Viewing Window Using the Window Zoom Halving Display Size Doubling Display Size All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 16 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature Fitting the Display to the Viewing Window The DXF Converter can automatically scale the display to fit into the viewing area To fit the display in the viewing area 1 In DXF press Display F5 A pop up menu displays 2 Highlight Fit and press ENTER The pop up closes and the display adjusts to fit into the viewing window Using the Window Zoom The DXF Converter allows you to zoom in on any part of the display To zoom in on part of the display 1 In DXF press Display F5 A pop up menu displays 2 Highlight Window and press ENTER A window displays inside the viewing window Use the mouse to center the window over the area of interest Once the window is positioned press ENTER The part of the display framed by the window will fill the viewing window Halving Display Size The DXF Converter can reduce the size of the display to half the existing
42. Corner Finding G142 Inside Corner Finding G143 Out Inside Boss Hole Finding G144 Out Inside Web Finding G145 Protected Probe Positioning G146 Skew Error Find G147 DO UOUODOCOCO OU 5 78 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Spindle Probe Calibration G140 Format G140 Qn Hn En Vn Dn An Bn Refer to Table 5 44 Table 5 44 G140 Address Word Address Word Description Set Q to 1 if you are calibrating to a boss verses a ring gauge Otherwise do not set or setto 0 Default is 0 Optional If set to 1 the cycle will find the top of the part before calibrating the probe If Q parameter is set to 1 H is forced to 1 as well otherwise the Default is 0 Optional The distance to go down from the top of the ring gauge or standing boss for calibration This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle will bring the probe down past the top of the ring gauge after finding the top 0 1 Note If the stylus ball is greater than 2 5 08 mm E must be set to at least half the ball diameter Optional V The V parameter specifies the distance to back away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1 2 54 mm if not set Optional The diameter of the ring gauge hole the probe stylus will come in contact with This is only to override t
43. Cycle G86 Chip Break Cycle G87 Flat Bottom Boring Cycle G88 Drilling Example Pattern Drill Cycles Drill Bolt Hole Cycle G79 Drill Pattern Cycle G179 DOoOoODODUDUUDODODUDODODUO ODO 5 2 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Drilling Off G80 Format G80 Modal cycles remain active until canceled Use G80 to cancel drill tap and bore canned cycles G81 to G89 G80 can be included with other commands on a block Basic Drill Cycle G81 Format G81 Zn Rn Fn Pn G81 is a basic drilling cycle generally used for center drilling or hole drilling that does not require a pecking motion It feeds from the start height R to the specified hole depth Z at a given feedrate F then rapids to the return height P Refer to Figure 7 12 Basic Drill Cycle Screen Refer to Table 5 1 Table 5 1 G81 Address Words Address Label Word Description ZDepth zZz Absolute hole depth Required StartHgt R Initial Z start point in rapid Required Feed F Feedrate 3 3 3 3 35353 35353533 Z return point after hole depth in rapid P must be higher than R CounterBore Drill Cycle G82 Format G82 Zn Rn Dn Fn Pn G82 is the counter bore cycle generally used for counterboring It feeds from the R plane to Z depth dwells for specified time then rapids to the return point Refer to Figure 7 13 CounterBore
44. EndMill cycle defined 4 2 description 5 39 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 17 screen illustration 7 23 G177 plunge circular pocket cycle defined 4 2 description 5 43 edit help 7 10 listing table 7 17 position the start hole 5 44 screen illustration 7 26 G178 plunge rectangular pocket cycle defined 4 2 description 5 13 5 44 edit help 7 10 listing table 7 17 position the start hole 5 45 screen illustration 7 26 G179 drill pattern cycle defined 4 2 description 5 11 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 17 programming example illustration 5 12 screen illustration 7 25 G18 XZ plane defined 4 1 edit help 7 5 illustration 4 12 listing table 7 14 Index 10 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index modal listing table 7 14 G181 thread mill cycle defined 4 2 description 5 40 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 17 screen illustration 7 23 G19 YZ plane defined 4 1 edit help 7 5 illustration 4 12 listing table 7 15 modal listing table 7 14 G190 engrave cycle description 5 46 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 18 sample program 5 47 screen illustration 7 24 G2 arc CW defined 4 1 description 4 7 7 8 edit help 7 6 listing table 7 14 modal listing table 7 14 G22 stroke limit defined 4 1 edit help 7 11 listing table 7 15 to set 4 14 G28 reference point return defined 4 1 description 4 15 edit help 7 11 listing table 7 15 G29 return from machine hom
45. G Codes affect only the block in which they are programmed Edit Help provides graphic menus and labeled entry fields to aid those unfamiliar with G Code programming Refer to Section 7 Edit Help for information Table 4 1 G Codes Pp Maa NonmModa G Code Function G Code Function co Rapid Move End Point ca owe Feed Move End Point c9 Exact Stop Arc CW Radius and End Point G28 _ Reference Point Return Arc CCW Radius and End Point G29 Return from Reference Point XY plane G30 Move Reference from Machine Home XZ plane c31 Probe Move VZ plane c G73 Macro Call Single Stroke Limit G Draft Angle Pocket Cycle 73 75 Compensation LEFT _G76 Hole Mill Cycle Compensation RIGHT 677 Circular Pocket Cycle Rectangular Pocket Cycle il Bolt Hole Cycle Spindle Probe Calibration Cycle Single Surface Measure Edge Find Contouring Mode Outside Part Corner Find Compensation OFF G75 rame Pocket Cycle Macro Call Modal Inside Part Corner Find Cancel Modal Macro Inside or Outside Hole or Boss Center Find Rotation Axis Kia Inside or Outside Web or Slot Center Protected Positioning Move G147 Skew Error or Angle Find Tool Probe Calibration Cycle Drilling Off Tool Length and Diameter Offset Preset Basic Drill Cycle G152 Manual Tool Length Offset Preset Continued Gt G2 G3 618 G19 G22 G40 Gat Gaz G53 G59 G60 G61 Exac
46. G02 X1 Y1 11 JO F8 G01 X2 The number of separate steps in a program file is limited only by the available memory Block separators can also be used in programs Tool Offset Modification You can modify a tool diameter or length offset in the program without using the Tool Page This is useful when rough milling a profile where cutter diameter compensation requires different diameter definitions for the same tool to step the width of the cut Tool modification can be either temporary or permanent To make it temporary choose not to update the Tool Page To make it permanent choose to update the Tool Page Refer to Figure 17 1 Ll a gt gt i i i le Ct TOOLMOD Figure 17 1 Tool Modification Programming Example All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Temporary Format T1 D 5500 L 1 1000 Changes Tool 1 diameter offset to 5500 and length offset to 1 1000 Do not update the Tool Page for Tool 1 Permanent Format T1 D 5500 L 1 1000 H M6 Changes Tool 1 diameter offset to 0 5500 and length offset to 1 1000 Updates the Tool Page for Tool 1 to entered values D and L values are absolute and replace the previous offsets They are not added to existing offsets The H command instructs the CNC to update the Tool Page offsets to the programmed values and must come between the M6 and
47. G162 followed by a list of up to 5 subprogram label names If more than 5 islands need to be defined the G162 can be used to define as many subsequent islands as desired in multiples of 5 up to as many as needed As in the following example G162A2B3C4D5E6 G162A7B8C9D10E 11 G162A12B13C14D15E 16 G162A 17 B 18 and so forth prior to calling the G169 area clearance or irregular pocket command The islands need to be a closed contiguous line and or arc movements starting and ending at the same point and starting with a G41 left or G42 right as the first line to indicate which side of the contour the cutter needs to be as viewed from the direction of travel No ramp on or off movement is allowed The cycle will calculate these moves on and off the islands Activate a tool prior to programming G162 and G169 so cutter diameter is known G162 is for use with G169 only Program G162 before G169 Table 5 19 G162 Address Words Address Label Word Description TFirstis A Firstitand Required OOS Secondist B Second island Thirdls Third island Fourthlsl D Fourth island Fifthis E _ Fifthisand 2 5 26 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Using Subroutines for Pockets with Islands The program below is the same one used in the DXF portion with subroutines added for the letters See Figure 5 10 and
48. G190 Drilling Cycles Face Mill Cycle Refer to Section 5 Face Mill Cycle G170 Circular Profile Cycle Refer to Section 5 Circular Profile Cycle G171 Rectangular Profile Cycle Refer to Section 5 Rectangular Profile Cycle G172 Mill Cycle Refer to Section 5 Mill Cycle G175 EndMill Cycle Refer to Section 5 EndMill Cycle G176 Tread Mill Cycle Refer to Section 5 Tread Mill Cycle G181 Engrave Cycle Refer to Section 5 Engrave Cycle G190 The Drilling Cycles enables G79 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G89 G179 Drill Bolt Hole Cycle Refer to Section 5 Drill Bolt Hole Cycle G79 Drilling Off Refer to Section 5 Drilling Off G80 Basic Drill Cycle Refer to Section 5 Basic Drill Cycle G81 CounterBore Drill Cycle Refer to Section 5 CounterBore Drill Cycle G82 Peck Drill Cycle Refer to Section 5 Peck Drill Cycle G83 Tapping Cycle Refer to Section 5 Tapping Cycle G84 Boring Bidirectional Cycle Refer to Section 5 Boring Bidirectional Cycle G85 Boring Unidirectional Cycle Refer to Section 5 Boring Unidirectional Cycle G86 Chip Break Cycle Refer to Section 5 Chip Break Cycle G87 Flat Bottom Boring Cycle Refer to Section 5 Flat Bottom Boring Cycle G89 Drill Pattern Cycle Refer to Section 5 Drill Pattern Cycle G179 All rights reserved S
49. G2 X1 58477 Y0 91299 l 0 43096 J1 03598 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 16 15 25 January 08 ANILAM 16 16 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature G2 X1 52108 Y0 97667 10 04536 J0 10905 G2 X1 52108 Y1 83859 11 03598 J0 43096 G2 X1 58477 Y1 90228 10 10905 J 0 04536 G2 X2 44669 Y1 90228 10 43096 J 1 03598 G2 X2 51037 Y1 83859 1 0 04536 J 0 10905 G2 X2 51037 Y0 97667 1 03598 J 0 43096 G1 X2 51037 Y0 97667 M99 02 GO X2 01573 Y1 86039 GO X2 46848 Y1 40763 GO X2 01573 Y0 95488 GO X1 56297 Y1 40763 M99 Approximated stock for easy 3D simulated draw G120 X2 71 Y2 1 Z0 11 32 J0 71 K 1 125 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Section 17 Advanced Programming Features The following topics are described in this section Q Modifiers o Block Separators Q Tool Offset Modifications o Expressions and Functions a System Variables a User Variables a User Macros G65 G66 G67 a Probe Move G31 Q Conditional Statements a Unconditional LOOP Repeat a Short Form Addressing a Logical and Comparative Terms a File Inclusion Modifiers Use modifiers to alter the way the CNC interprets a word address For example a single value in an Inch Mode program may be forced to Metric Mode without programming G71 Or arc center values I J or K may be forced to an absolute value
50. G76 block Activate a tool prior to G76 so that the CNC knows the tool diameter Refer to Table 5 15 If you do not provide Z and H program a separate Z move to raise the tool out of the hole after the cycle Table 5 15 G76 Address Words Address Label Word Description Diameter Diameter of hole Negative D CW direction The direction CCW climb milling is reversible D dimension climb CCW D dimension conventional CW Required XCenter X coordinate of the center Default Pocket centers at present position YCenter Y coordinate of the center If no coordinate is provided default is set to present position DepthCut O B Z axis increment used for each pass ZDeth z The absolute depth of the finished pocket Absolute Z position to which the CNC rapids before feeding into the workpiece RoughFeed Rough pass feedrate Defaults to last programmed feedrate Finish pass feedrate Defaults to last programmed feedrate Finish stock amount per side If you enter a negative value stock will be left but no finish pass will occur If you do not enter a value no finish stock will be left Example G76 D2 5 J12 S 01 K20 In Figure 5 7 G76 Programming Example the tool will perform the following operations 1 Tool moves from position 1 to a position 45 degrees from center at half the radius position 2 2 Tool then arcs onto the O D tangential CCW position 3 3 Tool mills O D CCW position 4
51. J Y center and K Z center NOTE Arc centers are incremental by default This is set up in the Setup Utility Arc Radius NOTE If Arc is greater than 180 enter the R value as a negative value For example R 5 The following topic is described a Examples of Circular Interpolation All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 7 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Examples of Circular Interpolation Partial Arcs XYIJ Figure 4 4 illustrates an arc move between P2 and P3 P3 4 5 114 3 mm XOYO P5 G2_G3 Figure 4 4 Circular Interpolation Absolute Mode Refer to Table 4 6 Table 4 6 Circular Interpolation in Absolute Mode Inches Address Word Format Description G70 G90 G17 G1 Y2 5 F3 Activate Inch and Absolute Mode and set feedrate to IPR Activate plane Feed to P2 G2 X 5 Y3 0 1 5 JO Arc move to P3 Incremental Mode Refer to Table 4 7 Table 4 7 Circular Interpolation in Incremental Mode Inches Address Word Format Description G70 G91 G17 G1 Y2 5 F3 Activate Inch and Absolute Mode and set feedrate to IPR Activate plane Feed to P2 G2 X 5 Y 5 1 5 JO Arc move to P3 4 8 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Any arc of less than 360 degrees is a partial arc U
52. January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature CNC Code Each shape that is created is made into a subroutine For each subroutine there is a call in the main program Running the CNC program in Draw mode allows the tool paths to be seen The file must be edited to add tool numbers feed rates cutter comp on or off and so forth The tool paths are only as accurate as the DXF drawing file used Mouse Operations Refer to Table 16 1 Table 16 1 Mouse Operations Button Event Function Press Drag Release Right Press Drag Release New contour signa Click Select mode on Select Entity 16 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature DXF Soft Keys Refer to Table 16 2 Table 16 2 Soft Key Descriptions Soft Key Function Description S Fi Toggi Select Select mode must be on when chaining shapes Mode T er Menu Pop up menu has All Layers on Invert Layers Toggle Layers Layers can be turned on or off as desired Display Menu Pop up menu has Fit Window Half and Double Select the desired display Save Creates CNC code The message Successfully created filename M or G is displayed when Save is activated If no shapes are defined a warning message is displayed F9 Setup Set the parameters for the DXF conversion F10 exits the Setup menus exits the DXF
53. M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 M4 spindle reverse control M Codes 12 2 edit help 7 19 spindle functions 7 12 to use G86 boring unidirectional cycle 5 6 M5 spindle Off control M Codes 12 2 edit help 7 19 spindle functions 7 12 to use G86 boring unidirectional cycle 5 6 Index 16 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index M6 tool mount control M Codes 12 2 edit help 7 19 tool activation 9 11 tool change 7 12 M8 coolant On control M Codes 12 2 cooling cleaning amp lubrication 7 12 edit help 7 19 M9 coolant Off control M Codes 12 2 cooling cleaning 4 lubrication 7 12 edit help 7 19 M9387 M Code probe select 17 26 M98 call subprogram basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 M99 end of subprogram basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 description 5 53 edit help 7 19 macro terminated 4 26 machine home move reference from G30 4 17 setup 3 1 software DXF converter 16 1 status display area manual screen area 3 10 status display area labels 3 11 macro body structure description 17 18 defined 17 11 G65 program example 17 20 G65 subprogram example 17 20 G66 G67 program example 17 21 letter addresses listed 17 19 passing parameters 17 18 programming hole milling macro example 17 23 setting parameters 17 18 SLOTMAC G program example 17 22 symbol or name variables description 17 23 All rights reserved Subject to change withou
54. O B5 Changes to Single Step Mode Auto Changes to Auto Mode Use to run part programs for production Press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Single Step and Auto Mode Shift screen refer to Figure 11 2 Auto Screen Refer to Table 11 2 Table 11 2 Single Step and Auto Mode Screen Secondary Soft Keys Soft Key SHIFT F1 Displays the last 10 messages both old already read and new not yet read BG Prog SHIFT F3 Background programming displays Figure 10 1 Program Screen and enables to change the program while it is running Parts SHIFT F4 Activates the Parts Counter pop up Counter window to reset the New Value OSC SHIFT F7 Oscilloscope For details see 60001 CNC Technical Manual PIN 627787 21 SHIFT F8 On line Monitor For details see 6000i Technical Manual PIN 627787 The following topics are described a Using Single Step Mode a Holding or Canceling a Single Step Run a Single Step Execution of Selected Program Blocks All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 11 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Running Programs Using Single Step Mode When Single Step is active Single Step F5 highlights e In Single Step Mode the CNC holds before it executes each block Press START to execute each block Holding or Canceling a Single Step Run Press HOLD to halt the execution of the program Press START to restart a program that is on
55. Operation and Machine Setup POWErn nd OMNE ONC eones pul cerros c E llenos sac oaeneaueaeseactionics 3 1 NUS DOW ite ENE ie dae c DOS 3 6 Emergency Stop ES TOP Nic cias 3 6 Ac vaung Resetting ING Servos y e eee 3 6 nn E daa thannancdeieags E 3 7 Manual Panel Keys ci to tea dw o Da eeu 3 8 Manual Panett A eg Te tet ene ee eet 3 9 Manual Mode Streemima ec apuintue T a lina radi ad te teat aa a 3 10 Machine Status Display Area Labels ooocccoccccnccconncocncoonococnnonnonnnnnnnnoncnonnncnnnnnnnnnonnonaninnnnnos 3 11 Program Aroa LaS o a ceca 3 11 Manual Mode Settings units a e 3 12 PEC OLM 056 and SIK DESCHOUONS uan adas 3 14 SMUT DOWN SHIFT FETO carroceria lr ist serlo rin 3 14 Wessages IVISGS SHIFT PA a a e eee detesto 3 15 Activating Manual Mode Rapid Or Feed occocccoccccccccccccococococononononcoconononnnoncnonrnnnonannnnnnanenaninanens 3 16 Acjustindg Rapid Move Speed sr a e o o end colo 3 16 A PPP rae tactase E RTA 3 16 PA SOULS MOO osha ayaa E cease A E E caudagueanaeaiiuamusn aac tasneet 3 17 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice V 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Contents LOTO UN OA Loss orna e nO ane patee ere caeeneseaeeseacuess 3 18 changing the JOG ModE it o tl do to 3 18 o IIS ix 5 nos nerd a a tacheson dnote ieeueate de 3 18 Jogging the Machine Incremental MOVES cccccccecccseeceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeceueeseeesueeseeessueeseeesanes 3 19 Jogging
56. SPACE Key ENTER Key ARROW Keys SHIFT Key Edit Keys Figure 2 2 Keypad All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 CNC Console and Software Basics Alphanumeric Keys Alphanumeric keys allow you to enter position coordinates XYZ moves and program G M S and T codes Some keyfaces have two characters a large one in the middle of the key and a smaller one in the upper left corner The large characters are Primary characters The smaller characters are SHIFT key characters To type a primary character press the key that contains that character To type a SHIFT key character 1 Press SHIFT and release You do not need to hold down the key the SHIFT condition remains On until you press the next key 2 Press the key that displays the required character in the upper left corner Refer to Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Alphanumeric Keys Primary Function SHIFT Function e Miscellaneous Functions Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 2 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual 2 4 P N 627785 21 CNC Console and Software Basics Table 2 1 Alphanumeric Keys Continued Primary Function SHIFT Function Letter N Left Curly Bracket Letter O Right Curly Bracket Program Number Designator Letter P Dollar Sign Letter S Spindle Speed Backslash Designator Letter T Tool words Single Quote L
57. Screen 3 Type in Find what and Replace with texts Press Replace F6 Use Match Case F4 for a case sensitive search 4 Each time you press Replace F6 the CNC finds the next occurrence of the text in the program You can search forward Find next F2 or backward Find previous F1 in the program The text is not replaced until you press the Replace F6 soft key A description of the Find Replace soft keys follows Going to a Block of the Program Listing Use Goto Block to move to any line in the Program Listing Goto Block operates independently of block numbering Blocks can be numbered sequentially by any increment 1 5 10 Goto Block counts the blocks of the program in increments of 1 1 starting block 2 3 When the feature is activated the CNC goes to the line number specified by the user regardless of how the blocks are numbered Block Line N10 Line 1 N20 Line 2 N30 Line 3 1 In Edit Mode press Move F7 to display the pop up Refer to Figure 6 3 Move F7 Pop up Menu 2 Highlight Goto Block And press enter to display the Goto dialog prompt Refer to Figure 6 6 Goto Block Dialog Prompt All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 6 13 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Editor T7 0 807 Drill T8 0 250 End Mill T9 0 169 Drill 14 T10 0 209 Drill 15 T11 0 500 Drill 16 T12 0 120 Drill L7 18 Tools are set on the top of the
58. Software Off line Software The Personal Computer PC must have a mouse installed The Anilam Off line Software is required The Anilam Off line Software will run in a Windows environment See Section 14 Off line Software Machine Software A mouse or other pointing device for example track ball must be installed to properly operate the DXF converter on the machine Depending on the mouse it may be necessary to have the mouse connected before turning the CNC on All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 16 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature Entry to the DXF Converter To open the DXF Converter off line software 1 Open the Anilam Off line Software 2 Gain access to the Program page select Program Type DXF drawings dxf and highlight the DXF file you wish to convert For details on how to work with the Program page see Section 10 Program Management 3 Select the Edit F8 soft key to open and bring the drawing into the DXF converter Refer to Figure 16 1 Mouse Pointer Position X Y Prog ram Name ji SAMPLE DXF Se OOO Y axis Scale gt gt X axis Scale 1 I ot l I I I j I I l I l l I 1 lo La 2 la Em Layers Display Figure 16 1 DXF Screen The drawing display screen shows the file name in the upper left border the current X Y position of the mouse p
59. Use F10 to insert the M Code into the program 1 From the Main Edit Help screen or from a Help Template Menu type the entire M Code Example M2 etc The Edit Help displays the typed M Code NOTE Ifthe M Code requires a parameter the software displays the Help Graphic for the typed M Code Only M30 and M98 require parameters Fill in the entry fields for these M Codes 2 Press Use F10 to enter the block into the program Press Cancel F9 to cancel your entry and clear the screen Accepted commands are inserted in the program 7 20 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Edit Help Examples of G Code Help Screens Some examples of the G Code Help screens are illustrated below For example from Milling and Profiles select Face Mill Cycle G170 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 5 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill Ki 1058588 es e eee Figure 7 5 Face Mill Cycle Screen From Milling and Profiles select Circular Profile Cycle G171 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 6 ES This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x
60. V IMOGCS cita io Do O tano ted LO 11 6 Automatic Program EXeCU ON occooccccccoccconocononononnnoononononononnonononnnonnnnnnnnnonnnennnrnnonanennnrnnnnninaninss 11 6 Holding Or Canceling an Auto RUN O o nd 11 7 starting ata Specie BOOK escrita ler isa 11 7 Clearin a Halted Prog ial 4 8 2 revs a ot wade ease edo 11 8 Using Draw While Running Programs ccccccsecceeecececueceueceseceeeceeceeeseuesacecsescuesaeeseeseuesasesaeenas 11 8 Parts Gounter and Program TIME nl tds o elo as e be dl 11 10 A a 11 11 Muang Jog REA dado cie 11 11 Operations Allowed While In JOg Return ccoocccccnccccncccncoccconcnconnnnononnconncnonnnnnnnnnonnnonnononinnnnns 11 11 JOGR etn SOLE KEYS a e ag e an eee 11 12 7 e 11 13 NOES ONJO RC e Re lahat a o 11 15 Section 12 S and M Functions Speed Spindle Gontrol S FUNCHON iiiec nsei e a eaan eiee 12 1 Miscellaneous Functions M COde ccccccccsecccececeeceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeesuseseeeseeeeseeeseeegas 12 2 CONTO MEC IES R de a o 12 3 order OF EAU id 12 4 Section 13 Machine Software and Peripherals Installation Keyboard Stalin o tiaee et oro ean 13 1 Keypad Equivalent Keyboard KeyS ccccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesaeeseeeseeeseeseetaeeseeeseesaeeseeeseeegaes 13 1 Reripnetrals SUPDO Ml 13 2 Section 14 Off line Software Ulloa eE 14 1 Section 15 Four Axis Programming A EQ A A O Re EEE ee 15 1 Rotary Axis Programming Conventions ci
61. a 5 10 By Patern Crd Cu WGC uae eee een nee tdo eer ee eee eee eee 5 11 FPOCKEL CY CICS aime a O eet ik ab tals aad et ets a 5 13 Draft Angle Pocket CY CIE G 7S sarrollo nicolas ee 5 14 Frame POcket Cycle STO o da eco 5 16 Hole MIE YC GTO anos dan 5 18 Circular POCKET CY ce GTF a dl ci o dl nO de LS 5 20 Rectangular Pocket Cycle G78 orsina RARE EEEE 5 22 Irregular Pocket CyGle TO e dto 00 5 24 cs O O A eee 5 26 regular Pocke Example Sa o e entro e E er ld 5 30 Face Will CV Cle GIZO scan occ rcade 5 32 Circular Prone Cycle OTIT are sh ode sSia 5 34 Rectangular Profile Cycle Gl Llana tias 5 36 US E O A tte nate fe ete E eee eer 5 38 End Cy GIG GITO cgr E a 5 39 Thread MilltCyele4 Gi ci a MAS MODO 5 40 Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle G177 coocccconccccncconicocncocnocononocononnonanonanonnnnonnnonaronarnnnnnonaninnnnnos 5 43 Plunge Rectangular Pocket G17 8 ice o o o O a dd o 5 44 Engrave Cyclen GTO static a 5 46 SUDO on 5 48 SUBprogram Addresses rial 5 49 Repetition of subprogram LOOD id o e 5 49 Calling a Subprogram from a Subprogram oocccoccccncccccnccnnncncnnncnnncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonoss 5 50 End of Subprogram M99 with a P CO06 oocccocccoccccccccocccncnononoconncncnonanonanononnonanonanonannonanenanenos 5 53 Subprogram for Multiple Parts PrograMmMino cccocccocnccccncocnconnconcncncnconnonoconncnnnnnnoncnnnnncnaninaninoss 5 53 ES A O 5 54 PODNO CUCIO resorte ptes 5 57 TOON PFO
62. and placing the calculated diameter value in the diameter register for the tool being preset and any value in the diameter wear register will be reset to zero Then the Z axis will rapid up to the home position If you have done a single tool in Manual that tool is now measured and you are ready to measure the next tool If you have placed multiple lines in a program one for each tool the machine will then grab the next tool and repeat steps 1 through 9 until all the tools have been measured All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Manual Tool Length Measure for Special Tools G152 Format G152 Tn Dn Mn Sn Rn This cycle is used to measure the length of large face mill style tools that have a hole in the center of the bottom of the tool Refer to Table 5 41 for special tools desc Table 5 41 G152 Address Word Address Word Description Tool number Required With only the T parameter present the spindle will turn on in reverse and the canned cycle will come straight down measuring the tool length and storing it in the tool length register The T parameter must the same as the current tool in the spindle This is the rough diameter of the tool and is only used in this cycle to determine if the spindle should be turned on in reverse or forward If you have a left handed tool you would give a negative value to the diam
63. based on the setting of the Output format parameter A file is also created with the extension sel This file saves the status of parameter settings that were used in Setup From the Program listing open the DXF file Refer to Figure 16 2 SAMPLE DXF t a line nf I 1 1 l 1 l I I lo f la select ll Layers Display Figure 16 2 Example DXF File All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature Refer to Figure 16 3 Many unneeded layers have been turned off The Figure shows the drill locations and the contour selected numbered 1 and 2 SAMPLE DXF ZOOM PART Figure 16 3 Zoomed Part The following topics are described Unedited Conversational Program Listing Unedited G Code Program Listing Unedited Program Run in Draw Edited Conversational Program Listing Edited G Code Program Listing OOOO do All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 16 9 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature Unedited Conversational Program Listing The CNC conversational program is created and must be edited to be usable An unedited conversational program created from Figure 16 3 Zoomed Part follows See Table 16 4 An unedited G Code program created from the Figure 16 3 Zoomed Part example is listed in Table 16 5 Unedited G Code Program Listing Tab
64. be measured in the X or Y axis Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe and that tool offset active before using this cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating tool length offsets A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate active before using this cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating work coordinate offsets The G145 Inside or Outside Web Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from the manual mode Refer to Table 5 49 Table 5 49 G145 Address Words Address Word Description rios or Outside Inside Hole 1 Outside Boss O EE X width of Web if measuring in the X axis X or Y NIE be specified but only one not both Estimated Y width of Web if measuring in the Y axis X or Y must be specified but only one not both If set to 1 the cycle will find the top of the part before finding center of Web If Q parameter is set to 1 H is forced to 1 as well otherwise the Default is 0 Optional The distance to go down from the top of part to find X or Y coordinate of the center This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle will bring the probe stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the top 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Specifies the distance aw
65. depth less finish stock Ramp Feed Z Plunge feed The tool will plunge to the first depth of cut with a single axis Z move from the centerline of the lower left radius Defaults to last programmed feedrate Rough Feed J After the plunge move the tool will rough mill the pocket at feedrate J Defaults to last programmed feedrate Continued 5 44 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 30 G178 Address Word Continued Address Label Word Description Finish pass feedrate Defaults to last programmed feedrate Finish stock amount per side including bottom Negative stock will be left but no finish pass i occur Positive leave stock and execute finish pass If not programmed no finish stock is left Z axis absolute finish height must be equal to or above H Defaults to H Z Start Height value Executed in rapid WARNING When you cut a pocket inside another pocket you must set P above the highest pocket At the end of each pocket the tool will rapid to P then rapid to the start position Stepover A Maximum tool stepover must be 70 or less of tool diameter Positive CCW Negative CW Defaults to half tool diameter Corner Actual corner radius of pocket all four corners Must be Radius equal or greater than tool radius Defaults to tool radius You must position the start hole at
66. description 3 15 screen illustration 3 15 single step screen 11 3 soft keys description 3 15 N name variables description 17 23 negative radius value 7 6 negative signs 7 3 nesting subprograms 5 50 new program creating 10 7 nominalProbeStylusBallRadius description 5 77 nominalProbeStylusDiameter description 5 58 non modal G Codes defined 4 1 listed table 4 1 NOT operator description 17 31 number of parts counter 11 10 O OEM common global variables macro numbers 17 9 off line program group illustration 14 2 software desktop icon 14 2 DXF converter 16 1 installation 14 1 shut down 14 1 starting 14 1 offset activate via program 9 32 active tool machine status display 3 11 table illustration 4 19 tool page entering 9 13 Index 18 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index tool page errors to correct 9 13 Offset F3 description 9 9 fixture offset table to activate 4 19 OLM SHIFT F7 referenced 3 14 9 10 OLM SHIFT F8 auto mode screen 11 3 single step screen 11 3 one shot moves 3 20 on line monitor See OLM operator prompts 2 8 operators listed functions 17 5 optional entry fields description 7 3 optional program stop MO1 See M1 12 3 M1 control M Codes 12 3 order of execution codes 12 4 order of operations 17 14 OSC SHIFT F7 auto mode screen 11 3 single step screen 11 3 OSC SHIFT F8 referenced 3 14 oscilloscoper See OS
67. entered coordinate 1 Highlight a Fixture Offset row 1 to 99 in the Fixture Offset Table 2 Press an axis key X Y or Z 3 Type a value Press ENTER The CNC stores the value in the table Adjusting Fixture Offsets in the Table To adjust an existing fixture offset 1 Highlight a Fixture Offset row 1 to 99 in the Fixture Offset Table 2 Press the letter A key to display the message Enter axis and adjustment value 3 Type the axis to adjust X Y or Z and the amount of the adjustment The adjustment value may be positive or negative 4 Press ENTER to adjust the value and display the adjusted value in the table All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 19 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes G53 Programming Examples G53 examples 1 to 3 below will clear any active G92 1 Use offset number three from preset table G53 O3 Activates a zero point previously entered in the table Clear any active offset G53 00 Use to clear any offset of G53 or G92 It resets the current zero to Machine Home Update offset table shift coordinates G53 On Xn Yn Zn Un C The C word tells the CNC to update the table Use as an immediate command to shift Absolute Zero and save values in the offset table Update offset table but do not activate the shift G53 On Xn Yn Zn Un is used when offsets are defined at the beginning of a program It is stri
68. equal 0 omit these parameters Starting Point CIRCLE Figure 4 6 Circle Sample Helical Interpolation XYZIJK Format G17 G2 Xn Yn Zn In Jn Ln Helical interpolation adds a third dimension to G2 or G3 moves For the XY plane G17 the tool will move in a circular motion in the XY axes and linearly in Z simultaneously The added Z parameter provides the Z endpoint L is the number of complete plus partial revolutions referenced from the start point You can use helical interpolation for threading and rough boring applications Additional linear or rotary axes U W can also be specified Refer to Table 4 8 Table 4 8 Helical Interpolation Program lo Block Description ___ N5 G17 G90 G70 GO XO YO ZO Sets XY plane Absolute Inch Rapid Modes Moves axes to zero N6 G02 X2 0 YO Z 5 11 0 JO L1 F20 Programs CW helical move to X2 YO Z 5 with center point at 11J0 and O complete turns The tool will execute a half turn at feedrate F20 If L2 were programmed the tool would make 1 1 2 turns N7 G01 Next block 4 10 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Dwell G4 Dwell G4 can be used to program a delay between blocks A Timed Dwell is a timed stop An Infinite Dwell is a stop that can be canceled only by pressing START With a dwell activated the CNC halts motions on all axes but other functions
69. for the E STOP Therefore emergency shutdowns E STOP cannot be performed via keyboard NOTE Industrial grade keyboards are recommended for shop environments Keypad Equivalent Keyboard Keys Refer to Table 13 1 Table 13 1 Keyboard Equivalents Keyboard Keystroke CNC a Face Equivalent CLEAR ALT C DELETE ARROWS ARROWS ee AAN ol A A A l Boi IN HOLD ALT H All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 13 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Machine Software and Peripherals Installation Peripherals Supported 13 2 The 6000i also supports other Universal Serial Bus USB devices USB Memory Sticks USB Floppy Drives USB CD ROM Drives USB Mouse All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Off line Software Installation Section 14 Off line Software The off line software is compatible with Microsoft Windows XP Operating System The hard disk drive must have a minimum of 1 5 GB of space available The following topics are described in this section Q Running and Shutting Down Contact your local ANILAM dealer or Sales office to obtain off line software Running and Shutting Down The software will automatically start running when the control is powered up When it is time to turn off the machine the CNC software must be shutdown first This is necessary to make sure that any data tha
70. give an alarm and the program will stop All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 61 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Description of Tool Probe Cycles This section contains detailed descriptions of the tool probe cycles Tool Probe Calibration Cycle G150 Tool Length and Diameter Offset Preset G151 Manual Tool Length Measure for Special Tools G152 Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Special Tools G153 Tool Breakage Length and Diameter Wear Detection G154 DOCOO CO O Tool Probe Calibration Cycle G150 Format G150 Dn En This cycle is used to calibrate the probe This is used to set the Z datum for length preset establishing the center of the probe stylus and the effective probe stylus diameter for setting tool diameter registers Refer to Table 5 39 Table 5 39 G150 Address Words Address Word Description The diameter of the part of the calibration standard that comes in contact with the probe stylus during calibration This should be an exact measurement Optional override for the diameterOfToolProbeGauge machine setup parameter The distance to go down along the side of the probe stylus with the probe calibration standard when touching the side of the stylus for diameter calibration The maximum E value is 0 55 13 97 mm Without any E value the cycle will bring the calibration standard down past the top of the probe stylus the d
71. i Rounded Figure 9 16 Compensation around an Acute Angle All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 27 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management General Precautions 1 10 11 When you program tool path instead of part edge a negative diameter in the Tool Page effectively changes G41 to G42 in the moves during compensation Third axis moves not in the active plane are permitted during compensation The CNC automatically rounds off the compensated intersection of acute angles of 15 degrees or less To change this value program 1031 It is possible to change the tool diameter currently in use with stock variable 1030 Startup Ramp On and cancellation Ramp Off blocks must be of GO or G1 type and must be at least the tool radius in length You must enter proper diameter value in the Tool Page before you use tool compensation Compensated arcs must be on the active plane G17 XY G18 XZ G19 YZ G53 Fixture Offset and G92 Zero Set are not permitted during compensation In Manual Mode any active compensation deactivates Jog Return is permitted during compensation System variable 1032 is available to change the number of blocks the CNC can look ahead while in tool comp CAUTION Changing this value can change the compensated tool path This variable enables further look ahead to prevent undercut excessive tool diamet
72. if not set and a warning message will tell the operator no update has taken place if W is not set Optional If set to 1 the cycle will do a preliminary measure in the X axis to get on center before measuring the Y axis making a total of 6 touches If set to 0 the cycle will only measure XC once for a total of 4 touches Default is 0 Optional To use the Inside Outside Boss Hole Finding Cycle 1 Place the probe in the spindle 2 Manually jog the probe stylus the approximate center in X amp Y within 0 1 2 54 mm If H 1 the Z axis should be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part otherwise the Z axis should be at the side picking depth 3 Type G144 Qn Xn Yn Wn If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated for every boss hole you wish to find or whose position you want to reestablish CAUTION When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions later in this document or use the I J or K cycle parameters for the same purpose 4 Execute that line in Manual by pressing START All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 87 25 January 08 ANILAM 5 88 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Inside Outside Web Finding G145 Format G145 Qn Xn Yn Hn En Vn An Bn In Jn Kn Wn An inside Web is a slot An outside Web is a standing rib Webs can only
73. it down to prevent the touch probe from being hit too hard This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original feedrate Optional This is the override for the medium feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_ Medium This is used for the same reason as the F cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original feedrate Optional This is the override for the slow feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow This is used for the same reason as the F cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original feedrate Optional This is the override for the RPM that was set in the machine setup parameter calibAndToolMeasurementRPM This is used for the same reason as the F cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original RPM Optional To use the automatic tool preset 1 Install all the tools you wish to set in the tool changer 2 Type in G151 T tool D tool rough diameter Q2 If run from the inside of a program this line needs to be repeated for every tool that you want to set 3 Execute that line if you are in Manual or run the program if you have set all the tools up in a program All ri
74. maximum 80 characters Z absolute start height Must be higher than ZDepth the Z parameter Required Z absolute depth of engraving Must be below StartHgt the H parameter Required Letter height Width will be proportional to height Height is measured at the centerline of the cutter Required X XStart X coordinate for lower left corner of the text Defaults to current position if not given Optional Y coordinate for lower left corner of the text Defaults to current position if not given Optional Ange C Angle in degrees Default is O degrees Optional YStart MirrorX MirrorY Mirrors all X moves Set by using minus key while in this field Optional Mirrors all Y moves Set by using minus key while in this field Optional Feedrate used while engraving Default is current feedrate Optional All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Sample Engrave Cycle Program G90 G70 GO X0 YO T1 X1 0 Y1 0 Z0 1 G190 A ABCD H 0 1 Z 01 E0 5 GO 21 0 XO YO M2 O ON DO OF OO N a This program will rapid to X1 0 Y1 0 Z will rapid to 0 1 and the letters ABCD will be engraved 0 0100 deep and 0 500 high All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 47 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Sub
75. notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Running Programs Section 11 Running Programs NOTE Verify all programs in Draw before you run them Refer to Section 8 Viewing Programs with Draw There are two modes of programmed operation Single Step Mode Runs a program one block at a time Automatic Mode Runs a program automatically without pausing The screens for both modes resemble the Manual screen Use the soft key labels to distinguish between modes The CNC highlights the label for the active mode You must load a program before you can run it to cut a part Load programs from the Program Manager Refer to Section 10 Program Management for information on how to load programs The Manual Data Input Mode MDI enables you to program a few quick moves without having to create and save a program MDI is usually used for manual operation It is available only in Manual Mode All programming tools moves and cycles are available in MDI Refer to Section 3 Manual Operation and Machine Setup for additional information The following topics are described in this section Running a Program One Step ata Time Position Display Modes Automatic Program Execution Clearing a Halted Program Using Draw While Running Programs Parts Counter and Program Timer Jog Return DvuUoOUOUDDO O All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 11 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manu
76. notice 5 13 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Draft Angle Pocket Cycle G73 Format G73 Xn Yn Hn Zn In En An Bn Cn Dn Qn Vn Sn Kn Wn Jn Use the draft pocket milling cycle G73 to machine a draft angle on a pocket The tool must be at the center point of the lower left corner radius This is where the machining begins You can use G78 to mill out an initial pocket prior to the G73 block Refer to Table 5 12 Table 5 12 G73 Address Words Address Label Word Description Bottom Length X X length at the bottom of the pocket Required Bottom Width Y Y width at the bottom of the pocket Required Start Height Z absolute rapid start height must be 0 1 inch or 2 mm above surface Required Z Depth abs Z absolute pocket depth Required Z Step Rough Z axis roughing step down Required Lower left corner radius Cannot be less than tool radius Required If only A is used then the A value is used for all four corners Lower Right Lower right corner radius Cannot be Rad less than tool radius Upper Left Rad C Upper right corner radius Cannot be less than tool radius Upper Right Upper left corner radius Cannot be Rad less than tool radius ZStepFinish Q Z axis finishing step down Max XY Step V Maximum XY tool stepover Used if angle is so great that the amount of XY step per Z step exceeds 70 of the tool diameter Finish STK XY L S XY finish
77. part is referred to as setting Part Zero Refer to Figure 3 9 Part Zero XO ZO All Positions Measured from Part Zero o Figure 3 9 Absolute Positioning NOTE To determine the Z axis location of Part Zero set tool length offsets for each tool NOTE The location of Absolute Zero can be restored after a shutdown if the machine has the Home function installed CAUTION If Part Zero is not correctly located the CNC will not position correctly in Absolute Mode All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 3 17 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Jog Moves You can make or change jog moves when e The CNC is in Manual Mode the Teach Mode or the Tool Page and e The servos are on The actual rate for each mode is determined at machine setup Use the JOG rotary switch to cycle the CNC through the Jog Mode choices Refer to Table 3 7 for the available Jog Modes Table 3 7 Jog Modes Mode Description Rapid Default rapid speed for continuous jogs Actual speed determined at machine setup Feed Continuous jog at feedrate determined at machine setup Jog 100 Conventional Jog Mode increment set to 100 times machine resolution Jog 10 Conventional Jog Mode increment set to 10 times machine resolution Jog 1 Conventional Jog Mode increment set to actual machine resolution You can change the Jog Mode any time the CNC is in Manual M
78. radius of pocket all four corners will be same Must be equal to or greater than tool radius Defaults to tool radius Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 17 G78 Address Words Continued Address Label Word Description RetractHgt Z axis absolute finish height must be equal to or above H Executed in rapid Defaults to H StartHgt value WARNING When you cut a pocket inside another pocket you must set P above the highest pocket At the end of each pocket the tool will rapid to P then rapid to the start position Example G78 M4 W2 H 1 Z 5 U 75 A 35 B 25 17 J12 S 01 K20 P 1 NOTE If you do not use X and Y words you must position the tool at the center of the pocket before the G78 block In Figure 5 9 the tool will perform the following operations NOTE Figure 5 9 shows only the tool path 1 Tool moves to the center of the radius in the lower left corner position 1 Tool feeds 1 2 mm to meet the part surface Tool moves in XYZ toward center of pocket position 2 to the first roughing depth at feedrate 4 Tool mills out the pocket with straight lines and arcs if necessary using feedrate J until first level is completed 5 Tool repeats this process if necessary to achieve full depth less finish stock Optional finish pass is made in the
79. reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features logical negative sign makes the axis move in the opposite direction The contents of the variables remain the same At Block N220 a loop which ends at Block N310 is set up The loop runs the number of times contained in variable 154 The first move in the loop is in the X and Y axes to the side of cut value in 153 In Block N240 111 decrements at each pass through the loop by the value of the side cut This value in turn is used to calculate a new length of cut for each side User Macros G65 G66 G67 Use G66 when you want to use a modal macro subprogram These groups of instructions can be special canned cycles made up by the user to simplify the programming of the particular part or master programs for similar part families programmed with variables rather than fixed dimensions Macros can contain automatic measuring sequences for sensors such as a probe for feedback to the CNC Refer to Table 17 4 Table 17 4 Macro G Codes G65 Pn Ln Non modal macro call Call macro n Execute macro at the current position only once The subprogram can be looped L Modal macro call Call macro n Execute macro at any X and or Y location given after the G66 code until G67 cancel is called G66 will stay active until G67 is called Cancel Modal Macro Call G66 The following topics a
80. s Manual P N 627785 21 Index screen illustration 10 1 soft keys listed 10 3 soft keys secondary listed 10 3 10 4 to activate 10 4 SHIFT keys to activate 10 4 Utils F9 pop up menu description 10 9 illustration 10 8 program block cancel edits 6 9 copying 6 15 deleting 6 8 mark and copy 6 15 mark and cut 6 15 marking 6 7 paste within program 6 15 restore cancel edits 6 9 unmarking 6 7 use to enter 7 3 program directory description 10 1 display changing 10 5 programmable logic controller See PLC programmable temporary path tolerance G1000 description 4 36 programming angular motion example 4 6 arcs description 7 6 axis rotation examples 4 29 background soft key description 11 3 block separators description 17 2 block skip description 17 10 circular profile cycle 5 34 concepts 1 3 conventions rotary U axis 15 2 corner rounding chamfering example 4 22 exact stop non modal G9 4 12 examples 4 axis description 15 2 4 axis drill 15 3 4 axis mill 15 4 15 5 expressions description 17 5 examples 17 6 listed 17 5 face mill cycle 5 32 functions description 17 5 functions listed 17 5 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM G41 example 9 29 G42 example 9 30 loop illustration 5 54 modifiers listed 17 1 parametric description 17 10 parts edge 9 16 rectangular profile cycle 5 36 selective block skip d
81. search number or text Or press Goto F4 to search for a line in the program 4 Type the required number or text and press ENTER The CNC runs the search and highlights the first block it finds that contains the number or text 5 Press START to run the program from the highlighted block NOTE After you start the program it will execute normally Table 11 3 describes the active soft keys on the Block Search screen Table 11 3 Block Search Screen Soft Keys Soft Key Function Find Moves the program display one page backward previous Find next F2 Moves the program display one page forward Displays the Find pop up with the message Find what and an entry field for you to type the case sensitive string that you want A en line and an entry field Start of The cursor returns to the first block of the program See Poo Po Section O Advancing to the First or Last Block of a Program End Poe O jg cursor advances to the last block of the program See Poe Section 6 Advancing to the First or Last Block of a Beene Displays the Find screen The Find pop up screen displays with the message Find what and an entry field For the Find screen soft keys refer to able 11 4 Block Search gt Find F8 Screen Soft Keys Return mo Return to the Single Step Screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 11 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Running P
82. should be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part otherwise the Z axis should be at the side picking depth 3 Type G145 Qn Xn Wn If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated for every web you wish to find or whose position you want to reestablish CAUTION When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions later in this document or use the I J or K cycle parameters for the same purpose 4 Execute that line in Manual by pressing START All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 89 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual 5 90 P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Protected Probe Positioning G146 Format G146 Xn Yn Zn Fn e When an X Y and or Z move is programmed using the G146 Protected Positioning Cycle the control will stop the axis travel and program and alarm if the probe stylus is triggered before reaching the target set in the X Y and or Z parameters e This cycle is intended to offer some degree of safety when moving the probe around the part however it is not fool proof and will not protect against gross bad programming where the probe body would encounter an obstruction before the probe stylus is triggered Extreme care should be taken to avoid this condition as probe damage may result e Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle e
83. single value 1 Inthe Tool Page highlight the desired row Position the cursor on the desired column Press the letter A key to display the message Add value Type the amount of the adjustment The adjustment value may be positive or negative 4 Press ENTER to adjust the value and display the adjusted value on the table All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Tool Page Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys Refer to Table 9 1 Table 9 1 Tool Page Soft Keys Soft Key Function Tools The Tools soft key label is highlighted for standard tool Provides access to additional tool attributes Refer to Extra Tool Information Enables entry to the G53 Offset pop up menu Refer to Section 4 Fixture Offsets Work Coordinate System Select G53 and Offset Tool Information Soft key displays only when machine is equipped with a random tool changer Provides access to the pocket table Refer to Bin Tool Information Page Up FB Moves the cursor one page backward Page Down F6 Moves the cursor one page forward Clear Line Clears the entire single line Refer to Clearing a Tool Whole Row Enables search of a tool number Refer to Finding Tools by Number and Find Tool Number Teach Sets the current machine Z axis value into the tool length column of the highlig
84. size To reduce the display size by half 1 In DXF press Display F5 A pop up menu displays 2 Highlight Half and press ENTER The display will be half its present size Doubling Display Size The DXF Converter can double the size of the display To double the size of the display 1 In DXF press Display F5 A pop up menu displays 2 Highlight Double and press ENTER The display will be twice its present size 16 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature DXF Entities Supported See Table 16 3 for the DXF entities supported Table 16 3 DXF Entities Supported x lt ae a Attribute Xx x vertex xX xX eee eee X X lt xX gt lt ui pao D Q a Aa de aa The following topics are described a Drawing Entities Not Supported Drawing Entities Not Supported See Table 16 3 Note that the Extrusion Dimension and Viewpoint entities are not supported Dimensions may be seen on the displayed DXF file Some DWG an AutoCad drawing file to DXF converters convert the dimension entities into lines and arcs which are supported entities All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 16 7 25 January 08 ANILAM Files Created DXF Examples CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature The DXF Converter creates the CNC file G for G Code and M for conversational
85. the edit it first The unedited conversational program can be edited to fix and or add tool numbers feed rates cutter comp on or off and so forth When the edits are complete use Draw to check the tool path See Figure 16 4 Unedited Program Run in Draw Unedited G Code Program Listing The CNC G Code program is created that must be edited to be usable An unedited G Code program created from Figure 16 3 Zoomed Part follows See Table 16 5 Table 16 5 Unedited G Code Program Listing Simple setup for easy testing G90G70F80 T1 D 01 L 01 G1 Z 1 0 Call sub program s M98 P1 M98 P2 M2 Sub program definition s 01 GO X2 51037 Y0 97667 G2 X2 44669 Y0 91299 l 0 10905 J0 04536 G2 X1 58477 Y0 91299 l 0 43096 J1 03598 G2 X1 52108 Y0 97667 10 04536 JO 10905 G2 X1 52108 Y1 83859 11 03598 J0 43096 G2 X1 58477 Y1 90228 10 10905 J 0 04536 G2 X2 44669 Y1 90228 10 43096 J 1 03598 G2 X2 51037 Y1 83859 l 0 04536 J 0 10905 G2 X2 51037 Y0 97667 l 1 03598 J 0 43096 M99 02 GO X2 01573 Y1 86039 GO X2 46848 Y1 40763 GO X2 01573 Y0 95488 GO X1 56297 Y1 40763 M99 Approximated stock for easy 3D simulated draw G120 X2 71258 Y2 10448 Z0 00000 11 31888 J0 71078 K 2 00000 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 16 1 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature The unedited G Code program generated will automatically have sample tool mode and stock information tha
86. the program or mark all programs to be copied 2 Press Utils F9 to display the Utils pop up menu refer to Figure 10 6 Utils Pop up Menu and Table 10 3 Utils Soft Keys from Program Screen Select Copy to display the Select Copy to destination pull up menu 3 Highlight the target drive and press ENTER The CNC copies marked programs to the target drive Type the new location complete path and press ENTER The program is copied into the new location Moving Programs from to Other Directories To move a program copies the currently highlighted file or files that were previously marked to or from another directory such as a subdirectory or a Universal Serial Bus USB Refer to Figure 10 6 Utils Pop up Menu To move programs to or from another directory 1 In the Program Manager highlight the file or mark all files to be moved 4 Press Utils F9 to display the Utils pop up menu refer to Figure 10 6 Utils Pop up Menu and Table 10 3 Utils Soft Keys from Program Screen Select Move to display the Select Move to destination pull up menu 5 Highlight the target drive and press ENTER The CNC moves marked programs to the target drive Type the new location complete path and press ENTER The program is moved into the new location 10 10 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Management Renaming Programs To rename a p
87. time in parentheses for all parts Resets to zero when you enter Auto or Single Step mode Seconds remaining in a dwell Name of loaded program Block number displays in S Step or Auto Mode only All axis at target position Program is running Machine is in a programmed hold has completed its program external hold has been activated by an event or HOLD was pressed All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 3 11 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Manual Mode Settings Features or settings that remain active for more than one operation are said to be modal Modal features remain active until you change or cancel them Most CNC functions are modal For example if the CNC is in Rapid Mode it executes all moves at the rapid rate until you initiate Feed Mode The CNC can be in several modes as long as the modes do not conflict Before making a manual move make any necessary mode settings Modes set from the Manual screen remain active if the CNC is put in a program mode Auto S Step until the program or operator changes the mode Set the following modes from the Manual screen Position Mode Absolute or Incremental Mode Move Mode Rapid or Feed Mode Active tool Active tool tool length offsets and tool radius compensation Measurement Mode Inch or MM Mode The Manual screen determines the following e The location of Part Zero Manual Mode provides the foll
88. times C will increment and subprogram P will be called of Times SubProgram O PS O Subprogram number to call Patterns commanded by the program can be rotated using polar coordinates Any angle can be described as positive or negative depending on how it is referenced CCW from 0 degrees is positive CW from O degrees is negative Refer to Figure 4 12 CCW positive angle negative angle 270 deg 90 Figure 4 12 G68 Angle Rotation Guide POLARG68 4 28 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Minimum data entry for G68 rotation is G68 Cn If land J are not given the current position is used S angle is referenced to the original programmed position For example If a slot is programmed at the 90 degree position S is referenced from 90 degrees S should be used only if L and P are programmed C must be programmed P and L are optional They enable a loop to be executed so the subprogram will be called at each angle increment G17 G18 or G19 must be commanded prior to programming G68 The following topics are described a G68 Programming Examples G68 Programming Examples Example 1 Refer to Figure 4 13 and Table 4 25 X38 1 Y 5 X1 5 Y12 7mm XOYO Polar Origin Figure 4 13 G68 Programming Example 1 Table 4 25 G68 Programming Example 1 _Bik Block Description Require
89. to rapid to this position in the Z axis before starting the initial probe touch in the Z axis This will save time especially if the Z feed must be set relatively slow to prevent probe over travel after the probe has been tripped e Set diameterOfToolProbeGauge The default gauge diameter of the tool calibration standard diameterOfToolProbeGauge can be overwritten by the D word in the G150 cycle diameterOfToolProbeGauge is used in the G150 calibration only For example set to 12 mm The tool probe will update the tool registers only If you are going to use the tool being measured after the probing cycle you must recall that tool for the new offsets to be active For tool probing or tool length presetting Tool Length Offset TLO is the distance from machine home to top of work piece or wherever you wish to set your part Z zero Before starting to set your tools you must calibrate the probe Once the probe has been calibrated calibration does not have to be done again unless you remove the probe or replace the stylus Recalibration may also be required if the Z location of the top of the part changes and is not compensated by a Z work offset shift All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Tool Probe G Code Cycle Designations The following summarizes the cycles available G150 Tool Probe Calibration Cycle This is used
90. to set the Z datum for length preset the effective probe stylus diameter for setting tool diameter registers and establishes the center of the probe stylus NOTE Calibration must be done at least once before using the tool probe Once the probe has been calibrated calibration does not need to be done again unless the probe is moved or a new part is being setup The cycle must always know the relationship between the top of the part and the top of the probe to set the TLO G151 Tool Length and Diameter Offset Preset Updates length and diameter tool registers If the tool has a hole on the bottom so that the probe would fall between the tool teeth do not use this cycle Damage to the probe could result In this case use G152 for manual length preset or G153 for manual diameter preset G152 Manual Tool Length Offset Preset Updates tool length register To be used for large face mill style tools or shell mill tools that have a hole in the center of the bottom of the tool G153 Manual Tool Diameter Preset Updates tool diameter register for irregular shaped tools or tools with a hole in the center of the bottom G154 Tool Breakage Length and Diameter Wear Detection Checks the tool and gives an alarm if not within tolerance Length and Diameter Wear Check the Length and or Diameter and updates the Length and or Diameter wear registers up to a user defined limit Once the user defined limit has been reached the cycle will
91. used for feed moves With the Contouring Mode activated the CNC approaches target and comes within the Continuous Path Tolerance of the target position No in position check is made before the next move is executed This enables the smooth contouring of a profile or surface Format G64 Table 4 19 G64 and Associated G Code Formats Code Format Action G9 Xx x YX x Activates Non modal In Position Mode Complete stop only in this block G61 Xx x Yx x Activates Modal In Position Mode CNC stops to verify location of each endpoint Cancels G61 and activates the Contouring Mode Continuous Path Mode NOTE Rapid moves are always performed in In Position Mode NOTE the machine builder defines the In Position and Continuous Path Tolerances in the Setup Utility G64 is modal and remains in effect until canceled Use Exact Stop Check G61 to cancel the Contouring Mode G64 initiates linear interpolation G1 4 24 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes User Macros G65 G66 G67 NOTE Before using macros you must understand how variables and parameters are used in a program or subprogram Refer to tc Section 17 Advanced Programming Features for an explanation of these features NOTE G65 or G66 codes always contain some letter variable s Pn An Bn etc to be passed to the macro subpro
92. without notice 17 27 25 January 08 ANILAM 17 28 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features WHILE DO END N550 WHILE expression DO nnnn If the expression is true the program repeats between N550 and N590 until the expression becomes false Similarly if the expression is false when Block N550 is executed the CNC jumps to Block N600 The number after DO is a label identifier only and the same number must be used to identify the END of the loop In place of an expression you can use a variable that while not zero will be treated as a true expression Zero equals false Any other value equals true DO END N620 DO nnnn N670 END nnnn DO END sets the program into an infinite loop that can only be ended by programming a GOTO 1111 command to another block DO and END must be paired with labels nnnn When executed the program will repeat Blocks N630 to N660 until the expression at N650 becomes true and program execution continues at block 1111 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Unconditional LOOP Repeat Conditional statements require that a test be strictly true or false in order for a particular course of action to be taken Unconditional statements are acted on without a logical precondition LOOP END N680 LOOP nnnn N695 END LOOP instructs the control to execute t
93. you want to locate Press ENTER on the right of the Find Tool line to start your search Refer to Figure 9 3 Tool Number Length Wear o 1 A a Mel ea te e le le e e a e e e pe oe fo ej e Enter 08 94 Page Page Clear o AAA ETE TOOLFIND Figure 9 3 Find F8 from Tool Page All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 9 25 January 08 ANILAM Find in Table CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management On the SHIFT Tool Screen refer to Figure 9 2 Shift Screen from Tool Page press Find in Table SHIFT F8 to display the Find in Table line below the Column Description Type in the Find in Table line the table content that you want to locate Press ENTER on the right of the Find in Table line to start your search Refer to Figure 9 4 Tool Number Length Wear o ET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a SE cede Sn Program FIND IN TABLE Figure 9 4 Find in Table F8 from Shift Tool Page PLC and OLM Descriptions Refer to 60001 CNC Technical Manual P N 627787 21 for PLC and OLM descriptions PLC SHIFT F5 Refer to Section 7 PLC Functions Selecting the PLC Mode in P N 627787 21 OLM SHIFT F7 Refer to Section 6 Diagnosis with the Online Monitor OLM in P N 627787 21 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 62
94. 0 end of subprogram M99 basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 Index 6 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index macro terminated 4 26 end user common global variables macro numbers 17 9 ENDIF conditional statement 17 27 EndMill cycle G176 description 5 39 edit help 7 9 screen illustration 7 23 engrave cycle G190 description 5 46 listed 7 9 sample program 5 47 screen illustration 7 24 ENTER key illustration 2 6 entries clearing 2 8 entry field types listed 7 3 equality operators description 17 30 E STOP emergency stop 3 6 key illustration 3 9 no keyboard equivalent 13 1 to reset 3 6 exact stop G09 See G9 7 11 G9 edit help 7 11 check G61 In Position Mode modal 4 23 G64 cancel G61 4 23 G9 In Position Mode non modal 4 23 G Code formats 4 12 mode G61 edit help 7 11 non modal G9 4 12 examples jog return 11 13 exit Draw program 8 7 shut down 3 6 Exit F10 Draw to exit 8 7 edits saving 6 7 expressions description 17 5 examples 17 6 listed operators 17 5 unary minus example 17 13 Extra F2 tool information 9 8 F F1 Find previous Replace with feature 6 13 F1 Find previous search specific text 6 11 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index F1 Restart Pos jog return screen description 11 12 F1 Run run Draw program 8 2 r
95. 0 023 N52 TOOLCHNG G In Example 2 a program named TOOLCHNG G can be called from the main program or from an existing subprogram It is made possible by line N52 The file inclusion function is programmed on N52 In this way the same subprogram can be used in many programs but you do not need to type it into each program Each program must contain the proper file inclusion block The program to be included must be in the form of a subprogram beginning with Onnn and ending with the M99 code The format for file inclusion is FILENAME G It is especially useful for including tool change subprograms zero setting subprograms and macros All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index 1000 block skip description 17 10 1001 1009 selective block skip description 17 11 1030 stock variable 9 23 Feed machine status display 3 11 RPM machine status display 3 11 ALT H Hold hold the program 14 1 ALT S Start start up screen 14 1 SHIFT F1 Msgs auto mode screen 11 3 description 3 15 single step screen 11 3 SHIFT F10 Quit cancel unsaved edits 6 7 SHIFT F10 Shut Down description 3 14 manual mode 3 6 shut down screen 14 1 SHIFT F10 Up Dir screen illustration 10 6 SHIFT F2 Clear MDI clear MDI history page 3 20 SHIFT F2 Create Dir description 10 12 SHIFT F3 BG Prog auto mode screen 11 3 sing
96. 0 RoughFeed 30 0 FinFeed 20 0 TURN OFF SPINDLE MCode 5 TURN OFF COOLANT MCode 9 CALL CENTER DRILL FOR HOLES Tool 2 MCode 6 RPM 3500 MCode 3 MCode 8 SETUP CENTER DILLING CYCLE BasicDrill ZDepth 0 5 StartHgt 0 275 ReturnHgt 1 0 Feed 15 0 CALL SUBR FOR HOLES Call 2 DrillOff MCode 5 MCode 9 CALL 125 DRILL FOR HOLES Tool 3 MCode 6 RPM 2500 MCode 3 MCode 8 SETUP PECK DILLING CYCLE PeckDrill ZDepth 1 25 StartHgt 0 275 ReturnHgt 1 0 Peck 0 50 Feed 20 0 Call 2 DrillOff MCode 5 MCode 9 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 16 13 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature CALL 25 COUNTER BORE FOR HOLES Tool 4 MCode 6 RPM 2000 MCode 3 MCode 8 SETUP COUNTERBORE CYCLE Boring ZDepth 0 625 StartHgt 0 275 ReturnHgt 1 0 Dwell 0 1 Feed 20 0 Call 2 DrillOff MCode 5 MCode 9 Dim Abs Rapid Z5 0 Rapid X 10 0 Y 5 0 EndMain Sub program definition s Sub 1 Line X 2 51037 Y 0 97667 ToolComp Right Arc Cw X 2 44669 Y 0 91299 XCenter 0 10905 YCenter 0 04536 Arc Cw X 1 58477 Y 0 91299 XCenter 0 43096 YCenter 1 03598 Arc Cw X 1 52108 Y 0 97667 XCenter 0 04536 YCenter 0 10905 Arc Cw X 1 52108 Y 1 83859 XCenter 1 03598 YCenter 0 43096 Arc Cw X 1 58477 Y 1 90228 XCenter 0 10905 YCenter 0 04536 Arc Cw X 2 44669 Y 1 90228 XCenter 0 43096 YCenter 1 03598 Arc Cw X 2 51037 Y 1 83859 XCenter 0 04536 YCenter 0 10905 Arc
97. 1 tool length and diameter offset preset defined 4 1 5 61 description 5 64 G152 manual tool length offset preset defined 4 1 5 61 for special tools description 5 69 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM G153 manual tool diameter preset defined 4 2 5 61 description 5 71 tool breakage length and diameter wear protection defined 4 2 G154 tool breakage length and diameter wear detection defined 5 61 description 5 73 G162 islands defined 4 2 description 5 26 edit help 7 10 listing table 7 17 G169 irregular pocket cycle defined 4 2 description 5 24 edit help 7 10 listing table 7 17 programming example illustration 5 30 5 31 G17 XY plane default plane 4 31 defined 4 1 edit help 7 5 helical interpolation example 4 10 illustration 4 12 listing table 7 14 modal listing table 7 14 spindle probe cycle 5 75 G17 G18 G19 plane selection 4 12 G170 face mill cycle defined 4 2 description 5 32 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 17 screen illustration 7 21 G171 circular profile cycle defined 4 2 description 5 34 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 17 screen illustration 7 21 Index 9 ANILAM G172 rectangular profile cycle defined 4 2 description 5 36 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 17 screen illustration 7 22 G175 mill cycle defined 4 2 description 5 38 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 17 screen illustration 7 22 G176
98. 11 6 soft keys listed 11 5 using to select starting block 11 5 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index Block search F3 use to select a starting block 11 5 BlockForm G120 description 4 35 edit help 7 11 program requirement for Draw 8 2 boring See also drilling bidirectional cycle G85 5 6 bidirectional cycle G85 edit help 7 9 canned cycles G81 G89 5 2 counter drill cycle G82 5 3 example 5 8 flat bottom cycle G89 5 8 unidirectional cycle G86 5 6 unidirectional cycle G86 edit help 7 9 C calibAndToolMeasurementRPM description 5 59 5 65 call subprogram M98 basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 cancel a single step run 11 4 auto mode program 11 7 drill tap bore cycle G80 5 3 G81 G839 drilling off G80 listing table 7 16 In Position Mode modal exact stop G64 4 12 macro modal macro G66 edit help 7 11 modal macro G67 listing table 7 15 modal radius or chamfer G60 defined 4 1 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 15 unsaved edits 6 7 Cancel F2 shut down screen 3 6 14 1 canned cycles defined 5 1 drilling tapping boring G81 G89 5 2 probe cycles description 5 57 spindle probe description 5 76 tapping G84 5 5 CD ROM drive USB 13 2 chamfering G59 G60 4 21 Change Layout SHIFT F9 screen illustration 10 5 All rights re
99. 16 1 files created 16 8 mouse operations table 16 4 requirements machine software 16 1 off line software 16 1 shapes creating 16 3 types listed 16 3 soft keys descriptions 16 5 to open 16 2 unedited conversational program listing 16 10 G Code program listing 16 11 Index 5 ANILAM program run in Draw illustration 16 12 E edge finding G141 5 81 edit canceling unsaved 6 7 help description 7 1 M Code listing 7 19 screens examples illustrations 7 21 soft keys listed 7 2 keys illustration 2 2 keys table 2 6 saving 6 7 screen description 6 2 soft keys description 6 3 Edit F2 Draw screen 6 2 Edit F3 manual screen 6 2 Edit F8 program editor 1 2 program screen 6 2 program screen access DXF converter 16 2 Edit Funct F8 copy blocks description 6 15 cut blocks description 6 15 deleting a program block 6 8 edit screen description 6 6 find replace screen description 6 12 6 13 find replace description 6 11 marking blocks 6 7 paste blocks 6 15 pop up menu description 6 6 pop up menu illustration 6 6 Replace with feature 6 13 unmark program blocks 6 7 Edit Help G Code Menu table 7 14 effectivity notation 1 1 ELSE conditional statement 17 27 emergency stop reset 3 6 end of program M2 basic M functions 7 12 program feature 6 10 subprogram M99 description 5 53 End of Block Move F7 feature 6 10 End of Prog Move F7 feature 6 1
100. 2 activating from Manual screen 6 2 activating from Program Manager 6 2 end of MO2 See M2 7 19 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 exit Draw 8 7 getting started 1 2 group illustration 14 1 14 2 halted clearing 11 8 listing description 6 2 include comments 6 16 management description 10 1 mark 10 11 mark all 10 12 move other directories 10 10 name 3 11 name description 6 2 names choosing 10 7 offsets activate 9 32 optional stop M01 See M1 7 19 optional stop M1 basic M functions 7 12 edit help 7 19 parts counter description 11 10 parts counter illustration 11 10 position display manual screen area 3 10 program area label 3 11 rename 10 11 requirements for Draw 8 2 running 11 1 running one step at a time 11 2 run time timer description 11 10 scroll feature 6 14 select for editing 10 7 selecting for running 10 7 stop mode M00 See MO 7 19 stop mode MO basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 T Code tool page offset 9 15 timer description 11 10 timer illustration 11 10 to delete 10 8 tool path general precautions 9 28 unmark 10 11 unmark all 10 12 using real time Draw while running programs 11 8 viewing with Draw 8 1 M2 Program basic M functions 7 12 F2 from Manual screen 1 2 Index 20 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User
101. 25 B 36 I5 J18 U 25 V 5 C1 S 015 K30 P 1 Figure 5 6 illustrates the moves output by the CNC to mill the frame cycle 1 3 x 1 125 o all Figure 5 6 G75 Programming Example The tool will perform the following operations NOTE If X and Y are not provided position the tool at the center of the island prior to G75 1 Tool will rapid from position 1 to position 2 X is the center of the inside corner radius U and Y is the corner radius plus tool radius plus finish stock N Tool will feed 1 or 2 mm in Z to the part surface 3 Tool performs a ramp in move to O D of frame minus tool radius minus finish stock position 3 Tool then moves 360 degrees CCW around frame back to position 3 5 Tool then steps over calculated amount and mills CW until position 2 is reached again at depth 6 Tool then mills 360 degrees CW climb milling around the island NOTE The number of times the tool repeats Steps 3 through 6 depends on the Z and B dimensions 7 When the frame is completed the tool rapids first to the P dimension then to the center of the island All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 17 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Hole Mill Cycle G76 5 18 Format G76 Dn Xn Yn Bn Zn Hn Jn Kn Sn Use the hole milling cycle G76 to machine through holes or counter bores You can position the tool at the hole center prior to the
102. 3 15 Program screen listed 10 3 secondary auto mode screen listed 11 3 Manual screen listed 3 13 Program screen listed 10 3 10 4 single step screen listed 11 3 Tool page listed 9 7 SHIFT auto mode listed 11 3 SHIFT single step listed 11 3 Shut Down SHIFT F10 description 3 14 single step listed 11 3 Tool page listed 9 6 View Type screen listed 8 4 software identification key See SIK software basics 2 7 SPEED S defined 12 1 SPEED spindle speed control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 spindle functions 7 12 spindle current status listed 3 11 forward MO3 See M3 7 19 12 2 M3 control M Codes 12 2 Index 24 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index edit help 7 19 to use G86 boring unidirectional cycle 5 6 functions M functions description 7 12 machine status display 3 11 Off MO5 See M5 7 19 M5 control M Codes 12 2 edit help 7 19 spindle functions 7 12 to use G86 boring unidirectional cycle 5 6 on FWD M3 spindle functions 7 12 on REV M4 spindle functions 7 12 orientation M19 control M Codes 12 3 M19 edit help 7 19 M19 spindle functions 7 12 M19 to use G86 boring unidirectional cycle 5 6 override 3 11 probe calibration wired probe description 5 80 wireless probe description 5 80 probe calibration cycle G140 defined 5 75 description 5 79 probe cycles description 5 57 5 75 G code description 5 75 listed 5 78 probe can
103. 3 4 Display Gauge from SHIFT Manual Screen 8 Press the Display Gauge F1 soft key to display the Gauge information on the Manual screen refer to Figure 3 5 Manual Screen with Gauge Display Refer to Table 3 1 Table 3 1 describes the Display Gauge soft keys Table 3 1 Display Gauge Screen Soft Keys Soft Key Function Display Displays the gauge information selected Gauge on the Manual screen Remove Removes the gauge information field Gauge and label from the Manual screen Cancel Exits the Display Gauges screen and does not save changes 3 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup qq Display Gauge field Single Hand MESES Paes ES MANUALwithGAUGE Info Figure 3 5 Manual Screen with Gauge Display The Display Gauge field is dynamic When the spindle motor load increases the field in the Display Gauge increases All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 3 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Shutting Down the CNC 1 Press E STOP to disengage the servos and then revert to Manual Mode 2 Press Shut Down SHIFT F10 to display the Shut Down soft keys Press Shut Down F1 to display the power down the CNC Press Cancel F2 to cancel the shut down 3 Follow the builder s instructions for turning off t
104. 5 G28 Z0 G120 X 1 Y1 1 Z 0 I 1 1 J 1 K 25 T1 M6 G90 GO X 5 Y 5 G175 X 5 Y 5 H 1 Z 25 B 125 D41 125 J35 K45 S 01 G91 G1 X 5 Y 5 X1 Y1 X 1 Y 5 G176 X 5 Y 5 G90 GO 21 XO YO M2 EndMill Cycle G176 Format G176 Xn Yn The mill cycle is terminated with the EndMill G176 block at which point it rapids up to the StartHgt and returns to the uncompensated X and Yours truly location Refer to Figure 7 9 EndMill Cycle Screen Refer to Table 5 27 Table 5 27 G176 Address Words Address Label Word Description X ending point Default Path ends at the starting point Uncompensated Y Y Y ending point Default Path ends at the starting point Uncompensated All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 39 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Thread Mill Cycle G181 Format G181 Zn Hn Pn Dn Cn Bn Xn Yn Rn Sn Jn Kn En WARNING The first move in this cycle is a rapid move to the center of the thread before moving the Z axis Make sure the tool is properly located before calling up this cycle Use the thread milling for cutting inside or outside threads It will cut either Inch or MM left or right hand and Z movement up or down A single tooth or multi toothed tool may be used Start can be at the top or bottom of the hole or boss The tools are set as you would normally set TLO Programming the Thread Mill Cycle To program th
105. 58 5 62 G code cycle designations 5 61 TOOL tool mount tools 7 13 tool length offset description 9 12 illustration 9 12 probe description 5 60 Index 26 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index setting 9 14 toolProbeType description 5 58 Tools description 7 13 TPl Lead tapping canned cycle 5 5 transferring variables 17 13 truth table logical symbols listed 17 30 typing in address words 7 20 U U axis programming in absolute 15 2 programming in incremental 15 2 unary logical not 17 7 unary minus example 17 13 unconditional LOOP repeat description 17 29 Undo SHIFT F3 cancel edits 6 9 restore deleted blocks 6 9 universal serial bus See USB unmark a program 10 11 all programs 10 12 UnMark program to unmark 10 11 unsaved edits canceling 6 7 Up Dir SHIFT F10 screen illustration 10 6 USB CD ROM drive 13 2 defined 10 10 floppy disk 13 2 memory stick back up on 1 2 memory sticks USB 13 2 mouse 13 2 peripherals supported 13 2 USER listing 10 1 user macro G Codes listed 17 17 user macros G65 G66 G67 description 17 17 referenced 4 25 user variables block skip description 17 9 common global description 17 9 description 17 9 local description 17 9 read only description 17 9 static global description 17 9 USER user program storage description 10 1 using single step mode 11 4 Utils F9 pop up menu illustration 10 8 All rights re
106. 6 Utils Pop up Menu and Table 10 3 Utils Soft Keys from Program Screen Select Mark All 2 The CNC displays a Select a Filter for Marking Files pull up menu and another pull up menu with the file extensions Highlight the file extension that you want to mark all 3 Press ENTER to mark all of the files in the file extension you have highlighted Unmarking All Marked Programs To unmark all programs in the Program Manager 1 In the Program Manager select Utils F9 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 10 6 Utils Pop up Menu and Table 10 3 Utils Soft Keys from Program Screen Select UnMark All Press ENTER to unmark all of the marked files The CNC unmarks all programs in the Program Manager Programs are no longer highlighted Deleting Groups of Programs From the Program Manager mark all of the programs to be deleted 2 Select Delete The CNC prompts to confirm the deletion and the soft keys change for your response 3 Press Yes F1 to delete the selected programs Press No F2 to cancel Creating Subdirectories Press Create Dir SHIFT F2 to create subdirectories Ensure that the CNC is in the desired drive before you create a subdirectory Default V USER To create a subdirectory 1 Press Create Dir SHIFT F2 2 The CNC prompts for the new subdirectory Type the subdirectory name and press ENTER The CNC creates the subdirectory 10 12 All rights reserved Subject to change without
107. 7 point to set G92 4 33 reference point 1 6 3 17 absolute G90 edit help 7 5 accumulated run time timer description 11 10 activate manual mode feed 3 16 manual mode rapid 3 16 servos 3 6 active soft key manual screen area 3 11 address words typing in 7 20 adjusting feedrate 3 16 rapid move speed 3 16 advance block beginning 6 10 end of 6 10 end of program 6 10 first of program 6 10 advanced programming features block separators 17 2 conditional statements 17 27 Index 1 ANILAM expressions functions 17 5 logical and comparative terms 17 30 modifiers description 17 1 modifiers listed 17 1 probe move G31 17 26 system variables 17 8 tool offset modification 17 3 user macros G65 G66 G67 17 17 user variables 17 9 alphanumeric keys description 2 3 Illustration 2 2 listed 2 3 angle measurement 1 7 references 1 8 angular motion programming example 4 6 arc CCW G3 description 7 8 edit help 7 6 CW G2 description 7 8 edit help 7 6 direction illustration 1 9 4 13 partial example 4 8 programming description 7 6 arcs description 7 6 area clearance irregular pocket G169 5 24 ARROW keys illustration 2 6 ATC See automatic tool changer auto mode default operation mode 8 7 program cancel 11 7 hold 11 7 to run 11 6 screen illustration 11 7 screen soft keys secondary listed 11 3 secondary soft keys listed 11 3 soft keys listed 11 3
108. 7785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management T Codes and Tool Activation To activate a tool program a T Code followed by the tool number The tool number corresponds to the row of the Tool Page that contains the Tool Length Offsets TLOs and other required values for the active tool Format Txx Two digit T Codes are used if the machine tool is not equipped with an automatic tool changer ATC If the machine is equipped with an ATC then the four digit T Code system can be used The following topics are described Q Tool Definition Blocks Tool Definition Blocks Example N3 T1 R1 25 L 1 M6 A tool definition block defines the tool radius in the program rather than via the Tool Page The block assigns Tool 1 e Tool radius of 1 25 diameter equals 2 50 e Tool length of 1 e M6 is the tool activation All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 11 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Tool Length Offsets Tool length offset TLO is the distance from Z0 Machine Home to the tip of the tool at the part Z0 usually the surface of the work Refer to Figure 9 5 Tool length offsets allow each tool used in the part program to be referenced to the part surface In an idle state the CNC does not have a tool length offset active Therefore Tool 0 TO is active When TO is active all Z dimensions are in reference to the Z Home position When you program T1 all Z dime
109. 8 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Viewing Programs with Draw Press View Type F4 on the Draw screen to open the View Type screen Refer to Figure 8 3 Refer to Table 8 2 for a description of the View Type screen soft keys 5 _ g 1 G90 G17 G71 G40 2 G120 X32 Y22 Z 6 I 3 G53 00 4 T1 D1 L 25 M6 5 GO X0 YO 6 1000 M3 7 G162 Defines the Is 8 G162 A10 B20 G169 Calls the Irrec ASA A AA A Reset Reset DRAW3 Figure 8 3 View Type Screen Table 8 2 View Type Screen Soft Keys Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function Plain View FI PlainView nofeatures 3 D View 3 D View rotate and adjust view form features 3 View Type 3 View adjust view form and cursor features ResetTimer__ FS Resets the timer Reset graphics FO Resets the graphic Return F10 _ Return to Program screen 8 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Viewing Programs with Draw Press Rotate F5 on the Draw screen to open the Rotate screen Refer to Figure 8 4 Refer to Table 8 3 for a description of the Rotate screen soft keys 5 pams g 1 G90 G17 G71 G40 2 G120 X32 Y22 Z 6 I 3 G53 00 4 T1 D1 L 25 M6 5 GO X0 YO 6 1000 M3 7 G162 Defines the Is 8 G162 A10 B20 3 G169 Calls the Irrec AAA AAA eee 3 A Show Reset a eee ROTATE Figure 8 4 Rotate Screen Table 8 3 Rotate Screen Soft
110. 9 16 paths during tool compensation illustration 9 25 radius compensation description 7 5 Tool F7 jog return screen description 11 12 tool breakage length and diameter wear detection G154 defined 5 61 description 5 73 tool compensation acute angles around 9 27 acute angles around illustration 9 27 cancel mode G40 9 22 Index 25 ANILAM tool motion 9 24 tool diameter compensation ball end mill using 9 21 left hand G41 9 16 plane you select 1 8 right hand G42 9 17 to measure 5 72 tool length and diameter offset preset G151 defined 5 61 description 5 64 tool offset modification permanent description 17 2 permanent format 17 3 programming example 17 4 temporary description 17 2 temporary format 17 3 tool page attributes listed 9 4 Bin F4 optional attributes listed 9 8 cursor description 2 8 definition 9 1 diameter offset 9 15 Extra F2 optional attributes listed 9 8 labels description 9 3 Offset F3 optional attributes listed 9 9 offsets entering 9 13 offsets errors to correct 9 13 row to clear 9 5 Shift keys description 9 2 single value to adjust 9 5 single value to clear 9 5 soft keys listed 9 6 soft keys secondary listed 9 7 specific tool number to find 9 4 to activate 9 2 tool length offset 9 12 using 9 3 values changing 9 5 tool probe calibration cycle G150 defined 5 61 description 5 62 tool probe cycles description 5
111. 90 Degree Extended Spot Dril EngineCase02 dxf 0 125 Extended Dril 8 EngineCase03 dxf 6 32 Extended Roll Tap For_David_Harrel 0 406 End Mil G169 Example 1 g 0 807 Dril 0 250 End Mil AS 0 169 Dril MERC3 G T 10 0 209 Dril T 11 0 500 Drill T 12 0 120 Drill Tools are set on the top of the right hand fixture Left side of fixture xX amp Y zero locations are at the rear left side of the part Z zero location will be at the finished machine F Copy Move X zero is mee on te right side of the part Y zero is located on the rear edge of the part NC and DXF g m c Z zero is located at the top of the fixture insid Mark all part _ UnMark All 09 53 25 om eee dee es Figure 10 6 Utils Pop up Menu 10 8 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Management On the Program screen select Utils F9 to display the Utilities pop up menu Refer to Figure 10 6 Utils Pop up Menus Refer to Table 10 3 Table 10 3 Utils F9 Pop up Menu Description Copy To copy programs to another drive or to floppy disks See Copying Programs from to Other Directories Copies currently highlighted file and files that were previously marked o Expanded by using the right ARROW Compressed by using the left ARROW Traverse the directory using up and down ARROW keys Go to parent directory of current directo
112. 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill T4 0 125 Extended Drill Oe el A be E he ee eS ead Wa eee aL 2 3 4 5 6 7 gt DONN e eee e Figure 7 6 Circular Profile Cycle Screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 1 21 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help From Milling and Profiles select Rectangular Profile Cycle G172 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 7 IA wn 0 be W ONDE This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill T4 0 125 Extended Drill eas e AA P L NA ale RES A pj ss ee Figure 7 7 Rectangular Profile Cycle Screen From Milling and Profiles select Mill Cycle G175 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 8 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill ees e eee Figure 7 8 Mill Cycle Screen 1 22 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Edit Help From Milling and Profiles select EndMill Cycle G176 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 9 1 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES
113. A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe and that tool offset active before using this cycle See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating tool length offsets e A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate active before using this cycle See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating work coordinate offsets e The G146 Protected Probe Positioning Cycle can be run from within a program or from the manual mode Refer to Table 5 50 Table 5 50 G146 Address Words Address Word Description x X X Target position relative to current active work coordinate position relative to current active work coordinate E Y Target position relative to current active work coordinate dial relative to current active work coordinate a combined with the current active tool length offset Feedrate at which to travel to target F is only active for the current move so it must be restated every time or the default will take precedence The default is set in the machine setup parameter positioningFeedrate_Normally Optional To use the Protected Probe Positioning Cycle 1 Place the probe in the spindle and make sure that its tool and work coordinate offsets are active 2 Type G146 Xn Yn Zn Fn If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated for every move you wish to make 3 Execute that line in Manual by pressing START
114. AM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help Typing in Address Words You can manually type in most address words without exiting Edit Help Address words that can be typed into the program via Edit Help include dimension coordinates KYZUW spindle codes S feedrates F tool codes T and preparatory codes G Use the following procedure 1 From the Main Edit Help screen or from a Help Template Menu type the required commands Edit Help displays the typed commands in the center of the screen If the address word requires a parameter the software displays an entry field in which you type the appropriate value or selection 2 Type the value or selection if required You can accept or cancel commands just as you would in the Help Graphic Menus Press Use F10 to enter the block into the program Press Cancel F9 to cancel your entry and clear the screen Accepted commands are inserted in the program Example Entering G Codes From the Main Edit Help screen type G77 and press ENTER The CNC activates the Help Graphic for Circular Pocket Milling G77 Typing in M Codes You can manually type in M Codes listed in the table Refer to Table 7 5 Edit Help M Code Listing Most of these M Codes except M30 and M98 do not require additional parameter settings For M Codes that do require additional parameter settings M30 and M98 Edit Help displays the Help Graphic for the M Code Type the required parameters and press
115. ANILAM 60001 CNC User s Manual January 2008 Ve 02 627785 21 1 2008 VPS Printed in USA Subject to change without notice www anilam com CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Warranty Warranty ANILAM warrants its products to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one 1 year from date of installation At our option we will repair or replace any defective product upon prepaid return to our factory This warranty applies to all products when used in a normal industrial environment Any unauthorized tampering misuse or neglect will make this warranty null and void Under no circumstances will ANILAM any affiliate or related company assume any liability for loss of use or for any direct or consequential damages The foregoing warranties are in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose The information in this manual has been thoroughly reviewed and is believed to be accurate ACU RITE Companies Inc reserves the right to make changes to improve reliability function or design without notice ACU RITE Companies Inc assumes no liability arising out of the application or use of the product described herein All rights reserved Subject to change without notice ANILAM and ACU RITE are registered trademarks of ACU RITE Companies Inc Copyright 2008 ACU RITE Companies Inc Al
116. All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms 4 Tool leaves O D tangentially to a point 135 degrees from the center at half the radius CCW position 5 Tool returns to center position 6 If you have programmed a finish pass the process repeats at the finish dimensions 2 5 Dia G76 Figure 5 7 G76 Programming Example All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 19 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Circular Pocket Cycle G77 5 20 Format G77 Zn Hn Dn Xn Yn Bn In Kn Sn An Pn Use the circular pocket canned cycle G77 to mill round pockets You do not have to place the tool at the center of the pocket since the cycle has variable words for X and Y center If X and Y variable words are not programmed the CNC will use the current position as the pocket center Refer to Table 5 16 Activate a tool prior to programming G77 so that the CNC will know the cutter diameter You can position the tool at the pocket center and omit the XY words By default the CNC will use the current position as the pocket center Table 5 16 G77 Address Words Address Label Word Description Sae Absolute depth of pocket Required CE absolute starting height 0 1 inch or 2 mm above surface MM in rapid Required haai Diameter of pocket The direction CCW
117. C other G functions description 7 11 outside corner finding G142 5 82 outside part corner find G142 defined 5 75 description 5 82 outside profile circular profile cycle G171 5 34 ramp moves illustration 5 36 ramp position illustration 5 34 overwrite text mode 2 8 P P N 627787 21 6000i CNC Technical Manual referenced 3 14 3 15 5 58 5 76 5 77 9 10 11 3 Page Down F6 paging through program 6 14 page down feature 6 14 Page Up F5 paging through program 6 14 page up feature 6 14 parameter register description 17 11 parameters description 17 11 parametric programming description 17 10 parenthesis example 17 13 parenthesis example 17 13 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index part home position display manual screen area 3 10 part zero location 1 2 location of 3 12 setting 1 6 to set G92 4 33 Z axis 9 12 partial arc example 4 8 parts counter CNC description 11 10 F4 pop up window 11 10 illustration 11 10 Parts Counter SHIFT F4 auto mode screen 11 3 Parts Counter SHIFT F4 single step screen 11 3 parts machine status display 3 11 passing macro parameters 17 18 pattern drill cycles description 5 10 P Code M99 end of subprogram 5 53 peck drill cycle G83 description 5 4 edit help 7 9 perimeter pattern illustration 5 11 peripherals supported 13 2 plane se
118. Cw X 2 51037 Y 0 97667 XCenter 1 03598 YCenter 0 43096 EndSub Sub 2 Rapid X 2 01573 Y 1 86039 Rapid X 2 46848 Y 1 40763 Rapid X 2 01573 Y 0 95488 Rapid X 1 56297 Y 1 40763 EndSub Approximated stock for easy 3D simulated draw BlockForm xMax 21L YMax 2 1 Max O XMI Ve3Z YMLO 041 Min All 25 16 14 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature Edited G Code Program Listing Table 16 7 Edited G Code Program Listing G0 G90 G70 G40 G80 G53 O1 FIXTURE OFFSET T1 M6 TOOL CALL SET OFFSET IN TOOL TABLE 375 DIA MILL 1500 M3 TURN ON SPINDLE M8 TURN ON COOLANT POCKET USING SUBR 1 G169 W1 X2 0 Y1 5 H 1 Z 375 M 01 S 005 A 25 B 125 110 0 J30 0 K20 0 P1 0 M5 TURN OFF SPINDLE M9 TURN OFF COOLANT T2 M6 CALL CENTER DRILL FOR HOLES 3500 M3 TURN ON SPINDLE M8 TURN ON COOLANT SETUP CENTER DILLING CYCLE G81 Z 5 R 275 F15 0 P1 0 M98 P2 CALL SUBR FOR HOLES T3 M6 CALL 125 DRILL FOR HOLES 2500 M3 M8 SETUP PECK DILLING CYCLE G83 Z 1 25 R 275 1 5 F20 0 P1 0 M98 P2 CALL SUBR FOR HOLES T4 M6 CALL 25 COUNTER BORE FOR HOLES S2000 M3 M8 SETUP COUNTERBORE CYCLE G82 Z 625 R 275 D 1 F20 0 P1 0 M98 P2 CALL SUBR FOR HOLES G0 G90 Z5 0 X 10 Y5 M2 END PROGRAM Sub program definition s 01 G42 ADDED FOR IRREG POCKET G1 X2 51037 Y0 97667 G2 X2 44669 Y0 91299 l 0 10905 J0 04536
119. DG CVCE ress ch ed dance psa aces shine deere ce de tance anes acemeasaaea coa cc aSiOS 5 58 Spindle Probe Cl6 Seea a a pal dante dase hdsiiienia ented ene dsegheteatione 5 75 Section 6 Program Editor Activating the Program Edit ascuas dc ei aaa 6 1 Activating Edit Mode from the Manual creen cooccccccccccncoccconcncncncnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnonaninnns 6 2 Activating Edit Mode from the Program ManaQ6T oocccccccccncccccoccncncnconnncononncnnnononnnnnnnnnonnnnnncnaninoss 6 2 Activating Edit Mode from Draw Graphics ooccoccccccccccncoccncncnccononononncnnnnnconnnonnnonnnnnanonnnnnncnonaninoss 6 2 EGILING SOM KEYS cc idad ii dicta 6 3 Move F7 Description from Edit Screen occooccccccccccnoconocononocnoconononnnncnonononononannnnanonannnncnenaninoso 6 5 Edit Funct F8 Description from Edit Screen coocccccnccocccccnnccnccocononnononononncncnonanonanonnnnononenaninass 6 6 Marking Programming BIOCKS commission dla 6 7 Unmarking Program BIOCKS canasta ironia 6 7 SAVING GIES doi 6 7 Canceling Unsaved Edits usa dis 6 7 D leting a Characterising oA bonscdanthoaniabaneshunttentsanehatsagaiotetdenherdneuniedareitaebes 6 7 Deleting a Program BIO Rita add 6 8 inserting a POMBO Ki it a ls 6 8 Undeletmg ABI dd 6 9 Canceling Edits toa Program BIOCK vacsiicttssctecsescaindsinatacicccadianldadaedsdatedigacduaradicdaeincsdeabacdedectibale bot n 6 9 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice vil 25 January 08
120. Drill Tools are set on the top of the right hand fixture Left side of fixture d 104530 o A SHIFT EDIT Figure 6 2 Program Editor SHIFT Screen Editing Soft Keys The Edit screen contains 14 soft keys four of which are activated by pressing the SHIFT key See Table 6 1 Edit Soft Keys To activate any SHIFT soft key 1 In Edit Mode press SHIFT and then press the appropriate soft key All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 6 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Editor Table 6 1 Edit Soft Keys Help FA Activates Edit Help screen Delete Deletes a single character located to the right of the cursor Activates Insert Mode Use to insert typed characters at the cursor position without overwriting the existing text Delete Deletes a single block located at the cursor Block Page Up O B5 O O Scrolls the display up one page Page Advances the display to the next page of the Down Program Listing Activates the Move pop up menu Refer to Move F7 Description from Edit Screen Use this pop up menu to return to the beginning or advance to the end of a block or program Activates the Edit Function pop up menu Refer to Edit Funct F8 Description from Edit Screen Use this pop up menu to perform various editing functions within a single program or between two programs This includes inserting blocks It also includes cutting and pasti
121. Drill Cycle Screen Refer to Table 5 2 Table 5 2 G82 Address Words Address Label Word Description Finish Depth Z Absolute hole depth Required Start Height R Initial Z start point in rapid Required Dwell Time Dp Dwell time in seconds Required Feed Rate FeedRate F Feedrate Feedrate ess Return Height Z return point after hole depth in rapid P must be higher than R All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Peck Drill Cycle G83 Format G83 Zn Rn In Fn Pn G83 is the peck drilling cycle generally used for peck drilling relatively shallow holes G83 feeds from the R plane to the first peck depth calculated so that all pecks are equal and do not exceed the maximum peck distance programmed in word Then rapid retracts to R plane to clear chip rapids down to previous depth less 02 and continues this loop until it reaches the final hole depth It then rapid retracts to the P dimension Refer to Table 5 3 Table 5 3 G83 Address Words Address Label Word Description ZDepth Z Absolute whole depth Required StartHgt R Initial Z start point in rapid Required Maximum peck distance positive dimension Required Feed F Feedrte _________ Z return point after hole depth in rapid P must be higher than R 5 4 All rights reserved Subject to change with
122. E APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES 2 GKIFANI G 0 625 End Mil 2 G169_Example 1 g 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet MERC OD G 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Dril 2 MERC3 G 0 125 Extended Dril 2 Sample g 6 32 Extended Roll Tap 0 406 End Mil 0 807 Drill 0 250 End Mill 0 169 Drill T 10 0 209 Drill T 11 0 500 Dril T 12 0 120 Dril Tools are set on the top of the right hand fixture Left side of fixture X amp Y zero locations are at the rear left side of the part Z zero location will be at the finished machine height Right side of fixture A X_ zero is located on the right side of the part Y zero is located on the rear edge of the part NC programs g m v Z zero is located at the top of the fixture inside surface of Ci o DACHA Figure 10 2 Shift Screen from Program Screen The following topics are described in this section Program Screen Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys Activating the Program Screen Changing the Program Manager Displa Creating a New Part Program Choosing Program Names Selecting a Program for Running Selecting a Program for Editing Deleting a Program Utils Function Pop Up Menus Copy Programs from to Other Directories Moving Programs from to Other Directories Renaming Programs Marking and Unmarking Programs Deleting Groups of Programs Creating Subdirectories DvuUuOUOUDOUDUDODODUDOUOUDU DO OU All rights reserved Subj
123. FF Previously marked blocks will no longer be highlighted Saving Edits The Program Listing displays edits as soon as they are made but the edits are not saved until you exit the Program Editor To save edits 1 In Edit Mode press Exit F10 The CNC returns to the Program Manager or Draw Graphics screen and saves all edits Canceling Unsaved Edits If edits have not been saved they can be canceled To cancel unsaved edits 1 In Edit Mode press SHIFT and then press Quit F10 2 The message ProgramFilename has changes Would you like to quit without saving displays on the screen and the soft keys change Press Yes F1 to cancel edits and return to the Program Manager Press No F3 to return to the Edit Mode Deleting a Character To delete a character 1 In Edit Mode use ARROWS to place the cursor to the left of the character you want to delete 2 Press Delete F2 to delete the character All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 6 7 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Editor Deleting a Program Block There are two ways to delete program blocks from a Program Listing e Use the Delete Block F4 soft key to delete blocks one at a time e Use Edit Funct F8 pop up menu Mark Blk ON to mark a block and then press the Delete F2 soft key to delete marked block To delete a program block using the Delete Block F4 soft key 1 In Edit Mode place the cursor on the pr
124. FT PKT G90 G70 GO G17 TO ZO XO YO T1 X 7 7865 Y6 9425 Z 5 G1 Z 1 F10 F40 101 15 5730 102 13 8850 103 0200 104 103 TAN 3 M98 P100 TO G90 GO ZO XO YO M2 0100 LOOP 1 103 1 G91 G1 Y 102 X 101 Y 102 X 101 X 104 Y 104 Z 103 101 101 104 2 102 102 104 2 END M99 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 MOVE TO UP LEFT CORNER FEED TO DEPTH LENGTH X OF POCKET WIDTH OF POCKET DESIRED STEP UP IN Z AXIS CALCULATE STEP OVER IN X Y AXES CALL SUBPROGRAM 100 SET LOOP NUMBER 1 IN DP 02 STEP 1 SET INCREMENTAL MODAL MILL L H SIDE MILL BOTTOM SIDE MILL R H SIDE MILL TOP SIDE BACK TO START POS N STEP UP OVER IN X Y AND Z ADD STEPOVER TIMES 2 TO LONG SIDES ADD STEPOVER TIMES 2 TO SHORT SIDES END LOOP 17 15 ANILAM N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90 N100 N110 N120 N130 N140 N160 N170 N180 N190 N200 N210 N220 N230 N240 N250 N260 N270 N280 N290 N300 N310 N320 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features The pocket will be milled with a side draft angle of three degrees Z is set to a step up increment of 02 in 152 can be set to a desired value perhaps to determine the finish on the sidewalls of the pocket In this example the pocket will always have a depth of 1 in and a draft angle of 3 degrees Th
125. Functions Rapid Move End Point Al Feed Move End Point Y Basic Modal Functions Arc CW Radius and End Point a ee Arc CCW Radius and End Point 24 Driling Cycles Dwn E id id rd Ea XY Plane nal Miling and Profiles XZ Plane 3 Rotation Scaling and Mirroring YZ Plane 2 Spindle Probing Stroke Limit Tool Probing Reference Point Return 2 Tool Radius Compensation Return from Reference Point i Other G Functions Compensation OFF E Camnencaton FEET This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill T4 0 125 Extended Drill senge quo ES ee ae WA O EIA S Ia ow oo fF WO DN Pp Figure 7 1 Edit Help Screen To access the Edit Help Screen 1 In Edit Mode open the appropriate program Press Help F1 The Edit Help screen activates 2 Select the Help group from the top left and the specific helps are displayed on the top right 3 Select the specific code that you want to add to your code and complete the required and optional fields displayed 4 Press Use to add the code to your program All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 7 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help The following topics are described in this section Edit Help Soft Keys Using Help Graphic Screens to Enter Program Blocks G Functions M Functions
126. G142 Qn Wn If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated for every corner you wish to find or whose position you want to reestablish CAUTION When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions later in this document or use the I J or K cycle parameters for the same purpose 4 Execute that line in Manual by pressing START All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 83 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Inside Corner Finding G143 Format G143 Qn Hn En Dn Vn An Bn In Jn Kn Wn e Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle e A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe and that tool offset active before using this cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating tool length offsets e A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate active before using this cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating work coordinate offsets e The G143 Inside Corner Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from the manual mode Refer to Table 5 47 Table 5 47 G143 Address Words Quadrant of corner to find 0 upper right 1 upper left 2 lower left 3 lower right
127. G59 G60 Xn Yn Zn Cancels G59 after move Table 4 16 G59 Address Words Address Word OR Comerradius O Z OZO OOo oO E Chamfer distance G60 cancels G59 immediately G60 Xn Yn Zn cancels G59 at the end of the move it contains as in N13 For example if G60 were programmed on a block prior to the XO move the lower left corner would not be rounded You can change the blend radii or chamfer value between moves To change the radius to 25 for the bottom two corners insert G59 R 25 between Blocks N10 and N11 The new radius would apply on the next move after Block N10 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 21 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes In the example in Figure 4 11 G59 is used to command modal corner rounding Whenever the CNC encounters an intersection between line line arc arc or line arc moves it will round off the intersection to the specified radius X0YO Dimensions 3x2 IN 76 2 X 50 8MM G59PROG Figure 4 11 G59 Programming Example Table 4 17 describes the required program blocks Table 4 17 G59 Programming Example Inch Bik Block Description N11 G60 Y 5 Move to Y 5 then deactivate modal corner oS a aooo O N14 GO Z 1 Raise Z axis Z axis 4 22 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions
128. INT WARNING TOOL DIA 0 MOO DWELL UNTIL START KEY ENDIF 34 33 2 INTERMEDIATE RADIUS 35 ABS 7 2 TDIA 2 FINISH PASS RADIUS 36 35 2 INTERMEDIATE RADIUS G64 CONTOURING MODE IF 7 gt 0 THEN COUNTER CLOCKWISE G91 F 5 G01 X 34 Y 34 G03 X 34 Y 34 I 34 JO G03 X0 YO 10 J 33 G03 X 34 Y 34 10 J 34 G01 X 34 Y 34 IF 19 gt EPSI amp 46 gt EPSI THEN IF FINISH PASS G91 F 6 G01 X 36 Y 36 G03 X 36 Y 36 I 36 JO G03 X0 YO 10 J 35 G03 X 36 Y 36 10 J 36 G01 X 36 Y 36 ENDIF ELSE CLOCKWISE G91 F 5 G01 X 34 Y 34 G02 X 34 Y 34 1 34 JO G02 X0 YO 10 J 33 G02 X 34 Y 34 10 J 34 G01 X 34 Y 34 IF 19 gt EPSI amp 46 gt EPSI THEN IF FINISH PASS G91 F 6 G01 X 36 Y 36 G02 X 36 Y 36 1 36 JO G02 X0 YO 10 J 35 G02 X 36 Y 36 I0 J 36 G01 X 36 Y 36 ENDIF FINISH PASS ENDIF CLOCKWISE IF SAVEFRT gt EPSI THEN F SAVEFRT ENDIF RESTORE FEEDRATE G SAVEG90 RESTORE G90 91 G SAVEGOO RESTORE G00 01 M99 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 25 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Probe Move G31 G31 is to be issued with an associated axis move i e G31 X10 When the G31 is executed it moves at current feedrate selected for G1 until the touch probe selected is deflected At this point t
129. Keys Rotate Right F1 _ Rotate the image right Rotate Left F2 Rotatetheimageleft RotateUp_ F3 Rotatetheimageup ViewDown F4 Rotate the image down Show Bik Form F8 Outline the block forminred Reset graphics F9 Resets the graphic Return F10 Return to View Type screen _ All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 8 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Viewing Programs with Draw Press Adjust BIk Form F6 on the Draw screen to open the Adjust Blk Form screen Refer to Figure 8 5 Refer to Table 8 4 for a description of the View Type screen soft keys 59 Example 1 g 1 G90 G17 G71 G40 2 G120 X32 Y22 Z 6 1 3 G53 00 4 T1 D1 L 25 M6 5 GO X0 YO 6 1000 M3 7 G162 Defines the Is 8 G162 A10 B20 9 G169 Calls the Irrec ADJUST BLK FORM Figure 8 5 Adjust Block Form Screen Table 8 4 Adjust Block Form Screen Soft Keys Adjustin F1 Adjustthe block form in Adjustout F2 Adjustthe block form out gt F3 Adjust the block form leftside Ooo Fa Oooo F5 Oo Fe O F F8 Adjust the block form back DEA Reset graphics Resets the graphic Sets and applies the block form adjustments 8 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Viewing Programs with Draw Use the Draw screen to change the operation mode e Run F1 Auto Mode the def
130. NCY STOP button Out Press Home F4 and then press START to start The CNC displays the Manual screen see Figure 3 2 Single Hand zee Fares Ek MANUAL Figure 3 2 Manual Screen Select Manual F4 to display the Manual screen refer to Figure 3 7 Manual Screen for illustration with callouts Refer to Table 3 3 Manual Screen Soft Keys Press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Manual Shift screen refer to Figure 3 3 Shift Screen from Manual Screen Refer to Table 3 4 Manual Screen Secondary Soft Keys All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Clear Display Shut Meos Sor Corfe Gauge PEE ose oim sk Soun SHIFT MANUAL Figure 3 3 Shift Screen from Manual Screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 3 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup 7 Press the Display Gauge F4 soft key to display the Display Gauge screen refer to Figure 3 4 Select the Gauge information that you want to display on the Manual screen e SpindleMotorLoad Spindle Motor Load e X MotorLoad X Axis Motor Load e Y MotorLoad Y Axis Motor Load e Z MotorLoad Z Axis Motor Load SpindlelMotorLoad Y MotorLoad _ _ _ mm QRqOA oa 7 MotorLoad _ Display Remove Par Cancel Gauge Gauge DISPLAY GAUGE Figure
131. OVE TO HOLE CENTER Z 1 G1 Z 5 MOVE Z TO DEPTH G65 P76 D2 0 S 010 J35 K20 GO Z 1 RAISE Z TO CLEARANCE PLANE TO ZO XO YO M2 O76 HOLE MILLING MACRO D 7 HOLE DIAMETER CCW CW J 5 ROUGH FEEDRATE S 19 FINISH STOCK AMOUNT K 6 FINISH FEEDRATE 1020 TOOL DIAMETER SAVEG90 99 SET STRING SAVEG9O0 TO VAR 99 SAVEGOO 98 SET STRING SAVEGOO TO VAR 98 SAVEFRT 97 SET STRING SAVEFRT TO VAR 97 TDIA 96 SET STRING TDIA TO VAR 96 EPSI 00001 SET STRING EPSI TO 00001 SAVEG90 1090 SAVE CURRENT DIM MODE ABS 90 INCR 91 SAVEGO00 1016 SAVE CURRENT MOVE MODE RAPID 0 FEED 1 SAVEFRT 1022 SAVE CURRENT FEEDRATE TDIA ABS 1020 SAVE CURRENT ABSOLUTE TOOL DIA IF VAR 7 THEN PRINT ERROR HOLE DIA NOT GIVEN M30 ENDIF IF VAR 5 THEN 5 1022 ENDIF DEFAULT ROUGH FEEDRATE IF IVAR 6 THEN 6 5 ENDIF DEFAULT FINISH FEEDRATE IF IVAR 19 THEN 19 0 ENDIF DEFAULT NO FINISH STOCK IF ABS 7 2 lt ABS 19 THEN PRINT ERROR TOOL DIA TOO BIG M30 ENDIF 33 ABS 7 2 ABS 19 TDIA 2 ROUGHING PASS RADIUS IF 33 lt O 33 0 THEN PRINT ERROR ROUGH AMOUNT TOO BIG M30 ENDIF IF 1041 gt 40 EPSI THEN CHECK IF TOOL COMP IS ON PRINT ERROR TOOL COMP NOT ALLOWED M30 ENDIF IF TDIA lt EPSI THEN All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features PR
132. OoOvUOUODO OU 7 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help Basic Modal Functions ANILAM The Basic Modal Functions enables GO G1 G17 G18 G19 G59 G60 G70 G71 G90 G91 Feed Rapid Move End Point Refer to Section 4 Rapid Move GO Feed Move End Point Refer to Section 4 Feed Move G1 XY Plane Refer to Section 4 Plane Selection G17 G18 G19 XZ Plane Refer to Section 4 Plane Selection G17 G18 G19 YZ Plane Refer to Section 4 Plane Selection G17 G18 G19 Modal Radius Chamfer Refer to Section 4 Modal Corner Radius Chamfer G59 G60 Cancel Modal Radius or Chamfer Refer to Section 4 Modal Corner Radius Chamfer G59 G6 y Inch Refer to Section 4 Activating Inch G70 or MM G71 Mode MM Refer to Section 4 Activating Inch G70 or MM G71 Mode Absolute Refer to Section 4 Activating Absolute G90 or Incremental G91 Mode Incremental Refer to Section 4 Activating Absolute G90 or Incremental G91 Mode Feedrate Refer to Section 4 Feedrate FEED Tool Radius Compensation The Tool Radius Compensation enables G40 G41 G42 Compensation OFF Refer to Section 9 Compensation G40 G41 G42 Compensation LEFT Refer to Section 9 Compensation G40 G41 G42 Compensation RIGHT R
133. Page Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to highlight and select tool numbers row numbers You can type tool information only in a highlighted row Highlight the appropriate row and column to enter the selected fields and type the values The cursor marks the location of information to be typed Numbered rows correspond to tool numbers When the CNC executes a program block that activates a tool number the values on that row of the Tool Page are activated Press RIGHT and LEFT ARROWS to move from column to column Tool Page values are automatically converted to their inch or millimeter equivalents when you change the CNC s unit mode All typed values must match the CNC s current unit mode NOTE The Tool Page is the only place where the CNC converts values from Inch Mode to MM Mode and vice versa Programmed positions are not converted when you change the unit mode Press Page Up F5 or Page Down F6 to scroll through the tool table one page at a time When you activate Tool 0 you cancel the active tool diameter and length offset of the CNC The Tool 0 ZO position is usually set as the fully retracted position of the Z axis All of the CNC s Jog features can be run from the Tool Page The handwheels if installed can also be used if activated prior to entering the Tool Page The Figure 9 1 The Tool Page labels Position Display Displays information regarding current machine position and active Units Mode Inch MM Tool N
134. Program Listing DUOUODUDOUHODUODUDOUDUODOUDUDUOUOUUOUU DO Activating the Program Editor Program blocks are written using the Program Editor The Program Editor can be activated from the Manual screen Program Manager or Draw Graphics When you activate the Program Editor the selected program opens for editing The following topics are described a Activating Edit Mode from the Manual Screen a Activating Edit Mode from the Program Manager a Activating Edit Mode from Draw Graphics All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 6 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Editor Activating Edit Mode from the Manual Screen To activate the Edit Mode from the Manual screen 1 With the appropriate program loaded press Edit F3 The Edit Screen activates See Figure 6 1 Activating Edit Mode from the Program Manager To activate the Edit Mode from the Program Manager 1 Highlight a program in the Program Manager 2 Press Edit F8 The Edit screen activates and Insert F3 highlights Activating Edit Mode from Draw Graphics To activate the Edit Mode from Draw Graphics 1 Press Edit F2 The Edit screen activates Refer to Figure 6 1 1 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A rogram 2 APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES Name 3 4 T1 0 625 End Mill 5 T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet Program 6 T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill Listing 7 T4 0 125 Extended Drill
135. RATE OVERRIDE refer to Section 3 Manual Operation and Machine Setup 4 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Feed Move End Point G1 Format G1 Feed move G1 initiates straight line feed motion and is used to cut a part Straight line motion occurs in one or more axes The block may contain any combination of available axes G1 moves can be straight line or angular moves G1 is modal and remains in effect until changed Specify the feedrate on or prior to the G1 block In Figure 4 2 and Table 4 3 MM equivalents are in parentheses following the Inch measurements P1 P2 XOYO P4 P3 LINEEX1 Figure 4 2 Feed Move Table 4 3 Straight Line Programming Example G90 G70 G71 G1 X0 YO ZO G1 F10 254 X3 5 88 9 Y 1 5 38 1 Z 1 5 38 1 XO XO Feed to P4 YO YO Feed to P1 End program return to N1 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Angular Motion Programming Example Angular moves involve motion in two or more axes In Absolute Mode all dimensions are referenced to Part Zero X0 YO In Incremental Mode all dimensions are referenced to the current tool position Refer to Table 4 4 Table 4 4 Angular Programming Example Absolute Inch Mode G70 G90 GO X0
136. RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill T4 0 125 Extended Drill eS E o E IA an ono fF Y N PP PLUNGE CIRC POCKET CYCLE Figure 7 15 Plunge Circ Pocket Cycle Screen From Pocket Cycles select Plunge Rect Pocket G178 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 16 Figure 7 16 Plunge Rect Pocket Screen 7 26 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Viewing Programs with Draw Section 8 Viewing Programs with Draw Draw Graphics part graphics is a method by which to prove a program before you cut any material It allows you to view the part edge and or tool path from different angles inspect the moves the machine is programmed to make without necessarily moving the axes This reduces waste and the chance of damaging a part The CNC has two Draw Modes Draw Simulation Mode and Real Time Draw Mode This section explains how to use Draw Simulation Mode to view programs It also explains how to set the display for a detailed inspection of the programmed moves NOTE Draw lowercase letters with an uppercase D refers to the CNC s Draw Simulation Mode DRAW all uppercase letters refers to the CNC s Real Time Draw Mode e In Draw Simulation Mode the CNC runs programs and simulates machine movements in the viewing area The machine does not
137. Real Time Mode All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 11 9 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Running Programs Parts Counter and Program Timer The CNC keeps track of program run time Timer and the number of completed parts Parts The CNC displays Run time in hours minutes and seconds These two features are available in the Manual Auto and Single Step Modes Refer to Figure 11 4 Number of Completed Parts TIMER Accumulated Program Run Time Program Run Time Figure 11 4 Program Timer and Parts Counter The Timer begins timing the program run when you press START and stops when it encounters an M2 block Therefore ensure that an M2 block has been included at the end of the program The timer pauses if the CNC holds The timer stops if you switch to Manual Mode If you re run the program before going back to Manual the total time for all runs is displayed The Timer values remain the same until you switch to Auto or Single Step Mode again Then the timers reset to zero The Parts counter starts at zero and increments by one every time the CNC runs an M2 block Therefore ensure that an M2 block has been included at the end of the program The CNC continues to count parts when you re run the program in Auto or Single Step The parts counter value is maintained when you switch to Manual Mode but will reset to O when you switch back to Auto or Single Step Mode Refer to Figu
138. Refer to Figure 5 17 and Table 5 37 Loop Programming Example Tooling to be used Tool 1 4 centerdrill Tool 2 1 4 diameter twist drill Tool 3 3 8 diameter end mill e 2 0 50 8mm 75 19 05mm Typ 8 0 __ 203 2mm o 50 12 7mm OOOCO 25 6 35mm oe Dia 7 5 190 5mm 3 0 76 2mm 5 0 127mm SUBPR_EX2 R 5 0 127mm 90 deg Figure 5 17 Loop Programming Example All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 37 Loop Programming Example Bik Block Description 0100 EXAMPLE Program name and number G90 G70 G71 GO TO ZO Set modes Cancel tool Rapid to ZO X 2 X 50 Y2 Y50 Rapid to tool change position N4 T1 44 CTR DRL 6 35 Activate tool 1 centerdrill CTR DRL G81 Z 23 Z 5 84 R 1 R2 Activate spot drill cycle 1 F8 F203 G83 Z 45 Z 11 43 R 1 R2 Activate peck drill cycle F10 F254 1 15 13 81 M98 P1 Call subprogram 1 T3 3 8 MILL 9 525 Activate tool 3 end mill MILL N11 G41 X 3 X 76 2 YO Activate cutter compensation Feed to XY position Z 1 Z2 Retract move in Z G1 Z 38 Z 9 65 F13 F330 Feed to cutting depth X8 X203 2 Cut top of part N15 X7 5 X190 5 Y 2 5 Y 63 5 Cut right side of part vectored path N16 G3 X7 X177 8 Y 3 Y 76 2 Activate circular int
139. Required Initial Z start point 0 1 inch or 2 mm in a Required Dwell Time D_ Dwell time in seconds Required Feed Rate F Feedrate 3 3 3533 Return Height OP Z return point after hole depth in rapid Drilling Example 5 8 The following example assumes that the machine has no automatic tool changer ATC If your machine has an ATC check your machine manual for proper tool changer programming procedures Refer to Figure 5 1 and Table 5 9 Drilling Example Inch Metric 76 2 38 1 29 4 0 L 0 O a ine ato 31 75 at 1 5 2 5 Drilling 38 1 63 5 Figure 5 1 Drilling Example All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 9 Drilling Example Inch Metric O1 DRIL X1 Program number 1 and name DRILL EX1 G90 G70 G71 GO TO ZO Sets absolute dimensions G90 inch input G70 rapid GO cancel any active tool TO and bring Z to zero ZO X 3 0 X 75 Y1 0 Y25 Move to X 3 Y1 T01 1 4 DRILL 6 35 DRILL Activate Tool 1 length offset N5 G83 Z 55 Z 14 R 1 R2 F12 Initiates peck drill cycle G83 Z hole F300 1 08 12 P 1 P2 depth R start height F feedrate maximum peck P return height X1 0 X25 4 Y 1 0 Y 25 4 Hole location 1 Rapid and Absolute X3 0 X76 2 Hole 2 1 0
140. Required If set to 1 the cycle will find the top of the part before finding the X amp Y corner coordinate Default is 0 If H is not set or is set to 0 the Z axis must be at the picking depth If H 1 then the Z axis must be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part The probe stylus must be positioned within 0 1 2 54 mm from the inside of the corner in X Y Optional The distance to go down from the top of part to find X 8 Y coordinate of the corner This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle will bring the probe stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the top 0 1 2 54 mm Optional The distance over from the corner to find X amp Y edge This will allow for a part corner that has a large chamfer or radius where you cannot pick the edge close to the theoretical corner or has an obstruction interfering with the default move Default is 0 4 or 10 16 mm Optional Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1 2 54 mm if not set Optional The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to find the top of the part The default is toward the corner being found 0 4 or 10 16 mm Optional Continued 5 84 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 47 G143
141. SHIFT F9 illustration 10 5 circular profile cycle G171 illustration 7 21 config data parameter illustration 5 58 5 76 CounterBore drill cycle G82 screen illustration 7 25 display gauge from SHIFT Manual illustration 3 4 Display Program illustration 8 3 Draw real time mode 11 8 Draw illustration 8 2 drill pattern cycle G179 screen illustration 7 25 DXF illustration 16 2 edit illustration 6 2 EndMill cycle 6176 screen illustration 7 23 engrave cycle G190 screen illustration 7 24 face mill cycle G170 illustration 7 21 Find F8 tool page illustration 9 9 Find in Table F8 tool page illustration 9 10 Find Replace F8 illustration 6 11 Help screen 7 1 manual mode 3 10 Manual illustration 3 2 MDI illustration 3 20 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index messages Msgs 3 15 mill cycle G175 screen illustration 7 22 plunge circular pocket cycle G177 screen illustration 7 26 plunge rectangular pocket cycle G178 screen illustration 7 26 Program illustration 10 1 rectangular profile G172 illustration 7 22 SHIFT Edit illustration 6 2 SHIFT Manual illustration 3 2 3 5 SHIFT Program illustration 10 3 10 4 SHIFT Tool page illustration 9 2 Show Details SHIFT F7 illustration 10 6 Single Step illustration 11 3 Thread Mill cycle G181 screen illustration 7 23 Tool pa
142. Statements This subsection discusses the conditional statements IF THEN ELSE GOTO and WHILE IF THEN ENDIF N300 IF expression THEN N24 Oeste N360 ENDIF If the expression in N300 is true the program continues at N310 If the expression is false the program continues at N370 In place of an expression you can use a variable that while not zero will be treated as a true expression Zero equals false Any other value equals true IF THEN ELSE ENDIF N400 IF expression THEN N410 N440 ELSE If the expression is true the program continues at N410 then to N440 where a jump is made to N480 If the expression is false the CNC skips Blocks N410 to N440 and executes Blocks N450 to N470 In place of an expression you can use a variable that while not zero will be treated as a true expression Zero equals false Any other value equals true IF GOTO N500 IF expression GOTO nnnn N510 NOTE When you program IF GOTO statements do not precede the block number with the character N For example IF GOTO 487 skips to block number N487 If the expression is true the program jumps to the block number specified nnn If the expression is false the program continues at Block N510 In place of an expression a variable can be used which while not zero will be treated as a true expression Zero equals false Any other value equals true All rights reserved Subject to change
143. Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Example G77 X2 Y2 H 1 Z 25 D3 A 35 B 25 112 S 01 K20 P 1 In Figure 5 8 the tool will perform the following operations NOTE Figure 5 8 shows only the tool path 1 Tool will move to X2 Y2 position 1 in current modes G0 1 G90 91 G70 71 position 1 2 Tool will feed 1 in 2 mm down in Z axis 3 Tool will move to O D less finish stock in a 3 axis spiral motion position 2 4 Tool will make a full circle position 2 5 Tool then spirals inward to complete the roughing cycle at the first level 6 If you have specified a finish pass repeat steps 3 through 5 at the finish feedrate 7 Tool rapids to P dimension then to the original XY location 2 Y2 G77 Figure 5 8 G77 Programming Example All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 21 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Rectangular Pocket Cycle G78 9 22 Format G78 Mn Wn Zn Hn Xn Yn Bn In Jn Kn Sn An Un Pn Use the rectangular pocket cycle G78 to mill square or rectangular pockets You must position the tool directly over the center of the pocket prior to the G78 block or use the X Y words Refer to Table 5 17 Activate a tool prior to programming G78 so cutter diameter is known Table 5 17 G78 Address Words Address Label Word Descriptio
144. System by entered angle Default O degrees 3 o clock CCW positive CW negative YCenter Absolute Y center of the bolt circle Defaults to current position EndAngle Angle of the last hole If there is no B value the CNC will execute a full bolt hole circle Radial Path Move from hole to hole on a radius Set to 1 0 to activate circular path between holes Defaults to straight line path between holes Position a ESE Origin POLAR Figure 5 2 Polar Coordinates 5 10 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Drill Pattern Cycle G179 Format G179 Xn Yn Bn En Un Vn Cn An Dn Wn NOTE Do not program G68 with G179 Use the automatic hole pattern canned cycle G179 to program partial or full pattern hole grids You can use G179 for a corner pattern when holes are required only on four corners It calculates the hole locations from the entered variables You can also rotate the pattern around the starting hole location A drill cycle G81 G89 must be programmed prior to G179 You must cancel the cycle G80 after the pattern is completed Refer to Figure 7 14 Drill Pattern Cycle Screen Refer to Table 5 11 You can use A and D or U and V but not both combinations Positive and negative values are allowed in all variable words except B E and W Table 5 11 G179 Address Words Address Label Wor
145. To set software limits 1 Make sure the tool is within the envelope defined by the software limits XYZIJK 2 In Edit Mode or Manual Mode type the G22 command in the proper format G22 Xn Yn Zn In Jn Kn All the Address Words must be accompanied by the appropriate values or the CNC will not activate software limits In Edit Mode make sure the appropriate Program Listing is displayed Type the G22 command into any program block In the Manual Mode type the G22 command next to the command line Press START Reference Point Return G28 With the G28 XYZ format the Reference Point Return command G28 returns the CNC to a permanent reference position Refer to Table 4 12 Format G28 XYZU Returns the machine directly to its X Y Z and U reference point Machine Home Axes will return at the current feedrate if in G1 mode or rapid if in GO mode Format G28 Xn Yn Zn Un n coordinates X Y Z and U of intermediate point Return to reference point Machine Home through an intermediate point Table 4 12 Return to Reference Point Address Words Label Address Description Word Mid Point X Intermediate point in X if used Mid Point Y Intermediate point in Y if used Mid Point Z Intermediate point in Z if used Mid Point U Intermediate point in U if used NOTE At least one axis must be specified or no motion will occur With the G28 Xx Yy Zz Uu format the machine rapids or feeds depending on if GO or G1 i
146. Tools G Code Listing Entry Fields M Code Listing Typing in Address Words Typing in M Codes Examples of G Code Help Screens O 0O CO ODO BODO DO Edit Help Soft Keys The Edit Help Menu contains the following soft keys Refer to Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Edit Help Soft Keys Soft Key o Label Number Description Moves highlight to the requested Help Template Help Window Switches between selecting codes for help on the top portion of the screen and directly editing the program free form on the bottom portion of the screen To edit a typed command G Code or canned cycle place the cursor on the appropriate block and press ReEdit F6 Once all the fields have been edited press Use F10 Deactivates the Edit Help Menu and returns you to the Program Listing 1 2 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Edit Help Using Help Graphic Screens to Enter Program Blocks The Program Editor displays help graphic screens in which you write and edit program blocks When the CNC activates a help graphic screen its first entry field is highlighted A highlight indicates that you can type values in an entry field or make the appropriate selection Press ENTER to move the highlight to the next entry field In the last entry field of the help graphic screen press Use F10 or ENTER to add the block to the Program Listing Press the ARROWS to move the
147. YO Feed to starting position X0 YO G1 F10 X3 Absolute Inch Mode feed to P2 Feed to P3 X0 Y 3 Feed to P4 angular move Feed to P1 End program return to N1 In Figure 4 3 MM equivalents are in parentheses following the Inch measurements P1 3 39a 76 2mm 50 8mm 3 76 2mm P3 LINEEX2 P4 Figure 4 3 Angular Motion 4 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Circular Interpolation G2 and G3 Circular interpolation initiates circular moves including arcs G2 commands a clockwise motion G3 commands a counterclockwise motion Arc input Format G2 Xx Yy Zz li Jj Kk Arc input Format G3 Xx Yy Zz li Jj Kk Radius Format G02 Xx Yy Rr Radius Format G03 Xx Yy Rr Refer to Table 4 5 for parameter descriptions NOTE For circular interpolation in another plane make the plane changes prior to the G2 or G3 block Refer to Plane Selection G17 G18 G19 for information on planes Arc examples use the most common plane G17 XY NOTE Ifthe value of X Y Z I J or K is zero omit it Table 4 5 Parameters for Circular Interpolation Arc CW Radius and End Point clockwise motion Arc CCW Radius and End Point counterclockwise motion Endpoint of arc motion in Absolute or Incremental Mode Distance from the tool location to the arc center I X center
148. able 7 16 G73 draft angle pocket cycle defined 4 1 description 5 14 edit help 7 10 listing table 7 16 programming example illustration 5 15 G75 frame pocket cycle defined 4 1 description 5 16 edit help 7 10 Index 12 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index listing table 7 16 programming example illustration 5 17 G76 hole mill cycle defined 4 1 description 5 18 edit help 7 10 listing table 7 16 programming example illustration 5 19 G77 circular pocket cycle defined 4 1 description 5 20 edit help 7 10 listing table 7 16 programming example illustration 5 21 G78 rectangular pocket cycle defined 4 1 description 5 13 5 22 edit help 7 10 listing table 7 16 mill out pocket prior to G73 5 14 programming example illustration 5 23 G79 drill bolt hole cycle defined 4 1 description 5 10 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 16 G80 drilling off cancel drill tap bore cycle 5 3 defined 4 1 description 5 3 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 16 G81 basic drill cycle defined 4 1 description 5 3 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 16 screen illustration 7 24 G81 G89 drilling tapping boring canned cycles 5 2 programmed prior to G79 5 10 G82 CounterBore drill cycle defined 4 2 description 5 3 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index edit help 7 9 listing table 7 16 screen illustration 7 25 G83 pe
149. able 5 20 Pockets with Islands Subroutines Programming Example 59_Example 1 g 1 G90 G17 G71 G40 i G120 X32 Y22 Z 6 I G53 00 T1 D1 L 25 M6 GO X0 YO 6 1000 M3 7 G162 Defines the Is 8 G162 A10 B20 9 G169 Calls the Irrec A AA AAA A View Adjust Single SUBROUTINES PISLANDS Figure 5 10 Subroutines Pockets with Islands Example Workpiece All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 27 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 20 Pockets with Islands Subroutines Programming Example 2 G120X32Y22Z 61 2J 2K 18______ BA Ss A TD1L 25M6 SS RARA Ss 6 s1000M3 SsS 7 G162 Defines the Islands 8 G162A10B20 S 9 G169 Calls the Irregular Pocket Cycle G169 W1 X5 Y5 A 69 Z 10 0 H2 0 1500 J2000 K1500 M 1 S 2 P25 5 GSS O71 B NM N dh dh _ Q 0O O O IODININININININININININ ale BR WO WO 5 28 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms 46 47 49 50 5 52 46 MAN 49 50 51 52 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 29 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Irregular Pocket Examples Example 1 This example uses an irregular pocket cycle to cut the pocket shape Refer to Figure 5 11 Program the perimeter of the pocket
150. ables you to program the coordinates along the part profile You do not need to adjust the path to compensate for tool diameter Most moves can be compensated Specify right hand or left hand compensation Right or left refers to the side of the path to which the tool offsets as viewed from behind a moving tool If the tool is to the left of the work use G41 If the tool is to the right of the work use G42 NOTE Use tool compensation with lines and arcs only With left hand tool diameter compensation G41 active the tool offsets to the left of the programmed path as viewed from behind a moving tool Refer to Figure 9 6 Left Hand Tool Compensation 9 16 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Programmed Path lt Tool Path O Tool Left Hand Tool Compensation LHCOMP Figure 9 6 Left Hand Tool Compensation With right hand tool diameter compensation G42 active the tool offsets to the right of the programmed path as viewed from behind a moving tool Refer to Figure 9 7 Programmed Path a lt Tool Path Tool Right Hand Tool Compensation rene Figure 9 7 Right Hand Tool Diameter Compensation All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 17 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management When the CNC encounters t
151. adius Chamfering G59 G60 In Position Mode Exact Stop Check G61 Contouring Mode Cutting Mode G64 User Macros G65 G66 G67 Axis Rotation G68 Activating Inch G70 or MM G71 Mode Scaling G72 Activating Absolute G90 or Incremental G91 Mode Absolute Zero Point Programming G92 Mirroring G100 BlockForm G120 Programmable Temporary Path Tolerance G1000 Feedrate FEED DvuUuOUOUDUDODUOUDUDODOUDUOUDUDOUDUDUOUUODODOUOUOOUUR O O All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Rapid Move End Point GO Format GO GO initiates rapid traverse The machine builder sets the actual rapid rate in the Setup Utility Use rapid to position the tool prior to or after a cut Do not use rapid to cut a part Refer to Figure 4 1 One to four axes can be included on a block with GO X Y and Z will reach target simultaneously GO is modal and remains in effect until canceled or changed XO YO X RAPID ee TENETE RAPID RATE FEED RATE Figure 4 1 Rapid Traverse Table 4 2 lists the program blocks required to complete the moves illustrated in Figure 4 1 Table 4 2 Rapid Traverse N1 G90 GO X3 Y 1 Rapid move to X3 Y 1 P1 in Absolute Mode G1 X5 0 X axis feeds to X5 P2 GO X6 Y 2 XY rapid to X6 Y 2 P3 NOTE To override rapid use the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE For more information on using FEED
152. al P N 627785 21 Running Programs Running a Program One Step at a Time Single Step Mode runs a program block by block This mode enables you to step through the program and verify the moves before you cut an actual part Refer to Figure 11 1 To run a program in Single Step Mode 1 Go to the Program Manager select a program and press Select F6 to load the required program 2 Press Exit F10 to return to the Manual screen In Manual Mode press Single Step F5 to activate Single Step Mode 4 Press START to execute each block or motion NOTE In Auto Mode press Single Step F5 to activate Single Step Mode 1 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A Bars APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet v gt SINGLE STEP Figure 11 1 Single Step Screen 11 2 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Running Programs Table 11 1 describes the active soft keys on the Single Step screen and Auto screen refer to Figure 11 2 Auto Screen Table 11 1 Single Step and Auto Screen Soft Keys Soft Key Function _ _ _ Draw mM Activates the Draw function Jog F2 Displays the Jog screen Block Activates the Block Search Refer to search Using Block Search to Select a Starting Block Activates Manual Mode from Auto and Single Step Single Step
153. and OLM Descriptions DvuUuoOvovo oOo All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 7 25 January 08 ANILAM 9 8 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Extra Tool Information On the Tool Screen refer to Figure 9 1 The Tool Page press Extra F2 to display the Extra screen The Extra F2 soft key highlights and new screen field attributes display which can be optionally set These screen field attributes may be necessary for specific canned cycles The Extra F2 screen field attributes follow Tool Number Row Numbers link the values on a row of the Tool Page to a tool number A program block that activates a tool number activates the values and settings on that row of the Tool Page CNC provides Tool Age Time the tool has been in use Max Length Maximum length of tool to be used for roughing cycle Default 0 Plunge Angle Plunge angle used by some canned cycles Comment You type any comment you want for user reference only up to 17 alphanumeric characters Bin Tool Information Soft key displays only when machine is equipped with a random tool changer On the Tool Screen refer to Figure 9 1 The Tool Page press Bin F4 to display the Bin screen or pocket table The Bin F4 soft key highlights and new screen field attributes display which can be optionally set These screen field attributes may be necessary for random style tool changers The Bin F4 screen field at
154. anual P N 627785 21 Running Programs Keystrokes operations al HOLD 2 JOG F2 3 Raise the Z axis using jogging keys 4 Press SPINDLE OFF to stop spindle O Remove drill from holder 6 Place new drill in holder T Jog tool over workpiece with Manual Panel 8 Jog tool down to offset surface 9 TOOL F9 10 TEACH F8 11 EXIT F10 12 Jog Z with Manual Panel 13 Restart spindle by pressing SPINDLE FWD 14 Press Restart Pos F1 and use soft keys F1 F4 to return the axes to their positions 15 Press START to continue program The axes will return to the position they were jogged from when the Jog Return function was initiated in the described path SITUATION 2 X TH CEUGS RERE NI Y SITUATION2 Figure 11 6 Cutting Illustration Refer to Figure 11 6 The tool is feeding along a Y cut on the right side of a workpiece The tool becomes clogged with materials and is no longer able to cut 11 14 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Running Programs Keystrokes operations 1 HOLD JOG F2 Press SPINDLE OFF to stop spindle Remove end mill from holder 2 3 4 9 Place new end mill in holder 6 Jog tool over workpiece with Manual Panel T Jog tool down to offset surface 8 TOOL F9 9 TEACH F8 10 EXIT F10 11 Jog Z with Manual Panel 12 Restart spindle by pressing SPINDLE FWD 13 Press Restart Pos F1 and use
155. anual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Activating Absolute G90 or Incremental G91 Mode You can change the program mode to G90 or G91 Specify Absolute or Incremental Mode at the start of a program Refer to Table 4 29 Absolute Mode Format G90 Incremental Mode Format G91 Table 4 29 Activating the Absolute Incremental Mode Block Format Description _ G70 G90 GO Activates the Absolute Mode G70 G91 GO Activates the Incremental Mode Absolute Zero Point Programming G92 The G92 code is used to set axes to zero reset or to new coordinates preset It is sometimes used to set Part Zero You can use G92 to set Part Zero on a vise or a fixture Anilam recommends using G53 Fixture Offset instead of G92 G92 cancels Mirroring G100 Axis Rotation G68 and Axis Scaling G72 NOTE G92 should only be used in Auto or Single Step mode If programmed in MDI the G92 cancelled when the CNC switches to Auto All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 33 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Mirroring G100 Format G100 XYZUVW G100 programmed with axis G100 X activates mirroring ON for that axis Mirroring reverses the sign of subsequent numbers More than one axis can be mirrored at once G100 XY To cancel mirroring program G100 on a block by itself Refer to Table 4 30 Table 4 30 G100 Addr
156. ate this parameter will not be needed because the default will be good enough Optional The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to find the top of the part The Default is 1 0 25 4 mm toward the part at the angle specified in the S cycle parameter Optional The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the part The Default is 1 0 25 4 mm toward the part at the angle specified in the S cycle parameter Optional This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the coordinate entered relative to the current active work coordinate before finding the skew angle Optional Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 51 G147 Address Words Continued Address Word Description Same as I only for the Z axis Optional To use the Skew Error Finding Cycle Same as l only for the Y axis Optional 1 Place the probe in the spindle 2 Manually jog the probe stylus to the appropriate start position relative to the part as specified by the S parameter in Table 5 51 G147 Address Words above X or Y should be within 0 1 2 54 mm of the part edge If H 1 the Z axis should be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part otherwise the Z axis should be at the side picking depth If run from within a program probe m
157. ault operation mode runs the entire program without pause e Select Single Step F9 to run the program in Single Step Single Step Mode executes the program one block at a time Toggle F9 to return to Auto Mode Draw Screen Description Information is displayed on the screen In the Dashboard on the left side of the screen axis position Tool Diameter Length G Code and M Code are displayed Refer to Figure 8 2 Display Program and Dashboard Screen Exiting Draw To exit Draw and return to the Program Manager press Exit F10 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 8 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Section 9 Tool Page and Tool Management The Tool Page stores data on tools such as tool number diameter length offset diameter wear length wear and tool type Refer to Figure 9 1 For a description of the Tool Page soft keys see Table 9 1 Tool Page Soft Keys Position Display Tool Number Column 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Column 0 0 Description O 0 O 0 0 0 Column z Value Limits or Range Page Page Clear Soft Key gt ore on cow une Pd Teach eat gt Tapene TOOLPAGE Figure 9 1 The Tool Page Other functions related to the Tool Page may be accessed using the SHIFT key These functions are described in this section Press the SHIFT key to redisplay the Tool Shift screen Refer to Figure 9 2 Shif
158. ay from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1 2 54 mm if not set Optional The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to find the top of the part The default if Q is not set or set to 0 is 0 1 beyond the edge of the web If Q is set to 1 the default is the current probe position Optional Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 49 G145 Address Words Continued Address Word Description The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the part The default is the current probe position Optional This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the coordinate entered relative to the current active work coordinate before finding the web center Optional Same as l only for the Y axis Optional NI Same as l only for the Z axis Optional Work Coordinate to update with the center location in X or Y axes If set work coordinate will be updated Work coordinate register will not be updated if not set and a warning message will tell the operator no update has taken place if W is not set Optional To use the Inside Outside Web Finding Cycle 1 Place the probe in the spindle 2 Manually jog the probe stylus the approximate center in X or Y within 0 1 2 54 mm If H 1 the Z axis
159. b mill If there are islands to be avoided they must be defined in the line preceding G169 line using G162 Islands Table 5 18 G169 Address Words Address Label Words Description The number of the subprogram that contains the perimeter of the pocket Must be a closed shape Required StartHgt The Absolute Z position before beginning to mill the pocket This must be 0 1 inch or 2 mm above the surface Required ZDepth z The Absolute depth of the pocket Required Stepover A The distance the tool will step over width of cut as it mills out the pocket The step over selected may need to be adjusted to ensure that excessive stock is not left on any of the pocket sides Required NOTE The CNC will default to 0 5 of the cutter diameter if StepOver 0 000 XStart X A rapid to a position to start pocket Cycle will rapid the Z axis to position P RetractHgt then X and Y to the starting position before beginning pocket If not given the cycle will use the current position YStart Y A rapid to a position to start pocket Same as XStart above Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 18 G169 Address Words Continued Address Label Words Description RampFeed The feedrate at which the tool will ramp into the pocket in all three axes RoughFeed WEA Rough cycle feedrate Fined K
160. bed in this section a Speed Spindle Control S Function Miscellaneous Functions M Code a a Control M Codes a Order of Execution Speed Spindle Control S Function Format Sxxxxx Spindle speed is programmed via S Code The RPM range of the machine determines the S Code range Refer to able 12 3 Control M Codes In determining spindle speeds there also may be gear ranges selected by M Codes For example you may be able to select four ranges of speed by programming the corresponding M Code for the required range The machine tool builder specifies the range Check your machine tool manual for details All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 12 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 M Functions Miscellaneous Functions M Code Miscellaneous codes control a variety of machine tool functions Refer to Table 12 2 The machine builder assigns them Be familiar with the M Codes available on your machine control combination M function availability varies from one machine to another Refer to your machine tool manual for a complete list of M Codes Table 12 2 M Code Controlled Functions M Code Function _ _ Spindle Off M6 or MO6 Tool Mount M8 or M08 Coolant On M9 or M09 Coolant Off 12 2 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N627785 21 M Functions Control M Codes Co
161. ble must be programmed before programming G41 Cutter Compensation LEFT or G42 Cutter Compensation RIGHT and cannot be changed while G41 or G42 is active All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 23 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Motion of Tool During Tool Compensation In linear to linear or linear to circular moves the position at the end of the startup block block with G41 Compensation LEFT or G42 Compensation RIGHT will be perpendicular to the next programmed move in the plane Refer to Figure 9 12 and Figure 9 13 Tool Diameter o o G41 a ee AO PGM PATH G41PATH Figure 9 12 A Linear to Linear Move e Tool Diameter TOOL PATH PGM PATH G41LTOC Figure 9 13 A Linear to Circular Move In either case the axes will move to a point perpendicular to the next move during the startup block The length of the XY move that activates compensation must be equal to or greater than the tool radius value Example If tool radius equals 0 3750 the vector length of the XY move that activates compensation must be 0 3750 or greater The same applies to the G40 Compensation OFF move Refer to Figure 9 14 Paths During Tool Compensation During tool compensation the CNC performs offset correctly and automatically Non positioning moves such as dwells except dwell zero or infinite dwells coolant or ot
162. caling G72 99 offsets zero shifts are available Offsets are stored in a table To activate the Fixture Offset Table in Manual Mode press F9 Tool F1 Offsets You can update this table through the program If you use a G53 command to change the offsets in the table the CNC will overwrite the values in the Fixture Offset Table The letter O followed by the Fixture Offset Table number 1 to 99 defines an offset The following topics are described Fixture Offset Table Activating the Fixture Offset Table Changing Fixture Offsets in the Table Adjusting Fixture Offsets in the Table G53 Programming Examples OOO D O Fixture Offset Table The Fixture Offset Table accessed via the Manual screen contains the entered values for Fixture Offsets 1 to 99 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Activating the Fixture Offset Table To activate the Fixture Offset Table 1 In Manual Mode press F9 Tool F3 Offset The Fixture Offset Table activates Refer to Figure 4 10 Oset 0 0 0 0 il 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 y 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 al 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 Tools Extra nagen aca dal ea each Ie Up Down Line OFFSET Figure 4 10 Fixture Offset Table Changing Fixture Offsets in the Table To change a fixture offset to a manually
163. cesses the constraints of the pocket the CNC calculates a tool path to cut a particular pocket Such a program is called a macro The G78 rectangular pocket cycle is an example of a macro that cannot be edited The constraints of the pocket or the feature required are its parameters Parameters for any feature will vary as dimensions change therefore the parameters are often called variables The data for each parameter must be stored as an entity known as a variable register also called variables Parameters passed to a macro will be called parameters in this manual All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 11 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Contents of Variables PRINT Format PRINT xxx variable Format N Block number PRINT xxx variable You can verify the contents of a variable This is useful when you are debugging a program Use the PRINT command to display the contents of a variable on the screen in Manual Single Step and Auto Modes Example 1 PRINT 200 Displays the contents of the variable 200 Example 2 N180 PRINT 110 To display variable contents during program execution use the PRINT command as part of the program Example 2 will print the contents of variables 110 to the screen If commas separate the numbers several variables can be printed simultaneously In Manual Mode type PRINT 110 then press START to display the con
164. ck position on the pocket perimeter less finish stock less tool radius 3 Drilled to a sufficient depth 4 The axes must be positioned over the start hole prior to programming this cycle 5 If you position the tool at the pocket center and omit XY words from G177 block the CNC will use current position as pocket center Plunge Rectangular Pocket G178 Format G178 Mn Wn Hn Zn Xn Yn Bn In Jn Kn Sn Pn An Un Use the plunge rectangular pocket cycle G178 for carbide tooling where a multiple axis ramp in move is not possible The Z axis will plunge single axis to the programmed depth You must drill a start hole previous to the G178 cycle Activate a tool prior to programming G178 so cutter diameter will be Known Position the tool at the center of the pocket prior to G178 or use the X and Y words Refer to Figure 7 16 Plunge Rect Pocket Screen Refer to Table 5 30 Table 5 30 G178 Address Word Address Label Word Description Length heh M Length of pocket in X axis Required W Width of pocket in Y axis Required Z mat Height Z absolute starting rapid height 0 1 inch or 2 mm above surface Required Executed in rapid Required Z Depth abs Zz Absolute depth of pocket Required X center of pocket Y center of pocket Z Max Cut Maximum Z depth per pass For example if you program Z to be 1 and B to be 5 the CNC will rough out the pocket in two levels B is positive Defaults to tool diameter
165. ck drill cycle defined 4 2 description 5 4 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 16 G84 tapping cycle canned cycle description 5 5 defined 4 2 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 16 G85 boring bidirectional cycle defined 4 2 description 5 6 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 16 G86 boring unidirectional cycle defined 4 2 description 5 6 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 16 G87 chip break cycle defined 4 2 description 5 7 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 16 G89 flat bottom boring cycle defined 4 2 description 5 8 edit help 7 9 listing table 7 16 G9 exact stop defined 4 1 edit help 7 11 In Position Mode non modal exact stop 4 12 In Position Mode non modal exact stop check 4 23 listing table 7 14 non modal 4 12 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM G90 absolute defined 4 2 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 16 modal listing table 7 14 mode change to 4 33 G91 incremental defined 4 2 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 16 modal listing table 7 14 mode change to 4 33 programming description 4 31 G92 zero set absolute zero point to set 4 33 defined 4 2 edit help 7 11 listing table 7 17 to cancel G100 mirroring 4 33 G68 axis rotation 4 33 G72 axis scaling 4 33 G Code defined 4 1 entering example 7 20 entry fields 7 18 exact stop formats 4 12 groups listed 7 4 in position mode formats 4 23 listed tabl
166. coolant on off spindle control remain active Do not program any other commands on a G4 block T is the time in seconds that the machine will remain at the current location The range of T is 1 to 9999 9 seconds Timed Dwell Format G4 Tx x timed Infinite Dwell Format G4 TO infinite Example N20 G4 T2 1 Block 20 commands a timed dwell with duration of 2 1 seconds Example N21 G4 TO Block 21 commands an infinite dwell The time countdown is displayed in the Machine Status Area of the Manual screen NOTE ANILAM recommends that you use the Programmed Stop M function M00 instead of an infinite dwell All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 11 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Programming Non modal Exact Stop G9 With the In Position Mode activated the CNC approaches target and performs an in position check before it executes the next move The CNC comes to a complete stop at the end of every block This could cause witness marks to appear on the work but prevents the CNC from rounding off sharp corners Refer to Table 4 9 Format G9 NOTE Rapid moves are always performed in In Position Mode Table 4 9 Exact Stop G Codes Code Format Action G9 Xx x YX x Activates non modal In Position Mode Complete stop only in this block G61 Xx x Yx x Activates Modal In Position Mode The CNC stops to verify location for each targe
167. cro is completed the Z axis moves to the clearance plane The macro contains tangential entry to and exit from the hole surface It uses error checking and messages When the macro is finished machine parameters return to the their previous status String variables Examples EPSI SAVEFRT can be set and used in place of regular variables Symbol or Name Variables Symbol or name variables can be used to make a macro program easier to understand They can represent a value or a variable They can be used only in subprograms Symbol or name variables must be defined before use in the following format TEXT value or variable Examples Pl 3 141592654 PI will be read as the value given TFLAG 1041 TFLAG will represent system variable 1040 current tool comp NOTE Open bracket must start line Do not use equal signs in string variables You can use a variable to print values 35 Pl print 35 3 141592654 will be printed There must be at least one space preceding and following the string variable in a program In the following examples Pl is the variable 35 PI 23 Produces error 35 PI 23 Correct format Once set string variables can be used in any macro within the same program All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 23 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual 17 24 P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Example G90 G70 GO G17 TO ZO XO YO 11 F30 X1 5 YO M
168. ct 17 26 machine status display 3 11 type in manual 7 20 M Codes listed 7 19 MDI defined 3 20 11 1 manual mode 3 12 mode description 3 20 screen illustration 3 20 to use 3 21 measure length offsets 9 13 memory sticks USB 13 2 menus Edit Help G Code 7 14 pop up 2 7 messages SHIFT F1 description 10 4 Msgs SHIFT F1 description 3 15 screen illustration 3 15 tool page 9 7 M functions groups listed 7 12 mill cycle G175 description 5 38 edit help 7 9 screen illustration 7 22 mill 4 axis programming example 15 4 15 5 milling and profiles description 7 9 minus sign address example 17 13 minutes to decimal conversion formula 15 1 mirroring G100 canceled by G92 4 33 description 4 34 edit help 7 10 miscellaneous codes See M Codes MM mode format G71 4 32 MM G71 edit help 7 5 modal corner rounding chamfering G59 G60 4 21 modal function 3 12 modal G Codes defined 4 1 listed table 4 1 modal radius chamfer G59 edit help 7 5 modifiers description 17 1 listed 17 1 Index 1 7 ANILAM mouse USB 13 2 Move F7 edit screen description 6 5 End of Block feature 6 10 End of Prog feature 6 10 goto block illustration 6 13 pop up menu description 6 5 pop up menu illustration 6 5 Start of Block feature 6 10 Start of Prog feature 6 10 move program other directories 10 10 Msgs See also messages Msgs SHIFT F1 auto mode screen 11 3
169. ction Find previous Finds the previous occurrence Page up of the Find what text in the program highlighted text does not change Finds the next occurrence Page down of the Find what text in the program highlighted text does not change Match Case FA Use a case sensitive search Replace Inserts replacement text Replace with for highlighted text Find what and goes to the next occurrence of the Find what text in the program Replace all F7 Inserts replacement text Replace with for all occurrences of the highlighted text Find what in the program Cancel F9 Cancels the find replace search Returns the CNC to the original Edit Funct F8 Screen 6 12 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Editor Replacing Typed Text with New Text Use Replace with to replace selected occurrences of text Enter the appropriate text and the CNC searches the Program Listing for all occurrences of the text You can edit or skip each occurrence Use Match Case F4 for a case sensitive replacement Refer to Figure 6 5 Edit Funct F8 Find Replace Screen To replace specific occurrences of the typed text 1 In Edit Mode press Edit Funct F8 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 4 Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu 2 Select Find Replace and press ENTER to display the Find screen Refer to Figure 6 5 Edit Funct F8 Find Replace
170. ctions G Codes Table 4 22 Macro Program List N230 N240 N250 AS N260 M99 End macro return to next line of main program The CNC returns to the line following the Macro call G65 or G66 in the main program Use the G65 Macro call to call a macro into the main body of the program Refer to Table 4 23 Table 4 23 Macro Call in Main Program Hi Block o Mo r P201 R executes Macro 0201 once at present location After executing the macro M99 encountered the CNC returns to the main program and performs the next programmed command The CNC executes the macro 201 at block 50 with or without repeated loops as programmed When the CNC detects the M99 End Macro Code it returns to the next line of the main program N60 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 27 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Axis Rotation G68 G68 is modal and remains active until canceled Refer to Table 4 24 The CNC automatically cancels rotation if you program S and L Use only the listed codes Activate Format G68 In Jn Sn Cn Pn Ln Cancel Format G68 Table 4 24 G68 Address Words Rotation Ctr 1 Center of rotation polar origin in X axis Center of rotation polar origin in Y axis First Angle Start angle referenced original programmed angular position This variable is used only if L and P are programmed Number of loops Number of
171. ctions angle references and axis signs to appear reversed The standard rule is to view a plane looking in the negative direction along the unused axis Refer to Figure 1 7 Z YZ Plane y XZ Plane XY Plane X X The three planes are shown V as viewed from the rear of the machine This view is the only one that shows all arcs in their normal orientations Za Figure 1 7 Plane Identification All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Introduction Arc Direction The standard rule is to view arc direction for a plane from the positive towards the negative direction along the unused axis From this viewpoint clockwise Cw and counterclockwise Ccw arc directions can be determined For example in the XY plane you view along the Z axis from Z toward Z to determine Cw Ccw directions The Cw Ccw arc directions for each plane are shown in Figure 1 8 Z Cow XY Cw YZ q X Cow XZ gt 5 Cw XZ X Cow YZ Y Cw XY Z ARCDIR Figure 1 8 Clockwise and Counterclockwise Arc Directions All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 1 9 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 CNC Console and Software Basics Section 2 CNC Console and Software Basics The following topics are described in this section The Console Keypad CNC Keyboard Option Soft Keys F1 to F10 Manual Panel Software
172. ctly to set up the offset table G92 can be used in reference to after any G53 active or without any G53 active G53 00 G53 is modal and G53 OO use none is active at power up NOTE Use G40 to cancel G41 G42 before programming G53 4 20 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Modal Corner Radius Chamfering G59 G60 Use G59 to program modal corner rounding or chamfering The corner rounding format blends the intersection of two moves The chamfer format chamfers the intersection of two moves You can use G59 at the intersection of non tangent line line line arc arc line and arc arc moves provided a blend radius or chamfer is possible You cannot blend radii at the intersection of a line tangent to an arc G59 can be used to blend inside or outside radii Tool diameter compensation can be active during modal corner rounding When you blend inside radii with diameter compensation active the blend radius must be greater than the tool radius R defines the radius value for corner rounding E defines a chamfer size Refer to Table 4 16 G59 is modal It will stay active until canceled with a G60 code The CNC activates linear interpolation G1 with G59 You do not have to program G1 prior to the G59 block Corner Rounding Format G59 Rn Chamfer Format G59 En Cancel G59 G60 Cancels G59 immediately Cancel
173. cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating work coordinate offsets e The G142 Outside Corner Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from the manual mode Refer to Table 5 46 Table 5 46 G142 Address Words Quadrant of corner to find 0 upper right 1 upper left 2 lower left 3 lower right Required If set to 1 the cycle will find the top of the part before finding the X amp Y corner coordinate Default is 0 If H is not set or is set to 0 the Z axis must be at the picking depth If H 1 then the Z axis must be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part The probe stylus must be positioned within 0 1 2 54 mm from the outside of the corner in X amp Y Optional The distance to go down from the top of part to find X amp Y coordinate of the corner This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle will bring the probe stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the top 0 1 2 54 mm Optional The distance over from the corner to find X amp Y edge This will allow for a part corner that has a large chamfer or radius where you cannot pick the edge close to the theoretical corner or has an obstruction interfering with the default move Default is 0 4 10 16 mm Optional Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1
174. d a Tool Probe Cycle a Spindle Probe Cycle All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 57 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Tool Probe Cycles Before using your tool probe and tool probe cycles you must setup the probe following the probe manufacturer s specifications This section covers the following topics a Tool Probe G Code Cycle Designations a Description of Tool Probe Cycles For more probing system parameter setup information refer to the 6000 CNC Technical Manual P N 627787 21 The probing parameters can be found on the control by going into the machine configuration as follows refer to Figure 5 18 1 From the Manual mode press SHIFT then F3 Config 2 When asked for a password simply press the ENTER key 3 Go into System gt Probing gt CfgProbingParameters 4 Remember that all numeric values are in metric ERP robing ESCtfgProbingParameters ToepindleProbeType gt Corded TtoolProbeType gt Standard T nominalProbestylusDiameter gt 40 naxitrokeFromHome FirstPick 400 TocalibindToolMeasurementRPM gt 800 oprobeorientation Su E T oaiaFirstrickPFeedRate Fast gt 2000 2FirstPickFeedRate Medium cas cS 2FirstPickFeedRate Slow 10 42RetractAmount a ivRetract mount ae 2RapidTostartPositionFromHome 200 odiameterOfToolProbeGauge ska Figure 5 18 Config Data Parameter Screen Capture e SettoolPr
175. d Description XHoles B Number of holes in X axis Required YHoles E Number of holes in Y axis Required e e used instead of A used instead of D me Angle to rotate the hole pattern Default is 0 degrees 3 o clock position be given Width of pattern in Y axis If used V cannot be given Perimeter Pattern or Square If W is 0 then a matrix pattern will be drilled If Wis 1 then a perimeter pattern edges only will be drilled Refer to Figure 5 3 MATRIX PERIMETER PATTERN PATTERN MATRIX Figure 5 3 Matrix vs Perimeter Pattern All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 11 25 January 08 ANILAM 9 12 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Example G81 Z 1 R 1 F15 G179 X2 Y1 C30 B6 E4 U 5 V 375 WO G80 These blocks rotate a bolt hole pattern 30 degrees counterclockwise Refer to Figure 5 4 x x x X x X x E x AS A SY X X x x Od G179 Figure 5 4 G179 Programming Example All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Pocket Cycles Pocketing cycles eliminate extensive programming One block of programming will mill out the described pocket Activate a tool before programming a pocket cycle All pockets use the current tool diameter from the Tool Page XY positioning may be necessary prior to programming a pocket cycle Progra
176. d Subprogram 01001 G90 GO X2 5 Y 375 G1 Z 125 F5 X3 5 G3 Y 625 J 125 G1 X2 5 G3 Y 375 J 125 GO Z 1 M99 Example 1 does not use S C P or L No loop is required All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 29 25 January 08 ANILAM 4 30 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes N21 sets the XY plane and Absolute Mode N22 enables rotation angle of 30 degrees the origin is X1 5 Y 5 N23 executes sub 1001 at the rotated position The sub is programmed at the 3 o clock position N24 cancels polar rotation Example 2 Refer to Figure 4 14 and Table 4 26 Figure 4 14 G68 Programming Example 2 Table 4 26 G68 Programming Example 2 Po Bik Block CE All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Example 2 uses all variable words of the G68 function Only the path from the 12 o clock position 90 deg to the 1 30 position 45 deg is programmed in the subprogram The G68 loop increments the angle and recalls the subprogram to complete the shape N1 through N4 set program number modals position and tool activation N5 and N6 move the tool to the starting position N7 moves to the 12 o clock position one half of the cutter away from the part Note that cutter compensation cannot be active prior to calling G68 G41 or G42 cutter radius compensation must be ac
177. d in G65 and G66 commands Lists macro number O to be called Ln Lxxxx Used only in G66 Optional repeat command Specify number of times macro should repeat 1 to 9999 N block Number Macro number that occurs in the Oxxxx first line of the macro for identification Mi End macro subprogram and return to line following G65 or G66 in main program A subprogram consists of fixed dimensions but a macro contains variables and parameters that can change every time the macro is used The CNC can pass values to variables in the G65 or G66 command to variables Macros can be stored in the same file as the main program or in a separate file Use the File Inclusion feature to call Macros stored in a separate file Refer to Section 17 Advanced Programming Features for a more detailed explanation of Parameter Passing and Variables and File Inclusion Macros stored in the same file as the main program are defined in the same way as a subprogram with the O address word followed by a label number The macro is terminated with the M99 code and entered into the Program Listing after the main program Refer to Table 4 22 Macro Program List If the command contains an L address word the macro is repeated the specified number of times before the CNC returns to the main program 4 26 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Fun
178. de of the probe stylus for diameter measurement That value will be placed in E if different from the default 0 1 2 54 mm e Position the tool over the probe stylus so that the tooth that sticks down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus and above the stylus less then 0 200 5 08 mm To measure the tool diameter 1 Jog the tool to the top of the probe stylus so that the tooth that sticks down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus 2 From the manual mode and the spindle off input G153 Tn Dn En and press the START button Where T is the tool number D is roughly the diameter of the special tool this should be larger but not more then 0 100 2 54 mm larger and E is the Z axis move down needed if different then the default 0 100 2 54mm so that the largest part of the tool diameter comes in contact with the edge of the probe stylus For example G153 T3 D3 5 E 25 and press the START button 3 The Z axis will feed down with the spindle on touching the top of the probe stylus Once the top of the probe is found the Z axis will rapid back up above the probe and move over to one side of the probe stylus The tool will then move down the distance in E or 0 1 2 54 mm if E is not programmed Then with the spindle turning in reverse the canned cycle will touch the side of the tool to the probe stylus twice on opposite sides establishing the tool s diameter The new diam
179. de range for rapid rate is 100 The CNC will not exceed the maximum rapid rate SERVO RESET Activates the servomotors SERVO RESET SPINDLE Starts the spindle in a forward direction FORWARD NOTE On some machines you must provide the gear range and RPM before you activate this key SPINDLE Starts the spindle in a reverse direction REVERSE NOTE On some machines you must provide gear range and RPM before you activate this key SPINDLE OFF Stops the spindle START Starts all machine moves except jog iat Continued 3 8 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Table 3 2 Manual Operation Keys Continued Label Name JOG Moves the selected axis in a negative direction Available in all modes The machine builder specifies Feedrate JOG Moves the selected axis in the positive direction Available in all modes The machine builder specifies Feedrate HOLD _ Halts any running program or programmed move Press IL START to continue When you activate E STOP the servomotors and any programming operations shut down The CNC defaults to Manual Mode Use E STOP for emergency shutdown or intentional servo shutdown Press E STOP to halt all axes and machine related functions STOP Manual Panel LEDs The following keys have LEDs located directly above them on the Manual Panel When any of t
180. dicular to the starting point offset by half the tool s diameter When a compensated move starts and stops in a corner the tool gouges the work because the tool offsets to a position perpendicular to the endpoint Begin ramp moves at the side to avoid gouging the work Refer to Figure 9 10 Ramp On Off Choices for Milling Inside a Square NOTE Use canned cycles to cut profiles and pockets when possible The CNC automatically selects Ramp On Off positions in a canned cycle All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 19 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Black Area Gouged Position 1 Position 4 Ramp Off Position 2 Position 3 Poorly Chosen Starting 4 End Points Position 1 Position 2 Position 5 Ramp On And Ramp Off Position 3 Position 4 Preferred Method dl Figure 9 10 Ramp On Off Choices for Milling Inside a Square 9 20 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Using Tool Diameter Compensation and Length Offsets with Ball End Mills When you use a ball end mill to cut contoured surfaces use tool diameter compensation and tool length offset together if at all Unlike a flat bottom tool the tool length offset for a ball end mill is not necessarily set to the tip of the tool In most cases set the tool length offset
181. e 134 condition true If the expression is false execution continues to Block N810 LESS THAN N840 IF 123 lt 135 GOTO 880 The symbol lt symbolizes LESS THAN The function is the opposite of GREATER THAN and the expression is true when the contents of variable 123 are less than the contents of variable 135 NOTE Greater than gt and less than lt expressions become false if the contents of the compared variables are equal File Inclusion Example 1 FILENAME G File inclusion is a function that allows a subprogram that is not actually part of the file to be called from the main program or from another subprogram in the file In this way a tool change subprogram or a macro can be stored in the G directory and called from any other program that has the proper file inclusion code which will allow the execution of the external subprogram Example 1 shows the syntax necessary to include a file into another file Format open left bracket then double quote character then the filename and its extension This line must appear somewhere in the program that is to call the included program All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 31 25 January 08 ANILAM 17 32 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Example 2 N1 023 TEST G N2 M98 P9 N3 11 1 0000 MILL N4 GO X 6 Y 6 N5 Z 1 N6 N7 N33 M98 P9 N34 T2 N35 368 DRILL N36 N50 M98 P9 N51 M3
182. e 4 1 listing table 7 14 machine status display 3 11 macros description 4 25 modal listing table 7 14 spindle probe cycles listed 5 75 tool probe cycles listed 5 61 user macros listed 17 17 getting started 1 2 G functions arcs listed 7 6 basic modal functions listed 7 5 drilling cycles listed 7 9 groups listed 7 4 milling and profiles listed 7 9 other G function listed 7 11 pocket cycles listed 7 10 Index 13 ANILAM rotation scaling and mirroring listed 7 10 tool radius compensation listed 7 5 Goto F4 use to select a starting block 11 5 goto block feature 6 13 Illustration 6 13 GOTO conditional statement 17 27 17 29 GREATER THAN operator description 17 31 green icon program running program area label 3 11 H half window size display DXF 16 6 halted program clearing 11 8 handwheel jog mode setting table 3 22 key illustration 3 8 to operate 3 22 to select 3 22 Handwheel F8 jog return screen description 11 12 helical interpolation description 4 10 example 4 10 program example 4 10 Help graphic screen use to enter program blocks 7 3 to access 7 1 highlight bar 2 7 hold a single step run 11 4 auto mode program 11 7 the execution 11 4 Hold ALT S hold the program 14 1 HOLD key illustration 3 9 hole mill cycle G76 description 5 18 edit help 7 10 Home F4 power on CNC 3 2 start up screen 14 1 icon green program
183. e description 4 16 return from reference point defined 4 1 edit help 7 11 listing table 7 15 G3 arc CCW defined 4 1 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index description 4 7 7 8 edit help 7 6 listing table 7 14 modal listing table 7 14 G30 move reference from machine home defined 4 1 description 4 17 G31 probe move defined 4 1 description 5 57 17 26 referenced 4 17 G4 dwell defined 4 1 description 4 11 edit help 7 11 listing table 7 14 G40 compensation OFF defined 4 1 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 15 tool radius compensation to cancel cancel compensation example 9 22 G41 4 20 G42 4 20 G41 compensation LEFT canceled by G40 4 20 defined 4 1 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 15 not permitted during pocket cycles 5 13 programming example 9 29 G41 G42 tool path compensation 9 16 G42 compensation RIGHT canceled by G40 4 20 defined 4 1 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 15 not permitted during pocket cycles 5 13 programming example 9 30 G53 fixture offset defined 4 1 description 4 18 edit help 7 11 examples 4 20 listing table 7 15 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM G59 modal radius chamfer defined 4 1 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 15 G59 G60 modal corner rounding chamfering 4 21 G60 cancel modal radius or chamfer defined 4 1 edit
184. e parameter 15 2 Show Details SHIFT F7 screen Illustration 10 6 Shut Down F1 shut down screen 3 6 14 1 Shut Down SHIFT F10 description 3 14 manual mode 3 6 shut down screen 14 1 soft keys description 3 14 shut down off line software 14 1 shutting down CNC 3 6 SIK SHIFT F9 referenced 3 14 simulation mode Draw 8 1 Single Step F9 run program one block at a time 8 7 single surface measure edge find G141 defined 5 75 description 5 81 single step screen illustration 11 3 secondary soft keys listed 11 3 soft keys listed 11 3 single step mode auto mode switch to 11 6 defined 11 1 program to run 11 2 running one step at a time 11 2 starting block select using arrow keys 11 4 toggle to 8 7 using 11 4 skew error find G147 5 91 Index 23 ANILAM skew error or angle find G147 defined 5 76 description 5 91 slash code block skip description 17 10 SLOTMAC G macro program example 17 22 soft key active 3 11 auto mode listed 11 3 basoc drill cycle listed 5 3 Block search listed 11 5 Block search gt Find F8 soft keys listed 11 6 counterbore drill cycle listed 5 3 display gauge screen listed 3 4 Draw screen listed 8 3 DXF converter descriptions 16 5 edit help listed 7 2 editing keys description 6 3 Find Replace description 6 12 jog return listed 11 12 labels description 2 6 6 2 Manual screen listed 3 13 Msgs SHIFT F1 description
185. e text 2 8 F7 Draw viewing program 8 1 F7 Move edit screen description 6 5 End of Block feature 6 10 End of Prog feature 6 10 goto block illustration 6 13 pop up menu illustration 6 5 Start of Block feature 6 10 Start of Prog feature 6 10 F7 Tool jog return screen description SS AS F8 Display Program display Draw image program and dashboard 8 3 F8 Edit Funct copy blocks description 6 15 cut blocks description 6 15 deleting a program block 6 8 find replace screen description 6 12 6 13 find replace description screen 6 11 marking blocks 6 7 paste blocks 6 15 Replace with feature 6 13 F8 Edit program editor 1 2 program screen 6 2 program screen access DXF converter 16 2 F8 Find description 9 4 tool number description 9 9 F8 Handwheel jog return screen description 11 12 F8 Insert Off overwrite typing over text 2 8 F8 Insert On inserting text 2 8 F9 Single Step run program one block at a time 8 7 F9 Teach offsets in tool page enter 9 13 tool length offsets setting 9 14 tool probe calibration cycle 5 62 F9 Utils pop up menu illustration 10 8 face mill cycle G170 5 32 G170 edit help 7 9 G170 screen illustration 7 21 Index 7 ANILAM tool approach illustration 5 32 FEED feedrate defined 4 2 description 4 37 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 18 inch programming example 4 37 MM programming example 4 37
186. e Thread Mill Cycle 1 In Edit mode press Help F1 then select THREAD MILL CYCLE display the G181 Thread Mill Cycle menu refer to Figure 7 10 Thread Mill Cycle Screen 2 Complete the entry fields refer to Table 5 28 and press USE F10 Table 5 28 describes the Thread Mill Cycle entry fields Table 5 28 G181 Address Words Address Label Word Description Absolute Z position where the thread cut will finish This can be above or below the start position depending on the direction of the thread cut up or down Required Absolute Z position where the thread cut starts This can be above or below the finish position depending on the direction of the thread cut up or down If not set cycle will use the current Z tool position Required ZSafePosn An Absolute safe Z position above the part for rapid moves in X and or Y Required Warning P must be above the part to avoid a crash while positioning MajorDia Major thread Diameter If this is a tapered thread it is the major diameter at the Z start position Hence if you have a tapered hole and you start at the top and cut down you would have a different major diameter than if you started at the bottom and cut up A plus value cuts in the CW direction and a minus value cuts in the CCW direction Required ThdDepth C Depth of thread The incremental depth of thread on one side A plus value is inside thread a minus value is outside thread Required Co
187. e UL i S O D BASIC DRILL CYCLE Figure 7 12 Basic Drill Cycle Screen 1 24 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Edit Help From Drilling Cycles select CounterBore Drill Cycle G82 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 13 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A 2 APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES o OM T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill T4 0 125 Extended Drill ll fa le la ad A E La u i ae e COUNTER BORING CYCLE Figure 7 13 CounterBore Drill Cycle Screen From Drilling Cycles select Drill Pattern Cycle G179 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 14 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill T4 0 125 Extended Drill rr CA Ls OT ed Pee A al ME Ia on oO WON Pp O A DRILL PATTERN CYCLE Figure 7 14 Drill Pattern Cycle Screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 7 25 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help From Pocket Cycles select Plunge Circ Pocket Cycle G177 to display the Help screen refer to Figure 7 15 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE
188. e of n up or down _ depending if its fractional part is equal or greater than 0 500000 or less than 0 500000 100 1 500 G01 X round 100 will move to X2 0000 101 1 499 GO1 X round 101 will move to X1 0000 k FIX n will round the value down to the next whole no number 100 5 2 G01 X fix 100 will move to X2 0000 FUP n will round the value up to the next whole number no 100 5 2 G01 X fup 100 will move to X3 0000 m VAR n is used to check if a user variable has been no defined in a program IF var 100 THEN If 100 has been defined by the user then true If not then false SIN n will give the sine of n n is assumed to be in degrees G01 X cos 15 Y sin 15 will move along the hypotenuse of a 15 degree angle with a hypotenuse of 1 COS n will give the cosine of n TAN n will give the tangent of n ASIN n will give the arcsine of n ACOS n will give the arccosine of n ATAN n will give the arctangent of n ABS n will give the absolute value of n SQRT n will give the square root of n 17 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Ref from Previous Table ys TRUN n will truncate the value of n unary logical not not equal to Positive 100 means positive ae value is in 100 Negative 100 means negative whatever is in 100
189. e program can be selected at a time To Select a program 1 Inthe Program Manager use ARROWS to highlight a program 2 Press Select F6 The CNC loads the program The name of the currently loaded program displays in the Program Name field at the bottom left of the screen Selecting a Program for Editing When the required program is highlighted press Edit F8 to activate the Editor NOTE Ifthe Program Editor is activated in Manual Mode the Editor will open the loaded program To select a program for editing 1 In the Program Manager use ARROWS to highlight the program name 2 Press Edit F8 The Program Editor activates The CNC displays the listing for the selected program All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 10 7 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Management Deleting a Program To delete a program 1 Highlight a program in the Program Manager 2 Press Delete F3 The CNC prompts to confirm the deletion and the soft keys change for your response 3 Press Yes F1 The CNC deletes the selected program Press No F3 The Delete command is canceled NOTE Deleting a program automatically deletes the associated S file Utils Function Pop Up Menus 100ml g This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A 3414 G APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES SKIFANI G 0 625 End Mil 8 BUTISL DXF 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet 8 DXF DAVE DXF 0 250 x
190. e purpose 4 Execute that line in Manual by pressing START All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 85 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Inside Outside Boss Hole Finding G 144 Format G144 Qn Xn Yn Hn En Vn An Bn In Jn Kn Rn Wn e Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle e A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe and that tool offset active before using this cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating tool length offsets e A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate active before using this cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating work coordinate offsets e The G144 Inside or Outside Boss Hole Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from the manual mode Refer to Table 5 48 Table 5 48 G144 Address Words Address Word Description Inside or Outside 0 Inside Hole 1 Outside Boss Required Estimated length of boss hole if rectangular or the Diameter if round Required Estimated width of boss hole Y is only specified if boss or hole is rectangular in shape Optional If set to 1 the cycle will find the top of the part before finding center of hole or boss If Q parameter is set to 1 H is forced to 1 as well otherwise the Default is 0 Optional
191. e side lengths and Z step may be changed To make this program totally independent the Z depth and draft angle can be set to variables and the additional calculations must then be made Example 2 This program requires the length and width of a rectangle the cut per side on the rectangle and the number of passes around the rectangle Variables 150 to 199 are read only They can be set only in the main program O 1000 GO G17 G70 G90 F80 TO Z0 XO YO START POSITION OF RECTANGLE 151 3 SET READ ONLY VARIABLE X LENGTH OF SIDE 152 3 SET READ ONLY VARIABLE Y LENGTH OF SIDE 153 25 SET READ ONLY VARIABLE CUT PER SIDE 154 5 SET READ ONLY VARIABLE NUMBER OF PASSES M98 P1 CALL SUBPROGRAM BODY O1 G91 G1 X 151 MOVE X AXIS LENGTH OF SIDE YH152 MOVE Y AXIS LENGTH OF SIDE X 151 MOVE X NEGATIVE Y 152 MOVE Y NEGATIVE 111 0 SET SIDE CUT INCREMENT TO 0 LOOP 154 LOOP 154 NUMBER OF TIMES X 153 Y 153 SET SIDE CUT 111 111 153 DECREMENT SIDE CUT EACH LOOP 101 151 111 2 CALCULATE NEW X LENGTH 102 152 111 2 CALCULATE NEW Y LENGTH X 101 MOVE AROUND SQUARE USING NEW SIDE LENGTHS Y 102 X 101 Y 102 END M99 The read only variables are set in Blocks N60 to N90 Then the subprogram is called At Block N170 the first move is made along the X axis followed by a move along the Y axis At Blocks N190 and N200 the All rights
192. e surface to be cut into Required FrameWidth Framewidth Required DepthCut Maximum Z depth per pass For example if Z is programmed to be 1 and B to be 5 the frame will be roughed out in two levels B is programmed as a positive dimension Defaults to tool diameter depth less finish stock RampFeed Defaults to last programmed feedrate RoughFeed J After the ramp in move described above the tool will rough mill the frame at feedrate J Defaults to last programmed feedrate OutsideRad V Outside corner radius of frame Defaults to value of U InsideRad Must be equal to or greater than tool radius negative value stock will be left but no finish pass will occur If you do not enter a value finish stock will not be left Maximum tool stepover must be less than tool diameter A dimension climb CCW A dimension conventional CW Defaults to half tool diameter Z axis absolute rapid retract height must be equal to or above H Defaults to H StartHgt value Ramp in feed The tool will ramp into the first depth of cut with a Finish pass feedrate Defaults to last programmed feedrate YZ move from the I D of the frame to the O D of the frame Finish stock amount per side including bottom If you enter a RetractHgt 5 16 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Example G75 M3 W1 125 H 1 Z 375 A
193. earches forward and reverse in the program See Searching the Program Listing for Specific Text and Find Replace Description from Edit Funct F8 Screen Mark Blk ON Use to mark and unmark program blocks See Mark BIk OFF Marking Programming Blocks and Unmarking Program Blocks Copy Copy program blocks using the BLOCK operations Copy feature See To Mark and Copy Blocks Paste copied or cut blocks into another section of the program using the BLOCK operations Paste feature See Pasting Blocks within a Program Delete program blocks using the BLOCK operations Cut feature See Deleting a Program Block and To Mark and Cut Blocks 6 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Editor Marking Programming Blocks For many editing features you must mark the affected program blocks before the edit is performed To mark program blocks 1 In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the first block to be marked 2 Press Edit Funct F8 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 4 Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu Select Mark BIk ON The block is marked Use ARROW keys to mark additional blocks up or down from the cursor position Unmarking Program Blocks 1 In Edit Mode press Edit Funct F8 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 4 Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu 2 Select Mark BIk O
194. ecked or set All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 69 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms You must have the tool positioned over the probe stylus so the tooth that sticks down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus and above the stylus less then 0 100 2 0 mm NOTE If the spindle is locked you may have to unlock it to manually orient the tool tooth over the probe stylus To measure the tool length 1 5 70 Jog the tool to the top of the probe stylus so that the tooth that sticks down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus From the manual mode type G152 Tn Dd and press the START button Where T is the tool number and D is roughly the diameter of the special tool For example G152 T3 D3 5 The spindle will turn on in reverse and the Z axis should go down and touch the top of the probe stylus keeping the X and Y position the same then rapid up 0 02 0 508 mm and then retouch using the slow feedrate programmed in the machine setup parameter The cycle will then update the tool length offset register clearing any value in the length wear register turn the spindle off and return the tool to the Z height where it started The Tool Length has been set and you can now change to another tool and repeat steps 1 through 3 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC Use
195. ect to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Management Program Screen Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys Refer to Table 10 1 Table 10 1 Program Screen Soft Keys DirTree F1_ Togglesbetween tree and list control Create F2 Creates a new blank program Delete F3 The CNC deletes the selected program You must load a program before you can run it Only one program can be loaded at a time Draw oO O O F Enables Draw functionality Edit F8 Select a program for editing Displays the Utils pop up menu See Table 10 3 Utils F9 Pop up Menu Description Exit F10 __ Return to Manual screen Press SHIFT while in the Program screen to activate the secondary soft key functions refer to Figure 10 2 Shift Screen from Program Screen Refer to Table 10 2 Program Screen Secondary Soft Keys All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 10 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Management Table 10 2 Program Screen Secondary Soft Keys Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function SHIFT F1 Displays messages prompts and reminders See Section 3 Messages Msgs SHIFT F1 SHIFT F2 Creates a new directory Log to SHIFT F4 Changes the current directory to the selected directory o Expanded by using the right ARROW o Compressed by using the left ARROW o Traverse the directory using up and do
196. efault 0 1 2 54mm If you put a number higher than 0 55 13 97 mm the control displays an error Optional Default 0 17 To calibrate the tool probe 1 Jog the calibration standard the calibration standard should be in the spindle to the top of your work piece and set its tool length offset to the top of the work piece or to wherever you would like your Z zero to be To calibrate the tool a Jog the tip of the calibration standard to the proper spot b Press the Teach F9 function key 2 Manually jog the calibration standard over the probe stylus center and less then 0 1 2 54 mm above the probe stylus It should be no more then 0 1 2 54 mm from the center of the stylus 5 62 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms 3 From the manual mode type G150 D n and press the START button Where D is the exact diameter of the calibration standard For example G150 D 5 4 The Z axis will initially go down and touch the top of the probe stylus at the feedrate specified in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium machine setup parameter Then retouch at the slow feedrate specified in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup parameter establishing the zero probe stylus top 5 Then incrementally rapid up whatever value that is in the ZRetractAmount machine setup parameter 6 The spindle will come on at the RPM
197. efer to Section 9 Compensation G40 G41 G42 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 1 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help Arcs The Arcs enables G2 Arc CW Refer to Section 4 Circular Interpolation G2 and G3 G3 Arc CCW Refer to Section 4 Circular Interpolation G2 and G3 Refer to Programming Concepts in Section 1 Introduction for information on planes and arc directions The CNC executes arcs in the XY G17 plane by default For an arc in the XZ G18 or YZ G19 plane program the plane change before the arc move After you make all the required moves in the XZ or YZ plane return the CNC to the XY plane Refer to Figure 7 2 There are two arcs that can intersect any two points an arc with an included angle less than 180 degrees and an arc with an included angle greater than 180 degrees Included Angle Included Angle Less Than 180 Degrees Greater Than 180 Degrees Positive Radius Value Negative Radius Value tepat gt Figure 7 2 Endpoint Radius Arc Types To program an arc with an included angle of less than 180 degrees type a positive radius value To program an Arc with an included angle of greater than 180 degrees type a negative radius value The CNC chooses which arc center to use based on the sign of the typed value 7 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual
198. en using cycles that have built in compensation You can run all Jog features from the Tool Page Tool Page offsets activate when you program a T Code For example N3 T1 N4 GO G41 XnYn N5 etc Block N3 activates Tool 1 length offset N4 activates tool compensation for the following blocks In Block N4 the G41 command must be accompanied by a move XYZ to take effect The motion must be in rapid G0 or feedrate G1 The tool diameter activates when the CNC executes the move programmed on the block G40 and G42 must also be accompanied by moves and activate in the same manner All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 15 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management The following topics are described a Tool Path Compensation G41 G42 a Using Tool Diameter Compensation and Length Offsets with Ball End Mills Tool Path Compensation G41 G42 NOTE Be familiar with basic CNC principles before you attempt to write compensated moves When tool compensation is not active the CNC positions the tool s center on the programmed path This creates a problem when programming a part profile because the cutting edge is half a diameter away from the path Use tool diameter compensation to overcome this problem When tool compensation is active the CNC offsets the tool by half a diameter to position the cutting edge of the tool on the programmed path This en
199. ension created using DXF converter 16 1 16 8 GO rapid move defined 4 1 description 4 4 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 14 modal listing table 7 14 G04 See G4 7 11 G09 See G9 7 11 G1 feed move defined 4 1 description 4 5 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 14 modal listing table 7 14 programming example 4 5 G100 mirroring canceled by G53 4 18 canceled by G92 4 33 defined 4 2 description 4 34 edit help 7 10 listing table 7 17 G1000 programmable temporary path tolerance defined 4 2 description 4 36 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index G120 BlockForm defined 4 2 description 4 35 edit help 7 11 listing table 7 17 program requirement for Draw 8 2 G140 spindle probe calibration cycle defined 4 1 5 75 description 5 79 G141 single surface measure edge find defined 4 1 5 75 description 5 81 G142 outside part corner find defined 4 1 5 75 description 5 82 G143 inside part corner find defined 4 1 5 75 description 5 84 G144 inside or outside hole or boss center find defined 4 1 5 76 description 5 86 G145 inside or outside web or slot center find defined 4 1 5 76 description 5 88 G146 protected positioning move defined 4 1 5 76 description 5 90 G147 skew error or angle find defined 4 1 5 76 description 5 91 G150 tool probe calibration cycle defined 4 1 5 61 description 5 62 G15
200. epth Z Absolute hole depth Required StartHgt i Initial Z start point in rapid Required TPlorLead Threads per Inch TPI in Inch mode or Lead Distance between threads in MM mode ae SynSpn S Spindle No 0 or Yes ReturnHgt P Z retract r after hole E in rapid Dwell D __ Dwell time All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Boring Bidirectional Cycle G85 Format G85 Zn Rn Fn Pn G85 is a boring cycle generally used to make a pass in each direction on a bore or to tap with a self reversing tapping head It feeds from the R plane to Z depth and then feeds back to the retract height Refer to Table 5 5 Table 5 5 G85 Address Words Address Label Word Description ZDepth zZz Absolute hole depth Required StartHgt R _ Initial Z start point in rapid Required Feed F Feedrate S O ReturnHgt P Z return point after hole depth in rapid Boring Unidirectional Cycle G86 Format G86 Zn Rn Fn In Dn Pn Cn G86 is a boring cycle that allows the X axis to back off the bore surface after the spindle has stopped and oriented itself The cycle will feed from the R plane to Z depth dwell for the specified time stop and orient the spindle to the specified angle C back off in X rapid retract in Z re position in X and restart the spindle Refer to Table 5 6 Your machine must be
201. equipped with spindle M functions Spindle Forward M3 Spindle Reverse M4 Spindle Off M5 and spindle orientation M19 to use this cycle Do not use the G86 cycle if the machine does not have the spindle commands and spindle orientation Table 5 6 G86 Address Words Address Label Word Description Finish Depth Z Absolute hole depth Required Start Height R Initial Z start point in rapid Required Feed Rate F Feedrate 3 3 33 3 X Backoff X axis incremental backoff distance in X positive or negative dimension Dwell Time O D Dwell time in seconds Return Height O P Z return point after hole depth in rapid Index Angle C M19 index angle If no angle is given the angle in MC_ 5003 Default Spindle Orientation Angle is used 5 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Chip Break Cycle G87 Format G87 Zn Rn In Jn Kn Fn Wn Un Pn G87 is the chip breaker peck drilling cycle generally used to peck drill medium to deep holes The cycle feeds from the R plane to the first peck depth in Z rapid retracts the chip break increment W feeds to the next calculated peck depth initial peck less J and continues this sequence until it reaches a U depth or until final hole depth is reached The peck distance will never be more than I or less than K Refer to Table 5 7 This cycle enables optimum d
202. equired to face the surface of a part G171 Circular Profile Cycle The Circular Profile Cycle cleans up the inside or outside profile of an existing circle G172 Rectangular Profile Cycle The Rectangular Profile Cycle cleans up the inside or outside profile of a rectangle G175 Mill Cycle Use the mill cycle G175 to machine through holes or counter bores G176 EndMill Cycle The mill cycle is terminated with the EndMill block at which point it rapids up to the StartHgt and returns to the uncompensated X and Y location G177 Plunge Circ Pocket Cycle Use the plunge circular pocket cycle G177 for carbide tooling when a multiple axis ramp in move is not possible The Z axis will plunge single axis to programmed depths G178 Plunge Rect Pocket Use the plunge rectangular pocket cycle G178 for carbide tooling where a multiple axis ramp in move is not possible The Z axis will plunge single axis to the programmed depth G179 Drill Pattern Cycle Use the automatic hole pattern canned cycle G179 to program partial or full pattern hole grids You can use G179 for a corner pattern when holes are required only on four corners Thread Mill Cycle Use the thread mill cycle for cutting inside or outside threads It will cut either Inch or MM left or right hand and Z movement up or down A single tooth or multi toothed tool may be used Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 7 17 25 Ja
203. er At default the CNC 9 28 looks ahead far enough to find a valid intersection between the current and next move Set the variable 1032 before you turn on the compensation G40 G41 or G42 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management G41 Programming Example Tool compensation can be activated with G41 or G42 Therefore you can program the part edge directly rather than having to calculate the offset manually Refer to Figure 9 17 and Table 9 3 On a 3 8 diameter end mill the diameter value in the Tool Page for Tool 1 is 3750 25 4 7 5 d 3 76 2mm 2 R 12 7mm 90 deg 5 127mm G41 Figure 9 17 Motion Example using G41 Absolute G90 Table 9 3 Motion Example Using G41 Standard Metric O All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Refer to Table 9 4 for line by line details of Table 9 3 Motion Example Using G41 Table 9 4 Line by Line Description of Table 9 3 Motion Example Using G41 Node Function OOOO ee ede eee ne eee eae ee Moves to tool ange secon E nti OEA N5 Activates tool diameter compensation and positions tool Disables diameter compensation during rapid move to X 3 0 Y 1 0 Cancels tool moves Z to home position Ends progra
204. erpolation lO J 5 J 12 7 Make arc move N17 G1 X5 X127 Feed to X position bottom of part N18 X0 Y 2 5 Y 63 5 Return to start position cut left side of part Y 3 Y8 Move off part in Y GO Z 1 Z2 Retract move in Z N21 G40 X 3 X 8 Cancel cutter compensation N22 TOZO Cancel tool offsets and tools Retract to Z home X 2 X 50 Y2 Y50 Move off in X N28 o a N27 01 HOLE LOCATIONS Subprogram SUB Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 55 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 37 Loop Programming Example Continued Bik ____Block_ _Deseription _ G90 GO X2 X50 80 Y 5 9Y Activate Absolute and Rapid 12 7 Modes Move to first hole location LOOP 5 Repeat following moves 5 times G91 X 75 X19 05 Distance between holes N31 END _____ Endofloop secre ena poses Raise Z X 2 X 50 Y2 Y50 5 56 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Probing Cycles This section describes operation and an overview of the tool and spindle probe canned cycles available on the 60001 CNC products The cycles provided perform the most common tool and spindle probing functions Custom cycles to perform specific functions can be written using the G31 primitive and parametric programming
205. escription 17 11 single moves 3 20 straight line example 4 5 subprogram example 5 52 Illustration 5 51 multiple parts 5 53 system variables listed 17 8 thread mill cycle 5 40 tool offset modification example 17 4 user variables block skip description 17 9 common global description 17 9 description 17 9 local description 17 9 read only description 17 9 static global description 17 9 variable description 17 10 prompts Msgs 10 4 operator 2 8 tool page 9 7 protected positioning move G146 defined 5 76 description 5 90 protected probe positioning G146 5 90 Q quill position Z0 9 12 Quit SHIFT F10 cancel unsaved edits 6 7 R ramp choices inside a square illustration 9 21 ramp move 9 18 ramping into compensated move illustration 9 19 rapid move GO description 4 4 edit help 7 5 rapid traverse illustration 4 4 rapid traverse program blocks 4 4 rapid move speed adjusting 3 16 Rapid mode 3 18 Index 21 ANILAM read only variables description 17 9 real time Draw mode 8 1 Draw using while running programs 11 8 mode Draw screen 11 8 rectangular pocket cycle G78 5 22 pocket cycle G78 edit help 7 10 profile cycle G172 5 36 profile cycle G172 edit help 7 9 profile cycle G172 screen illustration 7 22 red icon program hold program area 3 11 Redo SHIFT F4 restore canceled edits 6 9 reference point move from machine home G30
206. eseeeseesseseneteeenas 7 21 Section 8 Viewing Programs with Draw SE seer een a ee eee ee ee ee ee eee ee 8 2 Draw Screen DeschpliON einen AAA 8 7 EXITING DF A E A NRA 8 7 Section 9 Tool Page and Tool Management ACIIValING the TOOP AG C ssaa a aA a A mie 9 2 Using NEToo PAGO a a a a r A a 9 3 PINGING COOS DY INUMDGP cs IS bois set 9 4 Changing Wool Page Valles it do ce o ade eet at atl 9 5 Clearing a Tool Whole ROW cccccceccsececececeeeeeeceseeeseneese cece eeseeesseeseeesaeeesaeeseeeseeesseeeseeesoneess 9 5 Clearing a Single ValS ese a a ts E ances 9 5 viii All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Contents AGIUSTING ao male WV ANAC ccoo ito colirio 9 5 Tool Page Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys occcoccccccccocncconocuocococnonanococononnonanonnnnonononanonannnanns 9 6 Extia LOOM MIO MACON rc tad eiii aia 9 8 Bl TOO IOMA rr a a a oe er 9 8 Offset TOOMNMTORMAUON serrat rtorras Ne 9 9 FINAS O00l NUDE e EE Mee een a Sone Se eee eee ee ee 9 9 UVM WMG We rece cet hn o S 9 10 PEC and OLN DESChOONS a ES 9 10 TeGodes ana TOOLACIVANON serranas van sacnepsines a a E EE 9 11 H ole Denton Blocks rai o dada ee 9 11 TON O Ao at oo 9 12 Entering Olisets inthe Tool Page o e do o Eo Adol 9 13 Settind Tool Length ONSSUS cit A Eer EET 9 14 Entering the Z Position Manually ooocoocccocnconcccnoccnonnnconocononanonnnonnonononononnnn
207. ess Words Address Label Word Description xais X Activates mirroring ON for the X axis Yaxis Y Activates mirroring ON for the Y axis Zaxis Z _ Activates mirroring ON for the Z axis UAxis U _ Activates mirroring ON for the U axis vais vO Activates LA a for the V axis WaAxis W Activates mirroring ON for the W axis 4 34 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes BlockForm G120 Format G120 Xnn nnnn Ynn nnnn Znn nnnn Inn nnnn Jnn nnnn Knn nnnn G120 is used to define a window in relation to the part zero This is used by the Draw function to present a solid model on the raw stock Refer to Table 4 31 Note Even if there is no cutter compensation being used you must have an active tool with a diameter before draw will graphically show material being machine from the above stock definition G120 can be placed only once any where within the program and must be accompanied by all of the following parameters Table 4 31 G120 Address Words Address Label Word Description XMax X The positive most edge in the X axis of the stock from part zero Required YMax Y The positive most edge in the Y axis of the stock from part zero Required The top of the stock in relation to part zero Required The negative most edge in the X axis of the stock from pa
208. et T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill T4 0 125 Extended Drill 220 TS 6 32 Extended Roll Tap T6 0 406 End MI T7 0 807 Drill NC programs g m if T8 0 250 End Mil Figure 10 4 Show Details Screen e Select Up Dir SHIFT F10 to show the source directory without the tree structure Refer to Figure 10 5 Y My CNC Size Type Date B C user Folder 17 01 2008 15 22 B D E B F o aY user NC programs g m 2 e e E a oe fee UP DIR1 Figure 10 5 Up Dir Screen The display setting that shows only part program names is usually the easiest to use 10 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Management Creating a New Part Program To create a new part program 1 In Manual Mode press Program F2 The Program Manager activates 2 Press Create F2 The control displays the Create pop up with the prompt Enter the name of the new Program Program Name _ Type the new program name Press ENTER The new program name is inserted in the Program Manager Choosing Program Names A name cannot be longer than 60 alphanumeric characters The CNC displays program names as they were entered No two programs can have the same name The CNC automatically places the G extension after the name Selecting a Program for Running You must select a program before you can run it Only on
209. eter If this parameter is left off the control will always turn on in reverse by default Optional This is the override for the medium feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate Medium Sometimes there may be a tool that has a large diameter making it necessary to slow it down to prevent the touch probe from being hit too hard This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original feedrate Optional This is the override for the slow feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original feedrate Optional This is the override for the RPM that was set in the machine setup parameter calibAndToolMeasurementRPM This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original RPM If you would like the cycle to run without the spindle turning enter a negative value in the R parameter Optional WARNING Large tools can result in probe damage if the touch feedrate is set too fast For this reason the cycle parameters M S and R have been added to enable the programmer operator to override the values in the machine setup parameters for the specific tool being ch
210. eter will then be stored in that tool s diameter register and clear any value in the diameter wear register The Z axis will then rapid up to machine home 4 The Tool Diameter has now been set and you can change to another tool and repeat steps 1 through 3 5 72 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Tool Breakage Length and Diameter Wear Detection G154 Format G154 Tn Dn Kn Jn En Un Mn Sn Rn Refer to Table 5 43 Table 5 43 G154 Address Word Address Word Description Tool number Required The T cycle parameter will be the tool number you want checked This is the rough diameter on the bottom of the tool Optional The diameter specified in this parameter should be roughly the diameter on the bottom of the tool that you want to be over the center of the probe stylus If you have a left handed tool you would give a negative value to this diameter so the spindle will turn on forward verses reverse When stepping over for checking the diameter of the tool this cycle will use the diameter in the tool table for the tool being checked The maximum length wear value limit The cycle will check to see if the cutter length has changed by more then this amount and will alarm stopping the program if exceeded If not set the cycle will not check the tool length Optional NOTE Atleast one K or J must be set or the cyc
211. etition 5 49 nesting 5 50 P Code M99 end of subprogram 5 53 programming example 5 52 Illustration 5 51 multiple parts 5 53 subroutines pockets with islands example 5 27 symbol variables description 17 23 system variables listed 17 8 T tapping canned cycle G84 5 5 tapping cycle G84 edit help 7 9 T Code description 9 11 T Code tool page offset 9 15 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM Teach F9 offsets in tool page enter 9 13 tool length offsets setting 9 14 tool probe calibration cycle 5 62 teach mode 3 18 temporary change tool diameter 9 23 text deleting 2 8 THEN conditional statement 17 27 thread mill cycle G181 description 5 40 edit help 7 9 screen illustration 7 23 timer CNC description 11 10 machine status display 3 11 TLO See tool length offset TLO defined 5 60 9 12 tool activation description 9 11 center on path 9 16 definition block defined 9 11 diameter temporary change 9 23 edge 9 16 linear to circular move illustration 9 24 linear to linear move illustration 9 24 machine status display 3 11 management description 9 1 motion tool compensation 9 24 mount M06 See mount M6 7 19 mount M6 control M Codes 12 2 edit help 7 19 tool activation 9 11 tool change 12 mount TOOL listed 7 13 number to find 9 4 offset cancel illustration 9 26 path compensation G41 G42
212. etter V Question Mark Letter X None X Axis Coordinate Letter Y None Y Axis Coordinate Letter Z None Z Axis Coordinate Number One Left Parenthesis RAPID Number Two Right Parenthesis LINE Number Three Pound or Number Sign ARC Number Four Vertical Bar used to separate FEED parts of a blueprint programming block for angles chamfers radii Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 CNC Console and Software Basics Table 2 1 Alphanumeric Keys Continued Primary Function SHIFT Function Number Five Semi Colon TOOL shortcut key not enabled Number Six Slash Right MCODE shortcut key not enabled Number Seven Ampersand MM IN shortcut key not enabled Number Eight Percent Symbol DWELL shortcut key not enabled Number Nine Inch Symbol PLANE shortcut key not enabled Minus Sign Dash Plus Sign Period Decimal Sign Asterisk used to comment out RPM shortcut key not all or part of a block characters enabled to the right of the asterisk are ignored The CNC ignores these blocks Space Key Blank Space All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 2 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 CNC Console and Software Basics Editing Keys Use the Editing Keys to edit programs and move around the screen Refer to Table 2 2 Table 2 2 Editing Keys Label or Name SHIFT Di
213. ext occurrence of the text in the program To regress to the previous occurrence of the text press Find prev F1 The CNC regresses Page Up to the previous occurrence of the text in the program 6 Use this method to search for all occurrences of the text in the Program Listing 7 Press Return F10 to exit the Find Replace screen This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet T3 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill T4 0 125 Extended Drill T5 6 32 Extended Roll Tap T6 0 406 End Mill T7 0 807 Drill T8 0 250 End Mill T9 0 169 Drill T10 0 209 Drill T11 0 500 Drill T12 0 120 Drill wo ODA Kno FW NE a on Bb Y N Pp O Tools are set on the top of the rig Left side of fixture FIND REPLACE Figure 6 5 Edit Funct F8 Find Replace Screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 6 11 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Editor The following topic is described a Find Replace Description for Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu Find Replace Description from Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu Press Find Replace to display the Find Replace screen refer to Figure 6 5 Edit Funct F8 Find Replace Screen and Table 6 4 Table 6 4 describes the Find Replace screen active soft keys Table 6 4 Find Replace Screen Soft Keys Soft Key Fun
214. f the Absolute Zero before making Absolute Mode moves The following topic is described a Using Manual Data Input Mode 3 20 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Using Manual Data Input Mode To use Manual Data Input Mode 1 In Manual Mode type the command block s at the COMMAND line 2 Press START to execute the typed commands Most functions that can be commanded in a part program can also be commanded in MDI Mode These include e G00 G01 G02 G03 moves e M Codes T Codes tool activation S Codes spindle speed e Modal commands G90 G91 G70 G71 etc e G Codes G92 G28 G53 etc The following example demonstrates how MDI Mode might be used to activate the spindle COMMAND M43 S600 M3 M43 Activates Gear Range defined by M43 in setup S600 Activates Specified Spindle Speed M3 Activates Spindle Forward All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 3 21 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Operating the Handwheel Optional NOTE The handwheel operation described here assumes that the handwheel has been properly installed and configured in the Setup Utility The handwheel soft key will not display unless the Setup Utility has been configured for handwheel use The CNC supports an option that allows you to move a se
215. feed to the thread center for inside threads or a safe distance away from the thread for outside threads depending on the value in R ArcinRad e Then feed back to the H height e Then feed X and Y to the next depth of cut The depth of each roughing pass will be the thread depth specified in the C ThdDepth parameter minus the stock amount specified in the S StockAmt parameter divided by the number of roughing passes specified in the E Passes parameter e The cycle repeats this process until the final finish pass e It will then cut the thread at the full thread major diameter Sample Thread Mill Cycle Program 1 GO G90 G70 G17 T1 M6 S2000 M3 XO YO G181 Z 1 H0 1 P 5 D1 C 0625 B8 R 1 S 002 E2 J20 0 K5 0 Z5 M5 M2 CON DD OO BW N With a cutter diameter of 0 625 this program will cut a 1 8 inside thread at XO YO The tool will spiral down the thread pitch of 8 threads per inch finishing at a depth of 1 The starting height is 0 1 the safe rapid Z ZFinish height is 0 5 the major thread diameter is 1 inch and depth of thread is 0 0625 The arc in radius is 0 1 and the stock amount for the finish pass is 0 002 The rough feedrate is 20 0 and the finish feedrate is 5 0 If you would like all non cutting positioning moves to be rapid set E Passes to a negative number The idea is to initially set E as a positive number and after proving out the program change E to a negative number for fa
216. fer to Table 4 27 The Inch MM Mode is usually specified at the start of a program Table 4 27 Activating the Inch MM Mode Block Format Description G70 G90 GO Activates Inch Mode G71 G90 GO Activates MM Mode The display resolution number of decimal places shown is set up in the Setup Utility The default resolution is four decimal places for Inch Mode and also four decimal places for MM Mode Scaling G72 Use Scaling G72 to enlarge or reduce patterns commanded by the program Refer to Table 4 28 G72 is modal If a variable word is not given it is assumed to be x1 factor Axes for circular motion must have the same factor Activating Format G72 Xn Yn Zn Table 4 28 Cancel Format G72 Address Word Scale Factor X Scaling factor for X axis Scale Factor Y Scaling factor for Y axis Scale Factor Z IA Scaling factor for Z axis Tool length offsets diameter offsets tool wear factors and cutter compensation are not affected by G72 No other codes are allowed on a G72 block WARNING Never program a T Code TO T1 while in G72 Activate the Tn command before G72 and then deactivate G72 before deactivating the Tn command This applies to all tools TO to T99 Example G72 X2 Y2 Z1 The CNC will scale all X and Y moves to twice their programmed size Z moves will not be scaled times 1 Z could have been omitted 4 32 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s M
217. for a ball end mill half the tool s diameter back from the tip Refer to Figure 9 11 Ball End Mill Z axis at TO Z0 position Tool Diameter From Tip Tool Length Offset Adjusted To Ball s Center Part Zero BALLENDMILL Figure 9 11 Setting Tool Length Offset for Ball End Mill Compensation G40 G41 G42 The following topics are described Cancel Mode in Tool Compensation G40 Startup and Movement in Z Axis Temporary Change of Tool Diameter Motion of Tool During Tool Compensation Compensation Around Acute Angles General Precautions G41 Programming Example G42 Programming Example DoUooOvCOUODODUO O All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 21 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Cancel Mode in Tool Compensation G40 At the end of a cutting sequence that performs tool compensation G41 or G42 you must use G40 to cancel compensation The following example describes a part programmed in the XY plane using G41 NOTE You must make an X and or Y move with or after G40 before changing the active tool number Example N4 G17 GO G41 Xn Yn N5 etc N20 G0 G40 Xn Yn N21 etc Program G40 on a line with GO or G1 unless GO or G1 is already active G40 programmed with or immediately following G2 or G3 will generate an alarm message Startup and Movement in Z Axis The CNC looks ahead far enough to determine the next planar intersectio
218. from Machine Home G30 o oocccccncccccoccccncncccnccoonococnnncnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnnos 4 17 A a a dt aetianate des E E eam ameteedlaus 4 17 Fixture Offset Work Coordinate System Select G53 oooccccciconccocccoccncocncconococnnncncnnnoncnonnnnnnnos 4 18 Fixture Offset Table neos callada tadsedantsomtdednaeateacemsmaenteeeds 4 18 Activating the Fixture Offset Taable ccoooccconncconocococccnoconononononnonanocononnnnonanonnnnnnnnonaninannnnoness 4 19 Changing Fixture Offsets in the Table oocccocccocccccccconccocncconocncnonononononornnnnnonanonnnnnnonenaninoss 4 19 Adjusting Fixture Offsets in the Table cooocccocncconicocncccnoconononnnonnonanocnnnonononanonannnnanonaninonoss 4 19 G53 Programming ExaMplOS unitaria risas 4 20 Modal Corner Radius Chamfering G59 G60 ooccocccoccccccccccccoccconcncnononononoconncnonnnonnnnnnnnconnnnnnnnnnnnos 4 21 In Position Mode Exact Stop Check G61 o ooccccccccccccccocococoncnoncncnononnnnoncnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonons 4 23 Contouring Mode Cutting Mode G64 ocooncccccccocccoccccocncconocococncnconcnoncononnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnaninnnnnos 4 24 User Macros 665 G66 G67 ius adan adas 4 25 AXIS Rotati n G69 iia ii 4 28 G68 Programming Examples unir 4 29 Activating Inch G70 or MM G71 MON occoocccccncoccccccccocncoccnoncnoncncnncnoncnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnos 4 32 SCAN GTZ ases dde AEE E EES 4 32
219. g Negative Direction MANPAN Figure 3 6 Manual Panel The following topics are described a Manual Panel Keys a Manual Panel LEDs All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 3 7 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Manual Panel Keys Manual panel keys allow you to control machine movements manually These keys are located on the Manual Panel Refer to Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Manual Operation Keys Label Name Handwheel Moves the selected controlled axis while in the Manual Mode Jog must be set to 1 10 or 100 Optional Axis Select O In Manual Mode selects the axis to be jogged AXIS JOG Pa X z Cycles the CNC through manual movement modes FEED Cr RAPID 100 10 1 The machine builder sets Default rapid me and feed rates at setup NOTE The machine builder determines the actual speed of the machine during a move SPINDLE Overrides the programmed spindle RPM rate Itis a OVERRIDE O 13 position rotary switch that ranges from 40 to 160 percent ewspinDLE Each increment adjusts the spindle override by 10 This feature can be used only on machines with programmable spindles FEEDRATE Overrides the feed and or rapid rate of the axes in Manual OVERRIDE Q Auto and Single Step modes Itis a 13 position rotary WWM 9 FEED switch which ranges from O to 120 percent Each increment adjusts the feedback override by 10 NOTE The overri
220. ge illustration 9 1 Up Dir SHIFT F10 illustration 10 6 View Type illustration 8 4 8 5 scroll feature 6 14 search for specific text 6 11 secondary soft keys Auto mode screen listed 11 3 Manual screen listed 3 13 Program screen listed 10 3 10 4 Single Step screen listed 11 3 Tool page listed 9 7 seconds to degrees conversion formula 15 1 seconds remaining in a dwell 3 11 select copy to destination pull up menu 10 10 move to destination pull up menu 10 10 selecting axis 3 18 program for editing 10 7 program for running 10 7 program for utilities 10 7 selective block skip description 17 11 servo drive to reset 3 2 SERVO RESET key illustration 3 8 servos disengage 3 6 reactivating 3 6 reset 3 6 to activate 3 6 setting macro parameters 17 18 part zero 1 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM stroke limit G22 4 14 TLO for ball end mill illustration 9 22 variables 17 13 shape CAM extension 16 8 creating DXF converter 16 3 to delete 16 3 Shape F1 DXF converter 16 3 shift edit screen illustration 6 2 SHIFT key illustration 2 6 SHIFT keys program screen to activate 10 4 tool page description 9 2 SHIFT Program screen illustration 10 3 SHIFT screen from Manual screen illustration 3 2 3 5 from Program screen illustration 10 4 from Tool screen illustration 9 2 short form addressing table 17 29 shortestDistanc
221. ghts reserved Subject to change without notice 5 65 25 January 08 ANILAM 5 66 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms 4 Ifyou have done a single tool in Manual that tool is now measured and you are ready to measure the next tool If you have placed multiple lines in a program one for each tool all your tools are measured and ready for use Shell mill style tools that have a hole in the center of the bottom will not work with this canned cycle in this case you must use the manual canned cycles G152 Manual Tool Length Measure for Special Tools for length and G153 Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Special Tools for diameter See Table 5 40 G151 Address Words This cycle is only good for drills taps reamers ball nosed endmills and standard endmills with a flat bottom the cycle updates length and diameter tool registers clearing anything in the wear registers The following examples are described for machining centers with automatic tool changers Format G151 T tool With T cycle parameter only set 1 The machine will rapid the Z axis up and pick up the tool designated in the T parameter and rapid directly over the center of the probe stylus 2 The Z axis will rapid down the distance placed in the ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome machine setup parameter then start feeding down toward the probe for the initial touch at the feedrate that was placed in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast machine setu
222. gram A macro is a group of instructions stored in memory and called by the main program when needed Think of macros as sophisticated flexible subprograms which can be modal G66 or Non modal G65 Refer to Table 4 20 Macros might consist of e Customized canned cycles to simplify the programming of a particular part or entire programs for similar part production e Parameters Pn An Bn etc passed to the subprogram by letter address similar to canned cycles e Automatic measuring sequences using sensors such as probes for feedback to the CNC Table 4 20 Macro G Codes Format MINM G65 Pn Ln Executes Non modal Macro Pn with G65 Pn optional repeat loop at current location Macro is repeated number of times peor nen specified in command Ln If the L address word is omitted the macro will be executed only once Pn macro number O Bn etc Ln optional loop Specify number of times the macro should repeat n G66 Pn Executes called macro Pn after each G66 Pn An programmed move until canceled with a G67 command Bn etc Pn called macro Cancels Modal Macro G66 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 25 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Table 4 21 lists and describes the Address Words and M Codes used with macros Table 4 21 Macro Address Words Address Word Format Description 7 Pxxxx Use
223. gram is completed M99 Finish 1 subprogram N507 D N508 N509 M99 Return to main program at N5 2nd Subprogram N606 M99 Jump to N506 5 50 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Example Mill out a series of identical slots in a plate Each slot is 1 2 wide and 0 3750 deep Slot 1 is programmed in a subprogram All XY dimensions will be incremental to enable you to position the slot anywhere on the coordinate system Refer to Figure 5 16 1 0 25 4 3 5 88 9 gt EL L 4 L LLE T EL L L L L L LLL a a a a a a a a ae Figure 5 16 Subprogram Programming Example All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 51 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms The main program will position the cutter for each slot and call the subprogram that mills out the slots Subprogram 0100 uses incremental values to enable you to position the slot at various positions on the work For all three slots you must position the cutter before you call the subprogram Refer to Table 5 35 Table 5 35 Subprogram Programming Example Bik Block Description _ _ 012 SLOTS MAIN PROGRAM Define program 12 program name N2 G90 G70 G71 GO G17 TO ZO Set absolute inch rapid XY plane cancel tool ZO X 2 X 50 Y2 Y50 Move to X 2 Y2 T1 1 2 MILL Act
224. grees Example 30 sec 3600 0 008 degrees Example 5 deg 30 min 15 sec 5 30 60 15 3600 5 0 5 0 004 5 004 degrees When the U axis is programmed alone without an X Y or Z linear move you must program a feedrate for the U axis in degrees per minute dpm Format FU 500 0 500 dpm for the U axis FU is also allowed when the U axis is linear A federate is programmed in in min or mm min All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 15 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC Programming and Operations Manual P N 627785 21 Four Axis Programming Rotary Axis Programming Conventions A rotary axis typically U will program differently based on the setting of the Axes gt PhysicalAxis gt U gt CfgRollOver gt shortestDistance parameter which is determined by the builder The default for this parameter is off in which case the U axis behaves like a linear axis If set to on the behavior of the rotary axis U is described below If programming the U axis in Absolute The rotary axis will never rotate more than 180 degrees in one move So if a move of greater than 180 degrees is programmed the control will resolve the number to a positive value less than 360 degrees and move to that target taking the shortest distance always less than 180 degrees A move of exactly 180 degrees will always move positive and a move of exactly 360 degrees will not move at all If programming the U axis in Incrementa
225. h a self reversing tapping head Boring Unidirectional Cycle G86 is a boring cycle that allows the X axis to back off the bore surface after the spindle has stopped and oriented itself 00 N Chip Break Cycle G87 is the chip breaker peck drilling cycle generally used to peck drill medium to deep holes Flat Bottom Boring Cycle G89 is a boring cycle generally used to program a pass in each direction with a dwell at the bottom Absolute Sets CNC to Absolute Mode Incremental Sets CNC to Incremental Mode Continued 7 16 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help ANILAM Table 7 5 Edit Help G Code Listing Continued Label and Description Zero Set Shifts the location of Absolute Zero to a preset location The preset location measured from Machine Home is specified in the G92 command Mirroring G100 programmed with axis G100 X activates mirror image ON for that axis Mirror image reverses the sign of subsequent numbers More than one axis can be mirrored at once G100 XY To cancel mirror image program G100 on a block by itself BlockForm G120 is used to define a window in relation to the X and Y machine home and the Z part zero 162 Islands This cycle allows islands in irregular pockets Irregular Pocket Cycle Use G169 to mill irregular pockets G170 Face Mill Cycle Facing cycles simplify the programming r
226. he Tool Page T41 D 5000 L 1 2500 Applies a diameter offset of 5000 and length offset of 1 2500 to the active tool T1 R 2500 L 1 2500 Applies a tool radius value of 2500 and length offset of 1 2500 to the active tool The diameter offset takes effect when you program G41 or G42 All dimensions are in reference to the work surface CAUTION If you use T1 to activate a tool later in the program the Tool Page offsets for Tool 1 will be used not the values programmed via T1 Dn Rn Ln NOTE ANILAM recommends that you use the Tool Page to avoid confusion or possible entry errors on the offsets 9 32 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Management Section 10 Program Management The Program Manager provides access to all of the program management utilities These functions include creating selecting deleting and copying programs The Program Manager also provides access to the network or USB Press Program F2 to activate the Program Manager from the Manual screen The Program Manager s USER listing lists the programs stored in the CNC Refer to Figure 10 1 All CNC programs have G extensions after their names Change the Program Type mode to view programs with other formats The folder where the user programs are stored is V USER All programs should be created and saved in this folder Additional folders can be created
227. he current tool number if Q is set to 5 or 6 NOTE Before any tool length offset is active you must re call that tool Work coordinate register or Tool length register will not be updated if W is not set and a warning message will tell the operator no update has taken place Optional To use the Edge Finding Cycle 1 Place the probe in the spindle 2 Manually jog the probe stylus less then 0 1 2 54 mm away from the surface to be found Type G141 Qn Wn If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated for every surface you wish to find CAUTION When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions later in this document 4 Execute that line in Manual by pressing START All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 81 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Outside Corner Finding G142 Format G142 Qn Hn En Dn Vn An Bn In Jn Kn Wn e Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle e A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe and that tool offset must be active before using this cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating tool length offsets e A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate active before using this
228. he CNC Emergency Stop E STOP Press E STOP to take all axes and spindle servos offline This ends all machine movement To reset E STOP pull out and turn the rotary switch clockwise in the direction of the arrows The switch makes a clicking sound when it resets Resetting E STOP does not automatically reactivate the servos The servos must be reset to move the machine Press SERVO RESET to reset the servos Activating Resetting the Servos For safety reasons the CNC powers up with the servomotors disengaged While the servos are off the CNC cannot move the machine The servos are also disengaged when you press E STOP Reset the servos as follows 1 Ifa limit switch disengaged the servos manually reposition the machine inside its normal range of travel 2 Press E STOP to display the message External emergency stop Rotate the E STOP switch in the direction of the arrows to reset it The E STOP switch makes a clicking sound when it resets 3 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Manual Panel Use the keys on the manual panel to move the machine manually Refer to Figure 3 6 Servo Reset Spindle Off Spindle Override Switch Spindle Reverse Jog Selector Switch Spindle Forward E Stop Coolant Ready e LED Optional ee ici Switch Start Feedrate Override Switch P Jog Positive Direction Jo
229. he following blocks N685 until it reaches an END command The sequence is repeated nnnn times The number of loops can be a variable assignment LOOP 121 GOTO N698 GOTO nnnn GOTO is an instruction to continue program execution at the block specified nnnn You should not require this instruction in a user macro It is intended for use in conjunction with the block skip symbol as shown in the example When block skip is ON Block N698 is not executed When block skip is OFF Block N698 is executed and program execution jumps to the block specified NOTE When you program GOTO statements do not precede the block number with the character N For example GOTO 610 skips to block number N610 Short Form Addressing The appropriate abbreviation instructs the CNC to activate the corresponding command Refer to Table 17 6 Table 17 6 Abbreviations Abbreviation All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 29 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Logical and Comparative Terms The following topics are described a Logical Terms a Comparative Terms Logical Terms All logical operations can be carried out using the following command characters or combinations of characters Refer to Table 17 7 Table 17 7 Logical Symbols Statement Symbol True False Table 0 0 False 0 1 True 1 0 True 1 1 True EXCLUSIVE 0 0 False OR 0 1 True
230. he keys is activated the corresponding LED lights up Refer to Figure 3 6 Manual Panel e Servo Reset e Spindle Off e Spindle Forward e Spindle Reverse The Coolant Ready LED is also located on the Manual Panel Some CNCs have a coolant ready M function For these CNCs the Coolant Ready LED lights when the coolant is ready The coolant is programmed to come on when the machine receives a SPINDLE ON command All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 3 9 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Manual Mode Screen In Manual Mode the CNC displays the Manual screen The Manual screen is the basic operating screen and is displayed when the CNC is turned on All other operating screens are similar in appearance and selected from the Manual screen soft keys When the Manual Mode is active the Manual F4 soft key label highlights Refer to Figure 3 7 Program Area Program Position Display Distance to Go Area Machine Status Display Area a 4 Command Line History Area Active Soft Key Single 7 in Hand Highlighted MAS EEES o MANUAL Screen Figure 3 7 Manual Screen The Manual screen is divided into the following areas Program Area Displays the working program name running status mode of operation and in position check Program Position Display Displays programs X Y and Z position coordinates in reference to Part Home D
231. he move is stopped and the position where the probe touched the part is read and passed to system variables 1060 to 1063 for X to U G31 is aborted if any of the following events occur e The primitive is issued while the probe is still deflected touching the part e The ready signal is not present e Hardware malfunction Trigger signal engaged but no position is latched e Start pulse is issued but probe is not ready after 2 seconds Only cordless probes e Cordless probe still in sleeping mode e Low battery signal becomes active Only cordless probes M code M9387 is provided to select the probe G31 will use and probe activation M9387X0 Selects the Tool touch probe X13 M9387X1 Selects the 3 D touch probe X12 default M9387Y0 Copies Tool touch probe state deflected or not into a system variable 1066 M9387Y1 Copies 3 D touch probe state deflected or not into a system variable 1066 M9387Z0 Turns off cordless probe M938721 Turns on cordless probe Canned cycles are available for the most common probe functions Refer to Section 5 Probing Cycles for details Using the G31 primitive parametric programming and the M code described above it is possible to write additional cycles to perform custom probing functions 17 26 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Conditional
232. he programming required to face the surface of a part Execution begins one tool radius from the D and E start point The selected stepover determines the approach axes Refer to Figure 5 13 Length Y Stepover Y X Stepover gt k Width N Tool X Y Start Point s X Y Start Point N Tool Length Tool Approach Tool Approach Y Stepover X Sicoover Activated Activated Figure 5 13 Face Cycle Tool Approach Facing cycles can start in any corner of the surface and cut in any direction depending on the sign of the X Length and A Width values Program a slightly oversized X and A to ensure complete facing of the surface At the end of the cycle the tool rapids to H then rapids back to D and E start position All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Refer to Figure 7 5 Face Mill Cycle Screen Table 5 23 describes the FACE MILL entry fields Table 5 23 G170 Address Words Address Label Word Description Length xX X axis length to be faced Required Y axis length to be faced Required Y The Absolute Z position before beginning the facing cycle This must be 0 1 inch or 2 mm above the surface Executed in rapid Required Absolute depth of the finished surface Required NOTE ZDepth must be lower than StartHgt StartHgt is 0 1 inch 2 0 m
233. he right When the Insert On mode is active Insert On F8 highlights To put the CNC in the Insert On mode 1 When the CNC prompts for a name toggle to Insert On F8 The CNC highlights Insert On F8 Deleting Text To delete text 1 Move the cursor to underline the text to be deleted 2 Press Delete F7 to delete the selected text 2 8 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Section 3 Manual Operation and Machine Setup The following topics are described in this section Powering On the CNC Shutting Down the CNC Emergency Stop E STOP Activating Resetting the Servos Manual Panel Manual Mode Screen Manual Mode Settings Jog Moves Manual Date Input Mode Operating the Handwheel Optional OOOO DO O DO O O O Powering On the CNC NOTE When you power on the CNC ensure that the E STOP switch is in the in position 1 Turn on the CNC according to the builder s instructions When the power switch is turned on the CNC completely resets 2 Turn the power switch ON The startup screen activates see Figure 3 1 START Figure 3 1 Start Screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 3 1 25 January 08 ANILAM 3 2 3 4 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Reset the servo drive by pressing the SERVO RESET button with the EMERGE
234. he value in the machine setup parameter diameterOfSpindleProbeGauge if needed and should be an exact measurement Optional A The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to find the top of the gauge The default if Q is not set or set to 0 is 0 1 2 54 mm beyond the edge of the ring gauge hole If Q is set to 1 the default is the current probe position Optional The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the gauge The default is the current probe position Optional You must have 1 The probe in the spindle 2 The Ring Gauge mounted on the machine table All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 79 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms To calibrate the probe 1 Jog the probe to the approximate center of the ring gauge by eye and into the hole of the ring gauge at the depth that you wish the probe stylus to come in contact with the inside of the ring gauge hole 2 From the manual mode type G140 and press START 3 The probe will touch four sides of the inside of the hole The spindle will rotate 180 degrees if machine has spindle orientation and touch the same four sides again establishing the center of the ring gauge The spindle will then orient and touch four sides one more time calibrating the probe 4 Remove the ring gauge from the machine and you are now ready to start spindle p
235. help 7 5 listing table 7 15 modal corner rounding Off description 4 21 G61 exact stop mode defined 4 1 edit help 7 11 In Position Mode modal exact stop 4 12 In Position Mode modal exact stop check 4 23 listing table 7 15 to cancel G64 4 24 G64 contouring mode cancel G61 4 23 cancel In Position Mode modal exact stop 4 12 defined 4 1 description 4 24 edit help 7 11 listing table 7 15 G65 macro call single defined 4 1 edit help 7 11 listing table 7 15 macro program example 17 20 macro subprogram example 17 20 non modal 4 25 pass values to variables 4 26 G65 G66 G67 user macros description 17 17 referenced 4 25 G66 macro call modal defined 4 1 description 4 25 edit help 7 11 listing table 7 15 Index 1 1 ANILAM pass values to variables 4 26 G66 G67 macro program example 17 21 G67 cancel modal macro defined 4 1 edit help 7 11 listing table 7 15 G68 axis rotation canceled by G53 4 18 canceled by G92 4 33 defined 4 1 description 4 28 edit help 7 10 examples 4 29 listing table 7 15 G70 inch defined 4 1 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 15 modal listing table 7 14 mode format 4 32 programming example 4 37 G71 MM defined 4 1 edit help 7 5 listing table 7 16 modal listing table 7 14 mode format 4 32 G72 scaling canceled by G53 4 18 canceled by G92 4 33 defined 4 1 description 4 32 edit help 7 10 listing t
236. her auxiliary functions are allowed except M1 Optional Program Stop and MO Program Stop Mode these are not allowed Moves in the third axis are also allowed during compensation 9 24 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management You cannot program a plane change G17 G18 or G19 during tool compensation However a 2 axis move off the currently active plane is allowed For example G17 is the active plane compensation in XY You program an XZ or YZ move The Z axis will reach the programmed target as X Y reaches its compensated target Helical moves in the active plane are also allowed e INTERSECTING POINT o ss G41 1 TOOL PATH PGM PATH PATHS Figure 9 14 Paths during Tool Compensation Program G40 cancel compensation alone or with a move in the active plane The move must be in rapid GO or feedrate G1 Deactivation with G2 G3 is not permitted The move must be at least the tool radius in length The CNC looks ahead to following blocks in order to compensate correctly When it sees an upcoming G40 block the CNC positions the tool perpendicular to the last move before the G40 block All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 25 25 January 08 E NILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Figure 9 15 shows tool movement as compensat
237. highlight between entry fields without typing values Press CLEAR to clear an entry field There are two types of entry fields Required entry fields Contain 0 000 You must type a value for operation of canned cycle or other command Optional entry fields Blank Entry optional If a required entry field is left blank the CNC writes the block using the 0 0000 default This may generate an error message when the program runs Optional entry fields do not require a value When left blank a default value or position is usually assumed You must remember to type decimal points and negative signs where needed The CNC assumes a positive value if no negative sign is typed Press the key to insert a negative sign Press the CLEAR key to clear an entry All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 7 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help G Functions The G Code functions have the following functional groups e All All G Codes are listed including user defined G Codes e Basic Modal Functions e Arcs e Drilling Cycles e Pocket Cycles e Milling and Profiles e Rotation Scaling and Mirroring e Spindle Probing e Tool Probing e Tool Radius Compensation e Other G Functions The following topics are described Basic Modal Functions Tool Radius Compensation Arcs Milling and Profiles Drilling Cycles Pocket Cycles Rotation Scaling and Mirroring Other G Functions DvUuo
238. hold Press MANUAL F4 to cancel a program that is on hold When you cancel a program the CNC terminates tool compensation and canned cycles All other modal settings remain active Single Step Execution of Selected Program Blocks The following topics are described a Using Arrow Keys to Select a Starting Block a Using Block Search to Select a Starting Block a Switching from Single Step Mode to Auto Mode Using Arrow Keys to Select a Starting Block Select the starting block before you start program Load the required program and return to the Manual screen Press Single Step F5 to activate Single Step Mode Press Block Search F3 and then press Scroll F9 Highlight the desired starting block using the ARROW keys Press Return F10 Press START to execute the next block or motion o m e SY S 11 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Running Programs Using Block Search to Select a Starting Block Use Block search to locate a specific block number or entered text The CNC highlights the first block found that contains the specified information Block search only searches forward in the program Begin the search from the starting block to search through the entire program 1 From the Program Manager load the required program and return to the Manual screen Press Single Step F5 or Auto F6 Press Block search F3 The CNC prompts for
239. hted row On the offset table however the machine axis that is copied to the table depends on which column is highlighted Exits the Tool Page The changes are saved as they are completed 9 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Press SHIFT while in the Tool Page to activate the secondary soft key functions refer to Figure 9 2 Shift Screen from Tool Page Refer to Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Tool Page Secondary Soft Keys Soft Key Function _ SHIFT F1 Displays messages prompts and reminders Refer to Section 3 Messages Msgs SHIFT F1 SHIFT F3 Provides access to machine parameters PLC SHIFT F5 Programmable Logic Controller PLC Refer to PLC and OLM Descriptions SHIFT F7 On line Monitor OLM Refer to PLC and OLM Descriptions Find in SHIFT F8 Enables search of the tool table It Table enables you to search for content inside the table Refer to Find in Table Teach SHIFT F9 Sets the current program Z axis value into Program the tool length column of the highlighted row On the offset table however the program axis that is copied to the table depends on which column is highlighted The following topics are described Extra Tool Information Bin Tool Information Offset Tool Information Find Tool Number Find in Table PLC
240. ial Tools must be run first before using the G154 cycle The G154 cycle loads the tool checks and updates length and diameter wear registers if specified until a maximum value is exceeded then it will alarm out stopping the program This cycle can be used in place of calling up a tool before running it You must know the distance from the top of the probe stylus down that you will have to move so that the largest part of the tool diameter is even with the side of the probe stylus for diameter measurement That value will be placed in E if different then the default 0 1 2 54 mm To check the tool length and or tool diameter for wear or breakage In place of the usual Tn M6 command use G154 Tn Dn Kn Jn En Un at a tool change according to the instructions above and the control will check the tool prior to using it To activate the new offset wear values you must call that tool with T Tool M6 after this cycle has been run All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Spindle Probe Cycles This section describes operation and an overview of the spindle probing cycles available in 6000i CNCs It is designed to assist in part setup Before using your spindle probe for part setup you must set the probe up according to the probe manufacturer s specification so that it is set to turn on with a signal if cordless fr
241. icking in the X positive direction finding the skew of the left side of the part 9 92 S 90 would start in the upper right side picking in the X negative direction finding the skew of the right side of the part S 180 would start in the lower right front edge of the part picking in the Y positive direction finding the skew of the front edge of the part Default is 0 Optional The oe from the first pick to the second pick Default is 2 0 50 8 mm Optional If set to 1 the cycle will find the top of the part before finding part skew angle Default is 0 If H is set to 1 the probe stylus should be pre positioned within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part If H is set to 0 the probe stylus should be positioned at the Z axis depth from which you want to make side picks Optional The distance to go down from the top of part to find part skew angle This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle will bring the probe stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the top 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1 2 54 mm if not set This would be used to make sure that the cycle is picking from far enough away from the edge so that it will not trigger the probe prematurely when stepping over to make the second pick Hint If the S cycle parameter is relatively accur
242. ified in the calibAndToolMeasurementRPM machine setup parameter and retouch the probe twice once at the feedrate that is in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_ Medium machine setup parameter and again at the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup parameter The tool length register for that tool is now updated and that tool s length wear register is set to zero Then the Z axis will rapid up to the home position If you have done a single tool in Manual that tool is now measured and you are ready to measure the next tool If you have placed multiple lines in a program one for each tool the machine will then grab the next tool and repeat steps 1 through 6 until all the tools have been measured Format G151 T tool D tool rough diameter Q2 With T D and Q cycle parameters set 1 The machine will rapid the Z axis up and pick up the tool designated in the T cycle parameter and rapid directly over the center of the probe stylus The Z axis will rapid down the distance placed in the ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome machine setup parameter then start feeding down toward the probe for the initial touch at the feedrate that was placed in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast machine setup parameter then will back up The machine will rapid over half the diameter of the cutter from the probe stylus center in the direction related to the probeOrientation machine setup parameter All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 67 25 January 08
243. ift Screen from Manual Screen Refer to Table 3 4 Table 3 4 Manual Screen Secondary Soft Keys Displays the last 10 messages both old already read and new not yet read Display SHIFT gt Display the gauge information on the Gauge Manual screen See Figure 3 4 Display Gauge for Shift Manual Screen stalls Manual TON PLE swt F5 _ Programmable Logic Controller PLC sik swirt F9 Software Identification Key SIK Shut Down srt F10 Shut downtheCNC All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 3 13 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup PLC OLM OSC and SIK Descriptions For more detailed information on PLC OLM OSC and SIK refer to 60001 CNC Technical Manual P N 627787 21 PLC SHIFT F5 Refer to Section 7 Selecting the PLC Mode in P N 627787 21 OLM SHIFT F7 Refer to Section 6 Diagnosis with the Online Monitor OLM gt in P N 627787 21 OSC SHIFT F8 Refer to Section 5 Integrated Oscilloscope in P N 627787 21 SIK SHIFT F9 Refer to Section 1 60001 Overview in P N 627787 21 Shut Down SHIFT F10 On the Manual screen refer to Figure 3 2 Manual Screen press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Manual Shift screen refer to Figure 3 3 Shift Screen from Manual Screen Table 3 5 describes the Shutdown screen active soft keys Table 3 5 Shut Down SHIFT
244. ilam com
245. in program They do not have to be entered in numerical order or begin on any specific block number Refer to Table 5 33 Table 5 33 Subprogram Called from a Main Program _ Main Program fo N1 03 SUB EX1 CP AAA AAA N4 N67 0100 CNC jumps to here at N3 completes subprogram until it reaches M99 N71 and then returns to the main program at N4 CE e CE CA N71M99 SO Repetition of Subprogram Loop Format M98 Pxxx Lxx L is the number of repetitions of the subprogram Example M98 P2000 L12 The block commands twelve repetitions of subprogram number 2000 The maximum number of repetitions is 9999 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 49 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Calling a Subprogram from a Subprogram Calling a subprogram from another subprogram is referred to as nesting The maximum number of programs that can be nested is ten The method of calling an additional subprogram is similar to calling the first Refer to Table 5 34 Table 5 34 Nesting Subprograms Flow of Program Main Program During Call of Additional Subprogram N109 SUB EX2 A Q CE S N4 M98 P101 Jump to 1 subprogram N501 from main program at N4 N5 CA CA AAA 1st Subprogram N501 0101 N502 A N505 M98 P200 Jump from 1 subprogram to oe subprogram occurs at N505 Executes N600 to M606 M99 N506 Return to N506 after 2 subpro
246. in V USER to better organize programs Do not delete or alter files or folders outside of V USER Some files and folders outside of V USER may be needed for normal operation of the CNC Current 2 100rrl g This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A Directory Bla41A 6 APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES A 6KIFANI G 0 625 End Mil l Program 2 G169_Example 1 g 0 750 End Mil out 4 2 from collet Li i 2 MERC OD G 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Dril IS A MERC3 G 0 125 Extended Dril A Sample g 6 32 Extended Roll Tap 0 406 End Mil 0 807 Dril 0 250 End Mil T9 0 169 Dril T 10 0 209 Dri T 11 0 500 Dril Program T 12 0 120 Dril Preview Tools are set on the top of the right hand fixture Left side of fixture X amp Y zero locations are at pen rear r left side of Jue part Loaded will b Bight Program X zero is located on ie right side of the part dl EM eee Program Type mode filter e ae Keys PROGRAM Figure 10 1 Program Screen Other functions related to the Program screen may be accessed using the SHIFT key These functions are described in this section Press the SHIFT key to display the Program Shift screen Refer to Figure 10 2 Shift Screen from Program Screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 10 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Management This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A EME N
247. in a subprogram The CNC calculates the moves to mill out the pocket Enter a 3 8 diameter tool in the Tool Page This part program consists of a main program and a subprogram Refer to Table 5 21 G169 Figure 5 11 G169 Programming Example 1 Table 5 21 G169 Programming Example 1 3 G169 W1 XO YO H 1 Z 125 A 15 M 01 S 01 17 5 J12 5 K9 5 P2 0 7 11 12 13 14 15 MA a a 9 on i MES A 15 5 30 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms G91 G1 Y1 G90 X0 Y 1 5 Example 2 Use an irregular pocket cycle to cut the pocket shape Input the perimeter of the pocket into a subprogram The CNC will calculate the moves to mill out the pocket Input a 3 8 diameter tool in the Tool Page This part program consists of a main program and a subprogram Refer to Figure 5 12 and Table 5 22 Rad 1 25 Rad 0 75 Figure 5 12 G169 Programming Example 2 Table 5 22 G169 Programming Example 2 G90 G70 GO TO ZO T1 M6 3 G169 W99 X0 YO H 1 Z 25 A 16 B 125 M 01 S 01 I7 5 J12 5 K9 5 P2 G90 G00 TO ZO 8 G90GOOX125 YOO 9 62X125 Y 1 2437 R125 S All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 31 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Face Mill Cycle G170 9 32 Format G170 Xn Yn An Bn Fn Hn Zn Dn En Facing cycles simplify t
248. indle Functions a Tool Change OO O Basic M Functions The Basic M Functions enables the following M Codes MO Program Stop Mode M1 Optional Program Stop M2 End of Program M30 Jump to New Program M98 Call SubProgram M99 End of SubProgram M105 Dry Run All Axes M106 Dry Run No Z Axis M107 Dry Run Off Cancel M105 and M106 Cooling Cleaning and Lubrication The Cooling Cleaning Lubrication M functions enables the following M Codes M8 Coolant On M9 Coolant Off Spindle Functions Tool Change The Spindle Functions M functions enables the following M Codes M3 Spindle Forward M4 Spindle Reverse M5 Spindle Off M19 Spindle Orientation SPEED Spindle Speed The Tool Change M function enables the following M Code M6 Tool Mount All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Edit Help Tools The Tools enables the following TOOL Tool Mount All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 7 13 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help G Code Listing When a G Code is selected from the list an input screen activates It contains instructions and entry fields that pertain to the selected G Code Use the screens to input G Codes Refer to Table 7 4 Table 7 4 Most Common Modal G Codes GCode Function _ _ _ _ Table 7 5 describes the other G Codes in the menu Table 7 5 Edit Help G
249. ing toward you toward the front of the machine in the Y direction e Set ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast the Z fast feedrate For example set to 2000 mm per minute mm min Warning When using G151 the tool will travel down beyond the top of the probe after the probe is tripped For this reason make sure that the fast feedrate is not so high as to cause the tool to travel past the probe travel causing damage to the probe The maximum feedrate that can be used is specific to the machine and may need to be set much lower to prevent damage to the probe e Set the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium the Z medium feedrate For example set to 125 mm min e Set ZFirstPickFeedRate_ Slow the Z slow federate for the actual probe pick For example set to 10 0 mm min e Set ZRetractAmount Amount to retract from top of probe after pick For example set to 4 0 mm e Set XYRetractAmount Amount to retract from side of probe after pick For example set to 4 0 mm All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 59 25 January 08 ANILAM 5 60 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms e Set ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome Install the longest tool in the spindle and bring the Z axis to machine home With a tape measure measure the distance from the tool tip to within 13 mm above the top of the probe stylus and enter that number into ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome When using G151 this will cause the tool
250. installed Each table holds a part of identical configuration The same tool does all the work 1 Program the machining sequence as a subprogram in Absolute or Incremental Mode 2 When the sequence is finished on Part 1 program a coordinate shift G92 or G53 and recall the subprogram 3 If you program the subprogram incrementally you do not have to shift the zero point If programmed in absolute then use a coordinate zero shift All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 53 25 January 08 ANILAM Loop Function 5 54 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms In some cases it is simpler to command a program block or series of blocks to loop repeat rather than to program the block s several times Format N680 LOOP nnnn N685 N695 END LOOP instructs the CNC to execute the blocks following block N680 until END The block is repeated nnnn times Subprogram calls axes moves M Codes etc are all available within a loop Each LOOP must have an END Nesting loops one loop inside of another is possible to 10 levels deep The full body of the LOOP command LOOP to END must be contained in the main program or the subprogram in which it was initiated Example In the following program example M and S codes are omitted The program assumes that a manual tool change machine is used no ATC Check your machine tool manual for details on programming M S and T codes
251. ion is deactivated ono gt Tool Path E Program Path Tool Diameter ES Figure 9 15 Offset Cancel The tool moves to a point perpendicular to the last move before the G40 deactivation move All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 9 26 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Compensation Around Acute Angles Refer to Temporary Change of Tool Diameter in this section During compensation the CNC finds the compensated intersection of moves and travels to that point On very sharp angles this is not always desirable For example if you compensate along the outside of a 15 degree corner angle the compensated intersection point will be far away from the actual point on the work Time is wasted by cutting air until the compensated point is reached To save time the CNC creates an arc around the end of the point on the work The CNC applies the arc where there are angles of 15 degrees or less This can be set in the Setup Utility or in the program To change the angle via program set 1031 Example to change an angle to 10 degrees program 1031 10 Re program this value to 15 degrees default when finished The bottom part of Figure 9 16 shows how the CNC will automatically round the compensated intersection The work will remain a sharp corner Actual Compensated Intersection Intersection Automatically
252. ion its tip at the Part ZO position Manually type the plus or minus Z position as it displays in the position display in the Length offset column of the Tool being set and press ENTER NOTE The value of a tool length offset is usually a negative number Diameter Offset in Tool Page When you activate a tool you automatically activate the length offset and diameter values recorded on the Tool Page When a tool is activated the length offset is applied immediately to provide an accurate Z axis position display The active diameter value is important when you program compensated moves and use cycles with built in tool compensation If tool diameter is correct compensated moves and cycles will be executed accurately too Enter tool length offsets and tool diameter values on the numbered lines of the Tool Page The numbered lines on the Tool Page identify the tool number T Code that activates those values You can program a tool activation as a separate block or include it within the block for most moves and cycles Tool activation s programmed as separate blocks are easier to find in a Program Listing The Tool Page can store information for up to a number of tools specified by the machine builder On machines equipped with collet type tool holders it is impractical to use the Tool Page to store tool length offsets You can set tool length offset at tool change Tool Page diameters are still required for compensated moves and wh
253. istance to Go Displays the Distance to Go in reference to e Part Zero e Target Machine Status Display Area Displays operating information Command Line Allows you to enter commands manually 3 10 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Active Soft Key ANILAM Identifies the function of the soft key Soft key functions change from screen to screen A highlighted label indicates an active mode The following topics are described a Machine Status Display Area Labels a Program Area Labels Tool Diameter Length Offset G Codes M Codes Feed Feed RPM RPM Spindle Loop Parts Timer Dwell Program Area Labels Program Block IN POSN Green Icon Red icon Machine Status Display Area Labels Active tool Active tool diameter Z Axis Tool Length Offset for active tool Active fixture offset Active G Codes Active M Codes Current feed rate in inch mm per minute Feedrate override setting 0 to 120 for Feed moves and 0 to 100 for Rapid moves Current spindle speed in revolutions per minute Spindle override setting 40 to 160 Current spindle status OFF FORWARD REVERSE or LOCKED Loop counter Counts subprogram repetitions Number of parts Resets to zero when you enter Auto or Single Step mode Indicates the amount of time per part and accumulated amount of
254. ium Sometimes there may be a tool that has a large diameter making it necessary to slow it down to prevent the touch probe from being hit too hard This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original feedrate Optional set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original feedrate Optional This is the override for the RPM that was set in the machine setup parameter calibAndToolMeasurementRPM This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original RPM Optional This is the override for the slow feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be WARNING Large tools can result in probe damage if the touch feedrate is set too fast For this reason the cycle parameters M S and R have been added to enable the programmer operator to override the values in the machine setup parameters for the specific tool being checked or set WARNING Running this cycle without first initially setting the length and diameter offset could result in damage to the probe and or the machine tool G150 Calibration and G151 Automatic Tool Length and Diameter set or G152 Manual Tool Length Measure for Special Tools and G153 Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Spec
255. ivate Tool 1 X1 X25 4 Y 1 Y 25 4 Z 1 Move to slot location 1 and call sub 22 54 M98 P100 anaes N8 Tozo Cancel tool offset and raises Z N Oooo N12 0100 SLOTS SUBPROGRAM Define this as program 100 and gives name G90 G1 Z 375 Z 9 53 F3 5 F89 Feed Z to 3750 in absolute G91 X3 5 X88 9 F10 F254 Feed X 3 5 incrementally G90 GO Z 1 Z2 Rapid Z to 0 1 absolute G91 X 3 5 X 88 9 Rapid X 3 5000 return to start point N17 G90 M99 Set Absolute Mode end sub return to main 5 52 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms End of Subprogram M99 with a P Code M99 Pxxx When the End of Subprogram M99 command contains a P Code the P Code refers to the block number in the main program to which the subprogram returns Example M99 P70 At N30 the CNC will execute the subprogram and then return to N70 skipping N40 to N70 in the main program From N70 it will resume main program execution The subprogram will return the program to N70 of the main program skipping N40 through N60 Refer to Table 5 36 Table 5 36 M99 P Code Usage Main Program NO N20 N30 M98 P100 Call subprogram Subprogram N1100100 SO N20 CE Subprogram for Multiple Parts Programming To set up a subprogram to machine multiple parts follow this method In this example a table has two vises
256. k N14 calls the program from another file in the Program Manager All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 21 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features SLOTMAC G Program In the following Blocks 1260 through 1400 are comment blocks that regard the macro s structure and concept Example N1255 01255 SLOTMAC G N1260 N1270 EXAMPLE G65 P1255 X 3 Y1 Z 125 A5 B12 C10 N1280 P SUB N1290 X X DIM OF SLOT 24 N1300 Y Y DIM OF SLOT 25 N1310 Z ABS DEPTH OF SLOT 26 N1320 A Z FEEDRATE 1 N1330 B XY FEEDRATE 2 N1340 C ANGLE FROM 3 o clock 3 N1350 N1360 NOTES N1370 1 SLOT WILL HAVE FULL RAD N1380 2 MUST POS N XY OVER CENTER OF L LEFT RAD N1390 3 PROGRAM SLOT LENGTHWISE IN X ANGLE C WILL ROTATE N1400 N1410 G90 GO Z 1 N1420 G61 Z 26 F 1 N1430 G68 CH3 N1440 G91 G41 G64 X 1 Y 25 2 F 2 N1450 X 1 N1460 G3 X0 Y 25 10 J 25 2 N1470 G1 X ABS ABS 24 ABS 25 N1480 G3 X0 Y 25 10 J 25 2 N1490 G1 X ABS ABS 24 ABS 25 N1500 G1 G40 Y 25 2 N1510 G68 N1520 G90 GO Z 1 N1530 M99 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Macro Programming Hole Milling Macro Example 3 machines a CW or CCW hole A move is made to the hole center and to the required Z depth before calling the macro After the ma
257. l The rotary axis will move the exact amount of degrees programmed and in the direction indicated with the plus or minus sign The display will reset to zero every time 360 degrees is crossed so that the highest value in the U axis display will be 359 999 degrees depending on the displayed resolution Feedrate display is always vectored Programming Examples All programming examples are for 4 axis machining with the rotary table mounted on the left end of the mill table with the centerline of the rotary axis parallel to the X axis The face of the rotary table faces X The examples contain both milling and drilling applications Modal cycles G81 to G89 and G66 can be executed at rotary locations as in XYZ locations Non modal canned cycles can be executed at rotary locations Position the rotary axis before you execute a non modal canned cycle The following topics are described a Example 1 Drill a Example 2 Mill o Example 3 Mill 15 2 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC Programming and Operations Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Four Axis Programming Example 1 Drill Mount the fourth axis as described above Mount a part 6 inches wide and 8 inches long on the face of the rotary table shortestDistance is set to off Table 15 1 shows a drilling example You must drill ten 0 375 inch holes 36 degrees apart 1 inch deep 0 75 inches in from the end of the cylinder Then starting at X
258. l remain across shutdowns or software resets WARNING OEM and machine tool builders should use 100 4150 and 260 269 for any custom macros End users should use 151 220 and 270 279 for your custom macros This avoids conflicting usage of the global variables e Block skip variables 1000 to 1009 Refer to Block Skip and Selective Block Skip in this section The following topic is described o Variable Programming Parametric Programmin All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 9 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Variable Programming Parametric Programming Variable or parametric programming enables you to create macros to generate geometric shapes that are not already available in a canned cycle Conditional loops jumps and GOTO commands can be used to control program execution The following topics are described Block Skip Selective Block Skip Parameters and Variable Registers Contents of Variables PRINT Setting and Transferring Variables Storing Result of Computation Variable Programming Examples DOU CODO DO Block Skip Any block preceded by a slash code is omitted if the corresponding block skip switch is set ON in the program previous to the code The switch is set on by programming variable 1000 to the value of 1 A value of 0 sets the switch OFF Example N11 1000
259. l rights reserved Subject to change without notice lil 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Contents Section 1 Introduction EMECIVI NON ad lilas 1 1 Geng Started a dis 1 2 Programming CONCCOIS sicci on6tcasannteetaiectanaharsdsantnatOaaneeagaeandatsdbasesdsnigeniaeiaiacsdoaoteataeansehauermareneeeeetet 1 3 A A fauaatinndrcndadaaadsaidstenenn inched acetna EE TT a 1 3 AXIS SSC OL ONNS vse wastes sca atesp aiacee nar ta nahin ss esos nase eth eaeann ra 1 3 DF S ee Ce a ee ne oe ee eee ee 1 4 A o a 1 4 ZAKS A A A a A a duels 1 4 Ben POSO Sl iia 1 5 Polar GOO dates o i n 1 6 Absolute FPOSMIOMING iisaesiolonoscctasias anani rtio cities los 1 6 Incremental POSO sitiada ios 1 7 Angle ME ASUS LD 1 7 Plane Se cl di O dd 1 8 A o sande knee 1 9 Section 2 CNC Console and Software Basics TS CONS Oli da iaa 2 1 EU AAA A A nr Ohuem E 2 2 PAID MARIUNIGIIG Key Scran a a tau ie Suatala sab G Gaeta a eoabla tata eecant 2 3 0 o Sse rh a a A ah anes 2 6 CNC Keyboard ODIOM il a tas 2 6 e A a ener ae wadec osha alas Lamia dial eee a eens atecau name es 2 6 Manual Panel ita ne en 2 6 SU Sd o ee ee 2 7 POP UP MENUS it dada 2 7 IEA ENE O do 2 8 Ea e a ee a eee eee eee eee 2 8 EES E eer ees ce ac er E E A eS eee erg rr E eee ere N 2 8 Overwrite and Inserting TeXt coocccccccconccconoconicocnnocnocononnnnonononanonnnnonnnonarnnnrnnnnnonaninnnnnnrnenaninnnes 2 8 DEIS TOX rariss a ieee al 2 8 Section 3 Manual
260. le 16 4 Unedited Conversational Program Listing Simple setup for easy testing Dim Abs Unit Inch Feed 80 T1 D 01 L 01 Line Z 1 0 Call sub program s Call 1 Call 2 EndMain Sub program definition s Sub 1 Rapid X 2 51037 Y 0 97667 Arc Cw X 2 44669 Y 0 91299 XCenter 0 10905 YCenter 0 04536 Arc Cw X 1 58477 Y 0 91299 XCenter 0 43096 YCenter 1 03598 Arc Cw X 1 52108 Y 0 97667 XCenter 0 04536 YCenter 0 10905 Arc Cw X 1 52108 Y 1 83859 XCenter 1 03598 YCenter 0 43096 Arc Cw X 1 58477 Y 1 90228 XCenter 0 10905 YCenter 0 04536 Arc Cw X 2 44669 Y 1 90228 XCenter 0 43096 YCenter 1 03598 Arc Cw X 2 51037 Y 1 83859 XCenter 0 04536 YCenter 0 10905 Arc Cw X 2 51037 Y 0 97667 XCenter 1 03598 YCenter 0 43096 EndSub Sub 2 Rapid X 2 01573 Y 1 86039 Rapid X 2 46848 Y 1 40763 Rapid X 2 01573 Y 0 95488 Rapid X 1 56297 Y 1 40763 EndSub Approximated stock for easy 3D simulated draw BlockForm XMax 2 71258 YMax 2 10448 ZMax 0 00000 XMin 1 31888 YMin 0 71078 ZMin 2 00000 16 10 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature The unedited conversational program generated will automatically have sample tool mode and stock information that can be used as guidelines to create the desired program Also these sample commands enable the user to instantly run the generated program in Draw and visualize the tool path without having
261. le cleans up the inside or outside profile of a rectangle When run the CNC rapids to the Ramp 1 starting position rapids to H Z StartHgt and then feeds to the depth of the first cut The machine feeds into the profile along Ramp 1 cuts the rectangle to the M Length and W Width specified then ramps away from the work along Ramp 2 When cutting an inside profile the Graphic Menu displays ramp moves When cutting an outside profile the tool ramps into the profile along Ramp 1 and away from the profile along Ramp 2 as illustrated in Figure 5 15 Length Length Width Width A AR Ramp gt Ramp Inside Outside Figure 5 15 Inside and Outside Profile Ramp Moves The Rectangular Profile Cycle automatically compensates for tool diameter Activate the correct tool diameter before the G172 block Refer to Figure 7 7 Rectangular Profile Cycle Screen Refer to Table 5 25 Table 5 25 G172 Address Words Address Label Word Description Length Henge O MO Finished length of rectangle Required W Finished width of rectangle Required ian NE Absolute Z position before beginning to mill the pocket This must be 0 1 inch or 2 mm above the surface Required Z Absolute depth of the finished profile Required amp IR Radius of the ramping moves Required Setting for cutting on the inside of the profile In or the outside Out Required O Inside 1 Outside Continued 5 36 All right
262. le step screen 11 3 SHIFT F3 Undo cancel edits 6 9 restore deleted blocks 6 9 SHIFT F4 Log to program screen 10 4 SHIFT F4 Parts Counter auto mode screen 11 3 single step screen 11 3 SHIFT F4 Redo restore canceled edits 6 9 SHIFT F5 PLC referenced 3 14 9 10 SHIFT F7 OLM referenced 3 14 9 10 SHIFT F7 OSC auto mode screen 11 3 single step screen 11 3 SHIFT F7 Show Details screen illustration 10 6 SHIFT F8 Find in Table description 9 10 SHIFT F8 OLM auto mode screen 11 3 single step screen 11 3 SHIFT F8 OSC referenced 3 14 SHIFT F9 Change Layout screen illustration 10 5 SHIFT F9 SIK referenced 3 14 DXF extension 16 1 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM fxd extension created using DXF converter 16 8 G extension created using DXF converter 16 1 16 8 program names 10 7 M extension created using DXF converter 16 1 16 8 sel extension created using DXF converter 16 8 4 axis programming conventions 15 2 programming description 15 1 60001 CNC Technical Manual P N 627787 21 referenced 3 14 3 15 5 58 5 76 5 77 9 10 11 3 6000i 3X icon defined 1 1 6000i 4X description 15 1 6000i 4X icon defined 1 1 A abbreviations command listed 17 29 absolute mode center angle arc illustration 7 7 change to G90 4 33 description 1 6 3 17 absolute zero defined 3 1
263. le will alarm The maximum diameter wear value limit The cycle will check to see if the cutter diameter has changed by more then this amount and will alarm stopping the program if exceeded If not set the cycle will not check the tool diameter Optional NOTE Atleast one K or J must be set or the cycle will alarm The distance to go down along the side of the probe stylus when doing a diameter check The maximum E value is 0 55 13 97 mm or the tool may crash into the probe or table If you enter a value larger than 0 55 13 97 mm the control will issue an error message If E is not set the cycle will use a default value of 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Default 0 17 Ball nose cutters and special cutters that require a move down more than 0 55 13 97 mm are not supported If this is undefined or set to 0 the G154 cycle will not update the diameter or length wear register each time it checks a tool If set to one the cycle will update the wear registers In both cases the control will alarm when the maximum limit set in K or J has been exceeded Optional Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 73 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 43 G154 Address Word Continued Address Word Description 9 74 This is the override for the medium feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Med
264. lect a Continuous Jog Mode Feed or Rapid Press and hold down or to jog the machine in the desired direction The machine jogs along the selected axis To stop the machine release the key All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 3 19 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Manual Data Input Mode Manual Data Input MDI Mode allows you to command moves without creating a part program MDI also is a quick way to program one move or a series of moves that will be used only one time Refer to Figure 3 10 3 GO G90 X2 0 Y3 0 4 Single Hand ES EHEN BA MDI Figure 3 10 MDI Screen To execute a command type an instruction on the command line of the Program Area and press START In Manual Mode the cursor rests on the command line More than one command can be programmed at a time Use a semicolon to separate the commands Press HOLD to pause one shot moves Press START to continue Press Manual F4 to cancel MDI moves are executed only once To recall a previously commanded block press UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to go to the line that you want You can execute from any line on the MDI history page After you execute the CNC takes you to the top line of the history page You can store up to 150 lines on the MDI history page two lines stores above Use SHIFT F2 Clear MDI to clear the history page CAUTION You must know the location o
265. lected axis via a remote handwheel The resolution of the handwheel depends on the Jog Mode Refer to Figure 3 11 Single MESES ESE E Figure 3 11 Handwheel Operation To select a Jog Mode 1 Turn the rotary switch to select an axis 2 Selecta conventional Jog Mode 100 10 or 1 3 Press or to move in a negative or positive direction respectively To operate the handwheel 1 From the Manual screen press HandWheel F10 The soft key highlights and the other soft keys are blank 2 On the Manual Panel select the axis that will be moved using the remote handwheel Press ENTER The selected axis can now be moved using the remote handwheel 3 On the Manual Panel select a Jog Mode 100 10 1 at a speed proportional to the 100 10 and 1 setting 4 Move the handwheel clockwise to move the selected axis in a positive direction or counterclockwise to move the axis in a negative direction 3 22 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Section 4 Preparatory Functions G Codes G Codes initiate motion commands canned cycles and various machine and CNC functions More than one G Code may be specified per block If a block contains conflicting G Codes an Error message is displayed Table 4 1 lists non modal and modal G Codes Modal G Codes remain in effect until canceled by the appropriate code Non modal
266. lection G17 G18 G19 4 12 description 1 8 illustration 4 13 XY G17 5 75 plane illustration 1 8 PLC SHIFT F5 referenced 3 14 9 10 plunge circular pocket cycle G177 description 5 43 edit help 7 10 position the start hole 5 44 screen illustration 7 26 rectangular pocket cycle G1 78 description 5 44 edit help 7 10 position the start hole 5 45 screen illustration 7 26 pocket cycles description 5 13 7 10 face mill cycle description 5 32 with islands G162 subroutines example 5 27 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM polar coordinates description 1 6 illustration 5 10 pop up menus Create Program Name 10 7 description 2 7 Edit Funct F8 edit screen illustration 6 6 Move F7 edit screen illustration 6 5 Utils F9 description 10 9 Utils F9 illustration 10 8 parts counter F4 11 10 position display modes listed 11 6 display Z axis 9 12 locating illustration 1 5 positioningFeedrate FirstTouch description 5 77 positioningFeedrate Normally description 5 77 5 90 positions defining 1 5 positive radius value 7 6 positive value assumed 7 3 powering off 3 6 on 3 1 precautions general 9 28 PRINT variable description 17 12 probe cycles description 5 57 M9387 M Code probe select 17 26 move G31 5 57 17 26 referenced 4 17 orientation settings table 5 59 spindle canned cycle settings 5 76 diameterOfSpi
267. ll rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 37 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Section 5 Canned Cycles and Subprograms The following topics are described in this section Canned Cycles Drilling Tapping and Boring Canned Cycles G81 to G89 Pocket Cycles Engrave Cycle G190 Subprograms Probing Cycles OG ECOU ODDO Canned Cycles A canned cycle is a preset sequence of events initiated by a single block of data Canned cycles are part of the CNC software and cannot be altered They simplify the programming of complicated cycles One block of data can instruct the CNC to perform the necessary moves to drill a hole or mill a pocket A canned cycle consists of a G Code and variable words The variable words describe parameters such as peck distance retract height pocket depth and tool stepover Each canned cycle has its own set of variable words The variable words in a canned cycle allow you to customize the cycle to include the necessary dimensions feedrates etc Canned cycles greatly reduce program blocks Use them whenever applicable Canned cycles are usually entered into the part program from the Main Edit Help Menu Edit Help contains graphics and labeled entry fields to make programming canned cycles quick and easy Refer to Section 7 Edit Help for details All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 1 25 January 08
268. lling a series of holes Contours Pick an entity where the shape will begin Pick the last entity in the shape All entities that are connected will be chained together and change color to verify this Some shapes have to be selected one entity at atime This is determined by the way the part was drawn in the DXF file If an entity is selected that is not connected to the previous one a message is displayed SHIFT Select to start a new contour This message means you have selected an unchainable entity maybe by mistake You must press and hold SHIFT if the intent is to start a new contour When a chainable entry is selected a new shape number is displayed Entities in a shape can be un selected by clicking them again This un selects everything previously selected to that point To delete a shape click on the first entity The first entity is typically colored differently for this purpose Drilling When circle entities are selected they are assumed to be drilling hole locations As circles are selected a dotted line shows the rapid path between holes Selecting anything other than a circle ends the drilling shape and produces the message SHIFT Select to start a new contour If you wish to create a second drilling shape select the first hole of the next shape while holding the SHIFT key This tells the application that you want to start a new contour All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 16 3 25
269. llows the operator to make a change to the tool length or wear offsets If these values in the Tool Page are changed the new values will not be invoked until that tool is re activated in the part program HANDWHEEL F8 Enable or disables handwheel moves RETURN F10 Once any axis is moved the Restart Pos F1 highlights and Return F10 grays out Return F10 can only be used if no axis has changed position and after pressing Return F10 you simply press START to continue If any axis has been moved in the jog mode Restart Pos F1 highlights and when you are done you press Restart Pos F1 and a new set of soft keys are displayed Use these soft keys to return the axes moved in the order that you want Once all axes are returned the control automatically switches back 11 12 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Running Programs EXAMPLES The following are typical scenarios as to how and when to use the Jog Return function Assume the CNC is running the program in Auto or Single Step Modes SITUATION 1 X 3 2 8 OOOO AER VIBRA 00 CC TOOL BROKE HERE Y Z SITUATION1 Figure 11 5 Drilling Illustration Refer to Figure 11 5 The tool is drilling in an X row of holes in a workpiece The tool becomes dull and breaks All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 11 13 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s M
270. m above the work surface XStepOver Width of cut in the X axis direction When you do not enter a value the CNC defaults to 70 of the active tool radius Maximum step over permitted is 70 of the active tool radius YStepOver Width of cut in the Y axis direction When you do not enter a value the CNC defaults to 70 of the active tool radius Maximum stepover permitted is 70 of the active tool radius Fed F Feedrate used in cycle XStart X coordinate of the starting point Defaults to current position NOTE Type the required absolute XStart and YStart coordinates when possible YStart Y coordinate of the starting point Defaults to current position NOTE Type the required absolute XStart and YStart coordinates when possible NOTE Enter either an XStepover or YStepover Do not enter both NOTE The Program Editor will allow you to inadvertently write a block containing a stepover value greater than 70 of the active tool radius Test a program in the Draw Graphics Mode to reveal this type of error All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 33 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Circular Profile Cycle G171 5 34 Format G171 Xn Yn Hn Dn Zn An Rn Bn Sn In Jn Kn Pn The Circular Profile Cycle cleans up the inside or outside profile of an existing circle When executed the CNC rapids to Ramp 1 starting position rapids to H Sta
271. m resets CNC to N1 G42 Programming Example Refer to Figure 9 18 and Table 9 5 Milled Pocket Using G42 for an example of a milled pocket created using G42 5 D k 189 7MM gt 5 12 7 MM ALL AROUND Figure 9 18 A Milled Pocket Using G42 9 30 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Table 9 5 Milled Pocket Using G42 lo Standard Metric o O All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 31 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Refer to Table 9 6 for line by line details of Table 9 5 Milled Pocket Using G42 Table 9 6 Line by Line Description of Table 9 5 Milled Pocket Using G42 N code Function SS Establishes program and name Sets Absolute Inch Rapid cancels tool offset and raises Z axis Moves to tool part change position Activating Offsets via the Program In a program T1 by itself calls the Tool Page diameter and length offsets for the specified tool T1 with D R and L address words programs a temporary diameter radius and length offset independent of the Tool Page The entered D diameter or R radius and L tool length offsets remain active until you cancel the active tool Refer to Table 9 7 Table 9 7 Activating Offsets Using T1 T1 Format T1 Activates Tool 1 diameter offset listed in t
272. m in Auto Mode 1 Inthe Program Manager load the required program and return to the Manual screen 2 Press Auto F6 to activate Automatic Mode Press START The CNC begins to execute program blocks Program Position Display Area Distance to Go Position Display Area Machine Status Display Area 1 This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES Program Area T1 0 625 End Mill T2 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet gt Block Single SSS oo AUTO Screen Active Soft Key Highlighted Figure 11 2 Auto Screen The following topics are described a Holding or Canceling an Auto Run a Starting at a Specific Block Holding or Canceling an Auto Run Press HOLD to halt the program To restart a program on hold press START To cancel a program that is on hold press MANUAL F4 The CNC cancels any active tool compensation and canned cycles Modal settings such as Absolute Mode or Inch Mode remain active Starting at a Specific Block The following topic is described a Using Arrow Keys to Select a Starting Block All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 11 7 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Running Programs Using Arrow Keys to Select Starting Block 1 From the Program Manager select the required program and return to the Auto screen Press Block Search F3 and then press Scroll F9 Highlight the required s
273. making it necessary to slow it down to prevent the touch probe from being hit too hard This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original feedrate Optional This is the override for the slow feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original feedrate Optional This is the override for the RPM that was set in the machine setup parameter calibAndToolMeasurementRPM This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will only result in the software using the original RPM Optional All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 71 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms WARNING Large tools can result in probe damage if the touch feedrate is set too fast For this reason the cycle parameters M S and R have been added to enable the programmer operator to override the values in the machine setup parameters for the specific tool being checked or set You must e Load the tool in the spindle and call up that tools offset e Know the distance from the top of the probe stylus down you will have to move so that the largest part of the tool diameter is even with the si
274. mmer is responsible for all Z moves in Hole Mill G76 cycle Cutting direction is reversible in the pocketing cycles Always check that tool to corner radii do not conflict Z and P dimensions are absolute On all cycles with variable A tool stepover A must be less than the tool diameter In G78 and G178 A must be 70 or less of tool diameter Alarm messages will occur if the CNC detects program errors G41 and G42 are not permitted during pocket cycles Pocket cycles use built in cutter compensation Stock variable 1030 is not permitted and will be ignored WARNING When you cut one pocket inside another make sure to set P above the highest pocket At the end of each pocket the tool will rapid to P then rapid to the start position For plunge pockets G177 G178 drill a start hole prior to activating the pocket position the axes over the start hole prior to G177 or G178 The following topics are described Draft Angle Pocket Cycle G73 Frame Pocket G75 Hole Mill Cycle G76 Circular Pocket Cycle G77 Rectangular Pocket Cycle G78 Irregular Pocket Cycle G169 Islands G162 Irregular Pocket Examples Face Mill Cycle G170 Circular Profile Cycle G171 Rectangular Profile Cycle G172 Mill Cycle G175 EndMill Cycle G176 Thread Mill Cycle G181 Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle G177 Plunge Rectangular Cycle G178 DoUUOUDOUOUDUDOUDUOODUD OU DU All rights reserved Subject to change without
275. mpensated by the cycle Refer to Figure 7 8 Mill Cycle Screen Refer to Table 5 26 Table 5 26 G175 Address Words Address Label Word Description XStart X X coordinate of the center If no coordinate is provided default is set to the present position Uncompensated Required Y Start Y Y coordinate of the center If no coordinate is provided default is set to present position Uncompensated Required Absolute Z position to which the CNC rapids before feeding into the workpiece Required ZDepth z The absolute depth of the finished pocket Required DepthCut OB Z axis increment used for each pass ToolComp Tool Compensation Use 41 or 42 only All other numbers are no compensation 41 Compensation LEFT 42 Compensation RIGHT ZFed 1 Z axis feedrate plunging feedrate RoughFeed J XY axes roughing feedrate Defaults to last programmed feedrate All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 26 G175 Address Words Continued Address Label Word Description XY axes finish feedrate Defaults to last programmed feedrate Finish stock amount per side including bottom If you enter a negative value stock will be left but no finish pass will occur If not programmed no finish stock is left In G Code the mill cycle starts with G175 and ends with G176 as in the example below G70 G90 GO G17 M
276. n Length O M Length of pocket in X axis Required Width of pocket in Y axis Required ZDeth z Absolute depth of pocket Required StartHgt Z absolute starting height must be 0 1 inch or 2 mm above surface to be cut Executed in rapid Required XCenter X X coordinate of the center Default pocket centers at present position J YCenter Y Y coordinate of the center If no coordinate is provided default is set to present position DepthCut RampFeed RoughFeed Maximum Z depth per pass Example if you program Z to be 1 and B to be 5 the CNC will rough out the pocket in two levels B is programmed as a positive dimension Defaults to tool diameter depth less finish stock Ramp in feed The tool will ramp into the first depth of cut with an XYZ move from the centerline of the lower left radius toward the center of the pocket The feedrate for this move is programmed as I Defaults to last programmed feedrate After the ramp in move the tool will rough mill the pocket at feedrate J Defaults to last programmed feedrate OK Finish pass feedrate Defaults to last programmed feedrate Finish stock amount per side including bottom If entered as negative stock will be left but no finish pass will occur If not programmed no finish stock is left Maximum tool stepover must be 70 or less of tool diameter A dimension climb CCW A dimension conventional CW Defaults to half tool diameter Actual corner
277. n Z axis moves even many consecutive Z moves are permitted at any time after a compensation block Refer to Example 1 N10 contains compensation block properly accompanied by an XY move N11 contains a Z move Refer to Example 2 N10 contains the compensation block N11 and N12 contain two consecutive Z moves Example 1 Single Z move in a compensated program N10 GO G41 X0 Y 5 N11 G1 Z 125 F3 N12 Y3 625 F7 5 N13 X5 5 N14 etc Example 2 Two Z moves in a compensated program N10 GO G41 X0 Y 5 N11 Z 1 N12 G1 Z 125 F3 N13 Y3 625 F7 5 N14 X5 5 N15 etc 9 22 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Temporary Change of Tool Diameter To change the tool radius in order to leave stock for a finish pass program the stock variable The variable assigned for this function is 1030 Example N120 1030 015 When the CNC reads the above block 015 will be added to the active tool radius The value in the Tool Page for that tool will not be updated and tool compensation will be affected only until the tool is cancelled 1030 is temporary When the tool is cancelled T0 1030 is also cancelled Example N120 1030 015 In this case 015 will be subtracted from the active tool s radius You must program the variable after the tool is activated 1030 is ignored for pocket canned cycles The varia
278. n not defined Indirect Transfer You can indirectly transfer variables to a depth of four levels by introducing extra hatch marks before the variable number In an indirect transfer a value is transferred to one variable via another Example 1 N201 G90 G17 G71 GO N202 101 51 456 N203 102 101 N204 X 102 At Block N204 the X axis moves to 51 456 Example 1 shows single indirection The contents of variable 101 are used by variable 102 The actual content of variable 102 is constant 101 The indirection is activated at Block N204 by the addition of the symbol to variable 102 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 13 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Example 2 N210 G90 G17 G71 GO N211 101 1 N212 102 2 N213 103 3 N214 104 4 N215 119 100 N216 LOOP 4 N217 119 119 1 N218 120 119 N219 X H H 120 N220 END N221 M2 Example 2 contains two levels of indirection N219 and shows how the contents from multiple variables can be assigned to a command or expression At Block N215 variable 119 is set to constant 100 At Block N217 one is added to the contents of variable 119 At Block N218 variable 120 is set to constant 119 Block N219 moves the X axis to the position contained in variable 120 via two levels of indirection The first level is the content of variable 119 The second level is the conte
279. n the rear edge of the part Z zero is located at the top of the fixture insid mark All UnMark All Tree Figure 2 3 Pop Up Menu All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 UTILITIES POP UP 2 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 CNC Console and Software Basics Clearing Entries Press CLEAR to clear an entry in an entry field or a character from a program Operator Prompts The CNC sometimes prompts for required information Enter numbers from the keypad Cursor The CNC uses either a cursor or highlight to mark an item for selection or editing The highlight displays in the Edit Mode Program Manager and Manual Mode Use the ARROWS to move the highlight The software highlights a selected item in a menu or window Selected items can be activated or changed For instance highlight a program block in Edit Mode to edit it Highlight an entry field label in a graphic menu to enter a value or toggle between the available selections The cursor displays when the Tool Page activates The cursor is a white underline that indicates where letters and numbers will be inserted Overwrite and Inserting Text The Editor has two text entry modes Insert Off overwrite and Insert On Default Insert On In the Insert Off overwrite mode new characters replace characters marked by the cursor In the Insert On mode new characters appear at the cursor and existing characters move to t
280. ncing to the First or Last Block of a Program To advance to the first or last block of a program 1 In Edit Mode press Move F7 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 3 Move F7 Pop up Menu 2 Select End of Prog The cursor advances to the last block of the program Select Start of Prog The cursor returns to the first block of the program 6 10 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Editor Searching the Program Listing for Specific Text Use Edit Funct F8 pop up menu Find Replace feature to search blocks for specific text To find all references of text in a program 1 In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the program Find Replace searches forward and reverse in the program 2 Press Edit Funct F8 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 4 Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu 3 Select Find Replace and press enter to display the Find screen Refer to Figure 6 5 4 The message Find what displays on the screen Enter the text to be found and press Find next F2 or Find prev F1 The cursor advances to the first occurrence of the text in the program or regresses to the previous occurrence of the text in the program from the current cursor position Use Match Case F4 for a case sensitive search 5 To advance to the next occurrence of the text press Find next F2 again The CNC advances to the n
281. nd F8 The CNC display the Find Tool line below the Column Description Refer to Figure 9 3 Find F8 from Tool Page 2 Type a tool number in the Find Tool line that you want to locate and press ENTER The cursor moves to the selected tool number All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Changing Tool Page Values 1 Inthe Tool Page highlight the desired row Position the cursor on the desired column CAUTION Ensure that the CNC is in the same unit mode MM or Inch as the value you enter To verify the unit setting look at the G Code area of the Tool Page where either G70 Inch or G71 MM is displayed 2 Type the new value with all appropriate decimal values and press ENTER or press any ARROW The value will be entered The following topics are described a Clearing a Tool Whole Row a Clearing a Single Value a Adjusting a Single Value Clearing a Tool Whole Row To clear a row 1 Inthe Tool Page highlight the row to be cleared 2 Press Clear Line F7 All values in the row return to zero Clearing a Single Value To clear a single value 1 Inthe Tool Page highlight an entire row 2 Position the cursor on the value you wish to clear and press the CLEAR key on auxiliary keyboard press DELETE or ALT C The value changes to zero Adjusting a Single Value To adjust a
282. ndleProbeGauge description 5 77 nominalProbeStylusBallRadius description 5 77 positioningFeedrate_Firstl ouch description 5 77 positioningFeedrate_Normally description 5 77 5 90 spindleProbe Type description 5 77 spindle cycles description 5 57 5 75 G code designations 5 75 listed 5 78 Index 19 ANILAM tool calibAndToolMeasurementRPM description 5 59 5 65 diameterOfToolProbeGauge description 5 60 5 62 maxStrokeFromHome _FirstPick description 5 59 nominalProbeStylusDiameter description 5 58 orientation description 5 63 probeOrientation description 5 59 5 63 to calibrate description 5 62 toolProbeType description 5 58 XYRetractAmount description 5 59 ZFirstPickFeedRate_ Fast description 5 59 5 65 ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium description 5 59 5 65 ZFirstPickFeedRate_ Slow description 5 59 5 65 ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome description 5 60 5 66 ZRetractAmount description 5 59 5 68 tool cycles description 5 58 5 62 tool probe G code cycle designations 5 61 tool length offset description 5 60 probeOrientation description 5 59 5 63 program accumulated run time timer description 11 10 area labels 3 11 area manual screen area 3 10 block separators description 17 2 copy other directories 10 10 create new program 10 7 definition 1 3 delete groups 10 12 display mode description 11 6 editor activating 6 1 activating from Draw Graphics 6
283. ned cycle settings 5 76 reverse M04 See M4 7 19 12 2 M4 control M Codes 12 2 edit help 7 19 to use g86 boring unidirectional cycle 5 6 speed RPM 3 11 speed control description 12 1 speed SPEED control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 spindle functions 7 12 sync tapping canned cycle 5 5 SPINDLE FORWARD key illustration 3 8 OFF key illustration 3 8 OVERRIDE switch illustration 3 8 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index REVERSE key illustration 3 8 spindleProbe Type description 5 77 Start ALT S start up screen 14 1 START key illustration 3 8 Start of Block Move F7 feature 6 10 Start of Prog Move F7 feature 6 10 start of program feature 6 10 start screen illustration 3 1 start up counter 14 1 starting block select using arrow keys 11 4 11 8 using Block search 11 5 starting Draw 8 2 Static global variables description 17 9 stepover approach 5 32 direction 5 32 value 5 33 stock variable 1030 9 23 stop emergency 3 6 storing result of computation 17 14 straight line programming example 4 5 stroke limit G22 edit help 7 11 subdirectory creating description 10 12 subprogram addresses 5 49 call M98 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 description 5 48 end of M99 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 file inclusion description 17 31 loop rep
284. ng Previous Text Use Insert F3 to activate the Insert Mode In Insert Mode the CNC inserts typed text at the cursor without overwriting previously entered text To insert text into a program without overwriting previously entered text 1 In Edit Mode press Insert F3 Make sure the Insert soft key is highlighted 2 Place the cursor where you want to insert the text Enter the new text The new text is inserted to the left of the cursor The CNC does not delete previously typed text as you type All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 6 9 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Editor Inserting Text and Overwriting Previous Text To insert text into a program while overwriting previously entered text 1 In Edit Mode press Insert F3 so the soft key is no longer highlighted 2 Place the cursor where the text will be inserted Enter the new text The new text is inserted overwriting the character to the right of the cursor The CNC deletes previously typed text as you type Advancing to the Beginning or End of a Block To advance to the beginning or end of a program block 1 In Edit Mode place the cursor on the desired block of the program Press Move F7 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 3 Move F7 Pop up Menu 2 Select End of Block The cursor advances to the end of the block Select Start of Block The cursor returns to the beginning of the block Adva
285. ng blocks within a program or writing and reading blocks between programs The pop up menu contains word and line search features Saves the program closes the Edit screen and returns the CNC to the Program Manager SHIFT F1 Displays the last 10 messages both old already read and new not yet read SHIFT F3 Use to cancel edits made to a program block and restore the block to its original form See Undeleting a Block and Canceling Edits to a Program Block Redo SHIFT F4 Use to reverse canceled edits to a program block and restore the block to its original form See Restore Canceled Edits to a Program Block SHIFT F10 Returns the CNC to the Program Manager without saving edits made to the Program Listing The following topics are described a Move F7 Description from Edit Screen a Edit Funct F8 Description from Edit Screen 6 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Editor Move F7 Description from Edit Screen Press Move F7 to display the Move pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 3 and Table 6 2 16 O1 Subroutine for outside of pocket Start of Block 17 G41 to Indicate which side the cutter is or End of Block 18 G41 Goto Block 19 GOX5 Y5 20 G1 X13 Start of Prog End of Prog 080034 Delete Page Page Edit Figure 6 3 Move F7 Pop up Menu Table 6 2 Move F7
286. ng while running programs 11 8 viewing programs 8 1 Drawing Exchange Format See DXF converter Drawing Exchange Format See DXF drill 4 axis programming examples 15 3 bolt hole cycle G79 description 5 10 edit help 7 9 pattern cycle G179 description 5 11 edit help 7 9 screen illustration 7 25 drilling See also boring cycles description 7 9 off G80 5 3 off G80 edit help 7 9 soft keys listed 5 3 tapping boring canned cycles G81 G89 5 2 dry run all axes M105 basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM edit help 7 19 No Z axis M106 basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 Off cancel M105 and M106 M107 basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 dwell G04 See G4 7 11 G4 description 4 11 G4 edit help 7 11 machine status display 3 11 tapping canned cycle 5 5 DXF 16 6 defined 1 1 display double window size 16 6 fit window 16 6 window zoom 16 6 extension 16 1 screen illustration 16 2 DXF converter CNC code description 16 4 contours and drill holes 16 1 contours description 16 3 create conversational file 16 1 create G Code file 16 1 drilling description 16 3 edited conversational program listing 16 13 G Code program listing 16 16 entities not supported 16 7 supported table 16 7 examples 16 8 feature description
287. nnnnanonanennnnnnonos 9 15 Diameter Offset in TOPE dan 9 15 Tool Path Compensation G41G42 fastan a a 9 16 Using Tool Diameter Compensation and Length Offsets with Ball End Mills 9 21 Compensation G40 BAG iio aida 9 21 Cancel Mode in Tool Compensation G40 oocccoocccccncccccnocncconnconnnnncnnnnncnnnnoncnnonnnnnnonnnnonanenaninoss 9 22 Slant and Movement Z AIS sais A ada 9 22 Temporary Change of Tool Diameter c oocccoccccnnccocncccnconcncnnnconnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnncnnnnnnnoss 9 23 Motion of Tool During Tool COMPENSATION ocococcccccccccccncncccnccnnonncnonononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnenancnnnnnos 9 24 Compensation Around Acute Angles cccccccccecccececeecseeeceeeseueeeueeseeeseeessueesaeesaeeseeessueesaeesanes 9 27 General PIeCauUllons an lr a One TE EE 9 28 G41 Programmind Example sssososssnro litres 9 29 642 Programming Example laca cocos 9 30 Activating Offsets vithe PEO AM ad 9 32 Section 10 Program Management Program Screen Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys oocccoccccccccocncconococococncnnconacononnnnanonnnonnons 10 3 Activating the Programm SEA a ri 10 4 Changing the Program Manager Display occcocccocccoccccocncconicocococnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnaninnnnnos 10 5 Creating a New Part Programs sistessswoicntien st litio lados 10 7 Choosing Programi Names ida td AA iii 10 7 Selecting a Program Tor RUN Aisa ts 10 7 Selecting a Program T
288. notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Introduction Incremental Positioning Incremental positions are measured from one point to another or from the machines present position This is convenient for performing an operation at regular intervals Incremental positions are measured from the tool s present position Refer to Figure 1 5 NOTE An incremental 0 inch 0 mm move will not make a position change because you are located at the O reference point current position Fourth increment Third increment Second increment First increment Original Location a i INCREMEN Figure 1 5 Incremental Positioning Angle Measurement Angles are measured with the 3 o clock position as the Zero Degree Reference Positive angles rotate counter clockwise negative angles rotate clockwise Refer to Figure 1 6 Clock ioe Reference Positive N 10 Angle 11 1 a X 9 0 X A 6 Negative Angle Y ABSANGMEASUR Figure 1 6 Absolute Angle Measurement All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM Plane Selection CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Introduction Circular moves and tool diameter compensation are confined to the plane you select Three planes are available the XY plane G17 the XZ plane G18 and the YZ plane G19 It is important to view a plane correctly when you plan a circular move If a plane is viewed from the wrong side arc dire
289. nsecutive compensated moves Illustration 9 18 console illustration 2 1 continuous jog 3 12 jog Feed mode 3 18 jog Rapid mode 3 18 move execute 3 19 continuous path mode See also contouring mode contouring mode G64 description 4 24 edit help 7 11 control M Codes description 12 3 listed table 12 3 conventional jog 3 12 jog mode 3 18 conversion formula minutes to decimal 15 1 seconds to degrees 15 1 coolant Off MO9 See M9 7 19 M9 control M Codes 12 2 cooling cleaning amp lubrication 7 12 edit help 7 19 On M08 See M8 7 19 M8 control M Codes 12 2 cooling cleaning amp lubrication 7 12 edit help 7 19 ready LED 3 9 cooling cleaning and lubrication M function description 7 12 copy program blocks 6 15 program other directories 10 10 corner rounding chamfering G59 G60 4 21 CounterBore drill cycle G82 description 5 3 edit help 7 9 screen illustration 7 25 Index 4 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index create new programs 10 7 subdirectory description 10 12 Create F2 new program 10 7 Create Dir SHIFT F2 description 10 12 cursor tool page description 2 8 cutting direction 5 32 cutting mode See also contouring mode D dashboard description 8 7 Draw screen illustration 8 3 decimal points 7 3 defining positions 1 5 delete a character 6 7 a program 10 8 groups of programs 10 12 program block 6 8 text 2 8 Delete F2
290. nsions become referenced to the surface on which the tool length offset of Tool 1 was activated For machines that do not have a Z axis automatic homing feature you must set the ZO position of the Z axis Usually it is the fully retracted Up position of the quill or machine head Tool Length Offsets are referenced to this position Because tools differ in length ZO axis Part Zero is not set the same way as X0 or YO The tool length offset is the distance from the tip of the tool to the top of the part Enter a length offset for each tool in the Tool Page Z axis Machine Home TO ZO TOOL TOOL 2 TOOL 3 Tool at 1 Tool T va Length Length Offset 3 Offset 2 Part Zero o P ART TOOLENOFFSET Figure 9 5 Tool Length Offset With tool length offsets active the Z axis position display reads 0 00 when the active tool moves to Part Zero Tool length offsets simplify programming The following topics are described a Entering Offsets in the Tool Page a Setting Tool Length Offsets a Entering the Z Position Manually 9 12 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Entering Offsets in the Tool Page After you choose the type of tools and the order of their use in the program and you know the diameter and length offsets of tools type the data into the Tool Page 1 In Manual Mode press TOOL F9 to open the T
291. nt of variable 101 which is incremented in the loop at Block N217 to introduce the contents of variables 102 103 and 104 The X axis will move to X1 X2 X3 and X4 Storing Result of Computation 17 14 When a mathematical expression is programmed variables on the left side of an equation store the computed result N250 110 20 35 N260 120 18 2 At N250 110 contains the sum of the contents of 20 and 35 At N260 120 contains the result of the contents of 18 divided by 2 Parentheses establish an order of operations or denote special functions NOTE Multiplication operations MUST be in parentheses or the CNC treats the multiply command as a comment sign and disregards the rest of the line following the sign N300 140 11 115 2 N310 141 sin 45 N320 142 141 140 142 is shortest side All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features ANILAM Variable Programming Examples Example 1 This program uses common variables in the range of 50 to 149 The program mills a pocket with a three degree draft angle on the sidewalls The dimensions at the bottom of the pocket are 15 5730 X axis x 13 8850 Y axis The pocket is 1 0000 in deep The tool begins at the upper left corner of the pocket and at full depth Part Zero is set in the center of the pocket O 28 3 DEG DR
292. nter Default Present position Y coordinate of the center Default Present position DepthCut B Z axis increment used for each pass RoughFeed Roughteed 4 Rough pass feedrate RetractHgt Retract height fh ae Z axis feedrate K_ Finish pass feedrate Amount of stock left by the machine before the finish pass Default 0 Enter a negative value to leave the stock without making a finish pass EA for cutting on the inside of the profile In or the Out Selection required O In 1 Out If you enter a Depth Cut B DepthCut the CNC executes the number of passes required to get from the H StartHgt to Z ZDepth cutting to the Depth Cut B Z Max cut on each pass When you enter an S FinStock value the CNC leaves the specified stock on the profile and depth for a finish pass The CNC finishes to the entered diameter on the finish pass Enter a negative S FinStock to leave the finish stock without making a finish pass If you do not enter a J RoughFeed or K FinFeed value the CNC executes feed moves at the current feedrate J controls feedrate of the roughing cycle K controls the feedrate of the finishing cycle All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 35 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Rectangular Profile Cycle G172 Format G172 Mn Wn Hn Zn Rn An Xn Yn Un In Jn Kn Bn Sn Pn The Rectangular Profile Cyc
293. ntinued 5 40 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 28 G181 Address Words Continued Address Label Word Description TPlor Lead Threads per inch TPI or lead of thread in MM Required NOTE The minimum number of threads per inch is 1 XCenter Absolute X coordinate of the center of the thread If no coordinate is entered the CNC puts the center of thread at the current tool position YCenter Y Absolute Y coordinate of the center of the thread If no coordinate is entered the CNC puts the center of thread at the current tool position ArcinRad Size of radius arcing into start of thread NOTE lIfR is a positive value or not set and the thread is Inside the cycle will always return to the center between passes If R is a negative value the cutter will move to the start or end point that is closest to the center if inside thread and farthest away from center if outside thread If R is not specified at all and the thread is outside the cutter will back away from the largest diameter by an amount equal to the thread depth StockAmt sy _ Amount to leave for a finish pass after the roughing passes RoughFeed J Feedrate for roughing If not set blank the cycle will use the current active feedrate Feedrate for the finish pass If not set blank the cycle will use the current active feed
294. ntrol M Codes execute or alter certain CNC functions such as program end subprogram call mirror image etc These M Codes are part of the CNC software To use them write the appropriate M Code into the program Refer to Table 12 3 Table 12 3 Control M Codes M Code Function MO or MOO Program Stop Mode Program stops indefinitely Press START to resume M1 or M01 Optional Program Stop Optional program stops indefinitely Press START to resume M2 or M02 End of Program At M02 the program stops and returns to the first program block Spindle Orientation Followed by the C word for a spindle orient to a specific angle i e M19 C45 orients the spindle to 45 degrees Jump to New Program Return to other program M30 O75 programmed as the last block of a main program will return the CNC to program 75 O75 must be in the same file Call SubProgram A block in the main program with M98 P100 will execute subprogram 100 0100 must be in the file after the end of the main program End of SubProgram M99 ends a subprogram and returns to the main program at the block preceding the last executed program call Dry Run All Axes Program M105 in a program file or in MDI to set Dry Run Mode CNC executes all feed moves at a rate set by the builder It enables you to run programs through quickly to check for mistakes M107disables Dry Run NOTE Making and saving a change to the Setup Utility will cancel M105 Dry Run N
295. nuary 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help Table 7 5 Edit Help G Code Listing Continued Label and Description Engrave Cycle Use the engrave cycle to engrave part numbers legends or any alpha numeric inscription The usual type of cutter is a sharp point or center drill type tool FEED Feedrate Use to set the feedrate Entry Fields When a G Code is selected from the G Code Listing instructions and entry fields are listed on the screen Type values for the required parameters 7 18 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Edit Help M Code Listing You can program M Codes by selecting them from the list If the M Code requires a parameter the software displays the Help Graphic for the entered M Code Only M30 and M98 require parameters Fill in the entry fields for these M Codes Press Use F10 to insert the selected code in the block or Cancel F9 to cancel For other M Codes select the code and press Use F10 to insert the code in the block Press Cancel F9 to cancel Table 7 6 describes the M Codes in the menu Table 7 6 Edit Help M Code Listing mcos Funan O mo Spinat Orientation SS mao Jump toNew Program mes can Subprogram SS mes Endof SubProgram SS mos DyRun Ales S mos ay Ran No ZA SS SPEED Spindle Speed All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 7 19 25 January 08 ANIL
296. o Z Axis M106 in a program file or in MDI sets Dry Run No Z Mode All feed moves are executed at a rate set by the builder and all Z moves are ignored during the dry run This enables you to run through a program quickly without Z axis movement M107 disables Dry Run No Z Axis NOTE Making and saving a change to the Setup Utility will cancel M106 M107 Dry Run Off Cancel M105 and M106 This returns the CNC to normal operating mode SPEED Spindle Speed Commands spindle speeds S All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 12 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 M Functions Order of Execution The order of execution for available codes is as follows T M S F G and XYZ M98 P sub call is the exception NOTE Subprogram call M98 Pn will always execute last 12 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Machine Software and Peripherals Installation Section 13 Machine Software and Peripherals Installation The following topics are described in this section a Keyboard Installation Option a Keypad Equivalent Keyboard Keys a Peripherals Supported Keyboard Installation Option The machine builder determines whether the system will support a keyboard option If the system supports a keyboard plug the keyboard USB connector into the computer chassis WARNING There is no keyboard equivalent
297. o the right of XO so that the tool enters the work smoothly Table 15 3 Four Axis Example 3 4 AX THD SET shortestDistance TO on G90 G70 GO M5 G28 Z0 G53 O1 GO X0 YO U0 11 SPECIAL THD TOOL 3500 M3 GO X 125 YO U0 ZN G1 Z 075 F20 SET shortestDistance TO on THIS IS TO PREVENT THE NEED TO UNWIND U U AXIS MOVE IS 360 X 8 PITCH X 6 LONG 360 FOR 1 TURN X 125 LEAD IN U MOVE WILL BE 17 640 00 DEGREES OR 49 TURNS G91 G1 X 6 125 U 360 8 6 360 G90 G0 M5 G28 Z0 X0 YO U0 M2 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 15 5 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature Section 16 DXF Converter Feature The DXF Converter feature allows information in a Drawing Exchange Format DXF extension to be used to create a CNC conversational M extension or G Code G extension file Contours and drill hole locations in the DXF file can be put in the CNC file in the form of subroutines using a mouse and point and click approach The DXF Converter feature creates a CNC program that must be edited to be usable but most of the program creation is already done The following topics are described in this section Requirements Entry to the DXF Converter CNC Code Mouse Operations DXF Soft Keys DXF Entities Supported Files Created DXF Examples O COCO OC UO D Requirements The following topics are described a Off line Software a Machine
298. obeType Standard or Laser Standard is the default e Set nominalProbeStylusDiameter the overall nominal probe stylus diameter For example 12mm for the Renishaw probe or for the Heidenhain probe use 40mm On a laser style probe this value would normally be zero This is dependent on the probe style and specifications refer to your probe documentation ol Renishaw is a registered trademark of Renishaw plc 5 58 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms e Set maxStrokeFromHome FirstPick represents the distance from machine Z home with the shortest tool or the spindle face to just below the probe stylus top as the maximum stroke for the initial probe pick e Set calibAndToolMeasurementRPM the spindle RPM for tool touch For example set to 800 for standard probe type or 4000 for laser probe type tool presetter e Set probeOrientation the proper probe orientation For example if set to 1 the probe should be installed on the right side of the table pointing toward the left in the X direction See Table 5 38 Table 5 38 Probe Orientation Settings Probe Orientation Probe is pointing to the right as you are facing the machine in X direction Probe is pointing to the left of the machine in the X direction Probe is pointing away from you toward the back of the machine in the Y direction Probe is point
299. ode The following topics are described a Changing the Jog Mode a Selecting an Axis a Jogging the Machine Incremental Mode a Jogging the Machine Continuous Mode Changing the Jog Mode NOTE Jog move modes with the exception of Jog Rapid Mode are performed in Feed Mode To change the Jog Mode 1 In Manual Mode turn the JOG switch to select a jog feed rate Selecting an Axis To select an axis in the Manual Mode 1 Use the AXIS SELECT rotary switch to cycle through the available axes Turn the switch until the indicator points to the required axis 3 18 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Jogging the Machine Incremental Moves In Manual Mode position the machine with jog increments To make a jog increment move 1 2 Use AXIS SELECT to select an axis Use JOG to cycle through the move mode choices and choose a Jog Mode Press JOG or JOG to choose a direction Do not hold down the key Each time the key is pressed the machine jogs along the selected axis by the selected increment Jogging the Machine Continuous Moves From the Manual screen move the machine at feedrate or at the Jog Rapid Rate The machine builder determines the effective jog and feed rates at setup 1 In Manual Mode with the Manual screen active use the AXIS SELECT to select an axis Use JOG to se
300. of the CNC s mode The following topics are described Cursor 0D O 0D ODO Pop Up Menus Pop Up Menus Clearing Entries Operator Prompts Overwrite and Inserting Text Deleting Text Pop up menus are temporary menus that allow you to make additional selections Each pop up menu contains a highlight bar The ARROWS move the highlight bar up and down the menu Press ENTER to activate a highlighted selection Press the soft key that activated the pop up menu again to deactivate the function Refer to Figure 2 3 100ml g 341A G 6KIFANI G 8 BUTISL DXF T DXF DAVE DXF 6 EngineCase02 dxf 6 EngineCase03 dxf For _David_Harrel G169_Example i g MERC OD G MERC3 G E polyLines dxf T sample dxf Sample g 8 SpdlTest dxf E zIRPock dxf NC and DXF g m q This program produces part 2013 341 Rev A APPROXIMATE RUNTIME 30 MINUTES 0 625 End Mill 0 750 End Mill out 4 2 from collet 0 250 x 90 Degree Extended Spot Drill 0 125 Extended Drill 6 32 Extended Roll Tap 0 406 End Mill 0 807 Dril 0 250 End Mill 0 169 Dril T 10 0 209 Dril T 11 0 500 Dril T 12 0 120 Drill Tools are set on the top of the right hand fixture Left side of fixture x amp Y zero locations are at the rear left side of the part Z zero location will be at the finished machine Copy Right side of fixture Move X zero is located on the right side of the part Y zero is located o
301. ogram name 3 11 local variables description 17 9 Log Files F3 referenced 3 15 Log to SHIFT F4 program screen 10 4 logical symbols listed 17 30 logical terms description 17 30 loop counter 3 11 function 5 54 machine status display 3 11 programming Illustration 5 54 LOOP END description 17 29 M extension created using DXF converter 16 1 16 8 MO program stop mode basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 MOO See MO 7 19 MO1 See M1 7 19 MO2 See M2 7 19 MO3 See M3 7 19 M04 See M4 7 19 MO5 See M5 7 19 MO6 See M6 7 19 M08 See M8 7 19 MO9 See M9 7 19 M1 optional program stop basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 M105 dry run all axes basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 Index 15 ANILAM M106 dry run No Z axis basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 M107 dry run Off cancel M105 and M106 basic M functions 7 12 edit help 7 19 dry run Off cancel M105 and M106 control M Codes 12 3 M19 spindle orientation control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 spindle functions 7 12 to use G86 boring unidirectional cycle 5 6 M2 end of program basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 M3 spindle forward control M Codes 12 2 edit help 7 19 spindle functions 7 12 to use G86 boring unidirectional cycle 5 6 M30 jump to new program basic M functions 7 12 control
302. ogram block to be deleted 2 Press Delete Block F4 The CNC deletes the block To delete program blocks using the Edit Funct F8 pop up menu Cut feature 1 In Edit Mode mark the blocks to be deleted 2 Press Edit Funct F8 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 4 Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu 3 Select Mark BIk ON and the cursor will highlight Then use the ARROW keys to move up or down to the number of the lines you want to mark for delete 4 Select Delete F2 and the CNC deletes the marked blocks Inserting a Program Block 6 8 Insert a program block at the cursor by using either method e Edit Funct F8 pop up menu Insert Block feature e Edit soft key Insert F3 feature Using either method all subsequent lines will be moved down one line in the program To insert a program block using the Edit Funct F8 pop up menu Insert Block feature 1 In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the line where you want the program block to appear 2 Select Insert Block press ENTER and a blank line is inserted at the cursor You can type a new program block on the line To insert a program block using the Edit soft key Insert F3 feature 1 In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the line where you want the program block to appear 2 Press Insert F3 to highlight it then press ENTER and a blank line is inserted at the cursor You can type a new program block on the line All rights
303. ointer position at the top center Y axis vertical scale X axis horizontal scale DXF message line and several soft keys along the bottom edge Refer to able 16 2 Soft Key Description Message Line gt DXF SCRN The following topics are described a Creating Shapes a Contours a Drilling All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature Creating Shapes The part drawing is used to create shapes Shapes are then output to CNC programs as subroutines Converting to DXF edit creates the subroutines to change the G Code file You change the features subroutines attached to the G Code file There are many features to make the drawing screen easier to use Layers may be turned on or off Any area of the screen can be zoomed in or out Refer to Table 16 1 Mouse Operations Each shape is given a sequential number The number is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the shape Press Select F1 to toggle Select mode on With Select mode on entities can be selected to be part of a shape Left click with the mouse to make selections When an entity is selected it will change color When selecting entities direction is determined by where the mouse pointer is positioned If nearer the left side of a line direction will be left to right There are two types of shapes e One used for contouring or feed motion e One for dri
304. olute Zero to a preset location The preset location is the specified fixture offset measured from Machine Home and stored in the Fixture Offsets Table Modal Radius Chamfer Use to program modal corner rounding or chamfering Cancel Modal Radius or Chamfer Use to cancel the program modal corner rounding or chamfering Exact Stop Mode Contouring Mode OFF Modal Exact Stop Check Activates In Position Mode Macro Call Single Non Modal Used in a program to call a stored macro Macros can be entered after the main program subprogram or in another file must use file inclusion to call to active program In non modal macro G67 call the variables can be changed at each call Macro Call Modal Used in a program to call a macro Macros can be entered after the main program Subprogram or in another file must use file inclusion to call to active program In Modal macro G66 call the variables will always contain the same values Cancel Modal Macro Cancels a G66 Modal Macro call Rotation Axis Axis rotation is modal and remains active until canceled Inch Sets CNC to Inch measurements See also Table 7 4 Most Common Modal G Codes Contouring Mode Exact Stop Mode OFF Modal Contouring Mode De activates In Position Mode Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 7 15 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help Table 7 5 Edit Help G Code Listing C
305. om the optical module sending unit and to automatically time out after approximately 120 seconds Rotation mirroring and scaling is not allowed while running these cycles Plane will be set to XY G17 when these cycles are complete This section contains the following topics a Spindle Probe G Code Cycle Designations a Canned Cycle Parameter Settings a Description of Spindle Probe Cycles Spindle Probe G Code Cycle Designations The following summarizes the cycles available G140 Spindle Probe Calibration Cycle This is used to set the effective probe stylus diameter and set the compensation factor for any run out of the probe stylus You will also need to calibrate the probe using the G140 cycle NOTE On machines that do not have spindle orientation or if you are using a corded probe or cordless UD probe and cannot orient the spindle 180 degrees during calibration the spindle probe stylus needs to be indicated true to the spindle centerline In this case the accuracy of the spindle probe is only as good as the stylus concentricity to the spindle Calibration must be done at least once before using the spindle probe Once calibrated calibration does not have to be done again unless you replace the probe stylus G141 Single Surface Measure Edge Find This cycle will find a single surface and store that surface in a work or fixture offset register if programmed G142 Outside Part Corner Find This cycle will find the X amp Y s
306. omHome description 5 60 5 66 ZRetractAmount description 5 59 5 68 Index 27 ANILAM U S A ANILAM One Precision Way Jamestown NY 14701 716 661 1899 FAX 716 661 1884 Bb anilaminc anilam com ANILAM CA 16312 Garfield Ave Unit B Paramount CA 90723 562 408 3334 FAX 562 634 5459 anilamla anilam com Dial 011 before each number when calling from the U S A Germany ANILAM GmbH Fraunhoferstrasse 1 D 83301 Traunreut Germany 49 8669 856110 FAX 49 8669 850930 bX info anilam de Italy ANILAM Elettronica s r l 10043 Orbassano Strada Borgaretto 38 Torino Italy 39 011 900 2606 FAX 39 011 900 2466 BD info anilam it Taiwan ANILAM TW No 246 Chau Fu Road Taichung City 407 Taiwan R O C 886 4 225 87222 FAX 886 4 225 87260 BD anilamtw anilam com United Kingdom ACI UK Limited 16 Plover Close Interchange Park Newport Pagnell Buckinghamshire MK16 9PS England 44 0 1908 514 500 FAX 44 0 1908 610 111 bh sales aciuk co uk China Acu Rite Companies Inc Shanghai Representative Office Room 1986 Tower B City Center of Shanghai No 100 Zunyi Lu Road Chang Ning District 200051 Shanghai P R C 86 21 62370398 FAX 86 21 62372320 BJ china anilam com January 2008 Ve 02 627785 21 1 2008 VPS Printed in USA Subject to change without notice www an
307. on The off line software will have a desktop icon or program group entry as shown in Figure 14 1 Select either 60001 Off Line option desktop icon or program group entry to start the software All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC Programming and Operations Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Four Axis Programming Section 15 Four Axis Programming Axis Types 6000i 4X The following topics are described in this section o Axis Types a Rotary Axis Programming Conventions a Programming Examples The machine builder sets up the fourth axis as linear or rotary axes The three basic axes are X Y and Z The additional axis is designated as U 6000i 4X This section will discuss the rotary axis option in detail Below are the programming formats for linear or rotary additional axes Linear Program as Feed Mode G1 or Rapid G0 moves Only rapid and linear feed moves can be programmed U can be programmed along with X Y and Z axis in rapid linear and circular moves The U axis is always synchronous to the XYZ moves Rotary Program rotary moves in degrees The typical resolution is 0 001 degrees Minutes and seconds cannot be programmed Therefore you must convert minutes and seconds to a decimal value Conversion formula for minutes seconds to decimal degrees Minutes to decimal min 60 decimal degrees Example 15 min 60 0 25 degrees Seconds to decimal sec 3600 decimal de
308. ontinued Label and Description G71 MM Sets CNC to MM measurements See also Table 7 4 Most Common Modal G Codes G72 Scaling Use Axis Scaling to enlarge or reduce patterns commanded by the program G73 Draft Angle Pocket Cycle Use the draft angle pocket cycle G73 to machine a draft angle on a pocket G75 Frame Pocket Cycle Frame pocket cycle G75 will mill a frame or trough around an island of material G76 Hole Mill Cycle Use the hole mill cycle G76 to machine through holes or counter bores G77 Circular Pocket Cycle Use the circular pocket cycle G77 to mill round pockets G78 Rectangular Pocket Cycle Use the rectangular pocket cycle G78 to mill square or rectangular pockets G79 Drill Bolt Hole Cycle Use the automatic drill bolt hole cycle G79 to drill a partial or full bolt circle Drilling Off Use G80 to cancel drill tap and bore canned cycles G81 to G89 Basic Drill Cycle G81 is a basic drilling cycle generally used for center drilling or hole drilling that does not require a pecking motion CounterBore Drill Cycle G82 is the counterbore drill cycle generally used for counterboring Peck Drill Cycle G83 is the peck drilling cycle generally used for peck drilling relatively shallow holes Tapping Cycle G84 is the tapping canned cycle used for tapping holes Boring Bidirectional Cycle G85 is a boring cycle generally used to make a pass in each direction on a bore or to tap wit
309. ool Page 2 Inthe Tool Page you must highlight a line before you can edit it Typically you type diameter offsets in the Tool Page directly after measuring the tool with a micrometer To measure length offset 1 In Manual Mode put the tool in the spindle and carefully jog the tool down until it touches surface top of the work 2 Inthe Tool Page highlight that tool s tool number and press Teach F9 This will take the dimension from Z Machine Home position and input it into the Length Offset column for that tool 3 Exit the Tool Page raise the Z axis and continue Jog the tool s as described above write down each offset s and type it into the Tool Page In case of errors to identify and correct 1 Ifthe value entered in out of range the field changes to a different color and you cannot exit the field 2 Correct the value entered A correct value within the range is the same color as the other fields and you can exit the field All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 13 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Setting Tool Length Offsets Before you run a job in production perform the following steps 1 Review the part drawing 2 Make a machining plan Include fixturing tooling and machine sequence 3 Write the program on a program sheet 4 Input the program 5 Set the tool offsets The following sequence describes tool offse
310. ooocccocccocnccocccocnccononanococonnnnonacnnnnnonononancnnnnnnanonons 16 13 Edited G Code Program LiStiNg ocococccocnoccnccoccconnoconoconoconononnonorononnnnanonannonnnnnanonarnnnaninans 16 15 Section 17 Advanced Programming Features MOI Si da 17 1 BIOGK SED Al ALOIS taaan 17 2 TOO Offset Modifica Osio ii A A d 17 2 Expressions ANG FUNCIONS ics cauisdsececatel cand E E a genes ebaumiaabdeun R 17 5 O II II N 17 6 System VahlableS tra a e eE E 17 8 Usor Variable S dio dica toas 17 9 Variable Programming Parametric PrograMmMing cccecccsecceececeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeueeseeeseeeseneeaes 17 10 User Macros G09 G60 GOT Li iS A D 17 17 Macro Body SUCU G iiie a a e aan 17 18 Setting and Passing Parameters ccccc cece secs eeeceeeeeececeeeceeeesaeeseeseueesaeeseeeseuseseeseeeseeeesaeess 17 18 Probe MOVE GS aid 17 26 Conditional Statements c 17 27 Unconditional LOOP Repeat iic asschecsacdssssnsnadmavedenign adi diia 17 29 Short Form Addressing miii ada a 17 29 Logical and Comparative Terms ooccoccccncnncccccncncncnononoconononnnnnnonononnnnonnnonnnnnanonannnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnninanes 17 30 ESA CAS a creas 17 30 Comparative Te Scirocco iaa 17 30 FS WACIUS ON miassiaienme cslucana r 17 31 O A a EEN Cet ee oe A eee ne en Index 1 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice xi 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Introduction Section 1 Introduction This manual desc
311. or Edilicia A A AA 10 7 Deleting a Program inercia ia E aaith 10 8 Utils Function POP UP MENUS saranno n a a A R AAE 10 8 Copying Programs from to Other Directories oocccocccocncoccccocnconnocononocnnncnonnnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 10 10 Moving Programs from to Other Directories occoocccoccccccnconnconnncnnncnononnnnonnnonnnnnanonononnnnnonnnnons 10 10 Renaming Program Seinai aae llorando 10 11 Marking and Unmarking Programs cccccceecceceseceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeesaeeseesseeeaeeseeeseeeaeess 10 1 1 Marking Program Sasi id ida E tases 10 11 Wnmarking Marked ProgfaMs iison di a ds 10 11 Marking Po scnaatsadseiacaideaaheninchsaleddahieemneumeaneed 10 12 Unmarking All Marked PrOgraMS cacon codi 10 12 Deleting Groups Of Programs mera ias 10 12 Creating SUDdIrECtOrES riensi a a dates tbat ontacn E diate b eras 10 12 Section 11 Running Programs Running a Program One Step ata Time cooocccccccccncccnccncnnccnononcnncnnnnnonononnnnnncnonanonnnnnannnnaninaninnonns 11 2 Using Single Step Mode iii aia di raid 11 4 Holding or Canceling a Single Step RUN coocccocccccnccocncccnncocncnocononncnononononnnnonnnonanonnnnnnnnonaninnnnnns 11 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice IX 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Contents Single Step Execution of Selected Program BloOCkS coocccoonccocncocncoccconcncocnonononncncnnncnncnnns 11 4 POSINON DISHA
312. ou must also have a D cycle parameter or the control will display an error message Continued This is the rough diameter of the tool This should be within 0 04 1 0 mm Optional If the D cycle parameter is present the tool will step over half of its diameter the spindle will turn on in reverse and then the canned cycle will measure the tool s length A negative D value is for a left handed tool and will cause the spindle to come on forward instead of reverse For on center length measurement do not give a D cycle parameter 5 64 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 40 G151 Address Words Continued Address Word Description The distance to go down along the side of the probe stylus when doing a diameter pick The maximum E value is 0 55 13 97 mm or the tool may crash into the probe or table If you enter a value larger than 0 55 13 97 mm the control will issue an error message If E is not set the cycle will use a default value of 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Default 0 1 Ball nose cutters and special cutters that require a move down more than 0 55 13 97 mm are not supported This is the override for the fast Z feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast Sometimes there may be a tool that has a large diameter making it necessary to slow
313. out notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Tapping Cycle G84 Format G84 Zn Rn Vn Sn Pn Dn NOTE The machine must be equipped with spindle M functions FWD REV OFF to use this cycle Do not use G84 if the machine does not have spindle commands available G84 is the tapping canned cycle used for tapping holes During a G84 cycle the tool feeds from the R plane to Z depth the spindle stops and reverses the tool feeds to the retract plane and the spindle stops and reverses again Refer to Table 5 4 F TPlorLead Enter Threads per Inch when in Inch mode Enter Lead when in MM G71 mode Lead is the distance from one thread to the next You must program a spindle RPM The Feedrate is calculated based on the spindle RPM and the TPI or Lead specified S Spindle sync To enable Spindle sync enter a value of 1 The machine must have direct spindle control to use this feature The spindle rotation and Z axis movement will be synched together as in a threading cycle D Dwell A dwell time value in seconds can be entered You may require this feature because of the time required to stop and reverse the spindle NOTE If S 0 the programmed Dwell D will be active when the spindle reverses at the bottom and top of each hole If S 1 the programmed Dwell D will be at the top of each hole Table 5 4 G84 Address Words Address Label Word Description ZD
314. oves 8 1 install keyboard 13 1 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index introduction 1 1 IPM defined 4 37 irregular pocket cycle G169 description 5 24 edit help 7 10 islands G162 description 5 26 edit help 7 10 J jog 1 mode 3 18 10 mode 3 18 100 mode 3 18 continuous 3 12 continuous move execute 3 19 conventional 3 12 incremental move execute 3 19 mode changing 3 18 handwheel to select 3 22 modes listed table 3 18 moves description 3 18 JOG key illustration 3 9 Jog F2 initiate jog return 11 11 JOG key illustration 3 9 jog and return See jog return JOG key illustration 3 8 jog return description 11 11 examples 11 13 soft keys listed 11 12 jump to new program M30 basic M functions 7 12 control M Codes 12 3 edit help 7 19 K keyboard description 2 6 equivalent keypad keys table 13 1 external 2 6 to install 13 1 keypad equivalent keyboard keys table 13 1 Illustration 2 2 L LCD defined 2 1 LED coolant ready 3 9 LEDs manual panel listed 3 9 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM left hand tool compensation illustration 9 16 length offsets ball end mill using 9 21 to measure 9 13 length machine status display 3 11 LESS THAN operator description 17 31 limit switch 3 6 liquid crystal display See LCD loaded pr
315. owing types of moves e Jog Conventional e Jog Continuous e Manual Data Input MDI e Handwheel optional The following topics are described PLC OLM OSC and SIK Descriptions Shut Down SHIFT F1 Messages Msgs SHIFT F1 Activating Manual Mode Rapid or Feed Adjusting Rapid Move Speed Adjusting Feedrate Absolute Mode DoOoOvoOUO O 3 12 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Table 3 3 describes the active soft keys in Manual Mode Table 3 3 Manual Screen Soft Keys Soft Key Function Program F2 Lists the user programs Activates the Edit Mode A program must first be selected Activates Manual Mode from Auto and S Step Single Step O B5 o Changes to Single Step Mode Changes to Auto Mode Use to run part programs for production Deletes a character from the command Insert On Toggle between Insert On and Insert Off Insert Off overwrite For Insert On the typed text replaces the existing text For Insert Off overwrite the typed text overwrites the existing text Tool Displays the Tool Page The Tool Page mo f PO stores tool diameter length offsets and wear factors Hand Activates or deactivates Handwheel we Mode Use to jog any controlled axis in Manual Mode Press SHIFT while in the Manual screen to activate the secondary soft key functions refer to Figure 3 3 Sh
316. p parameter then will back up and retouch the probe at the feedrate that is in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow 3 The tool length register for that tool is now updated and that tool s length wear register is set to zero 4 Then the Z axis will rapid up to home position 5 If you have done a single tool in Manual that tool is now measured and you are ready to measure the next tool If you have placed multiple lines in a program one for each tool the machine will then grab the next tool and repeat steps 1 through 4 until all the tools have been measured All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Format G151 T tool D tool rough diameter With T and D cycle parameters only set 1 The machine will rapid the Z axis up and pick up the tool designated in the T cycle parameter and rapid directly over the center of the probe stylus The Z axis will rapid down the distance placed in the ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome machine setup parameter then start feeding down toward the probe for the initial touch at the feedrate that was placed in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast machine setup parameter then will back up The machine will rapid over half the diameter of the cutter from the probe stylus center in the direction related to the probeOrientation machine setup parameter The spindle will then come on in reverse at the RPM spec
317. position Z Max Cut Maximum Z depth per pass For example if Z 1 and B 0 5 the pocket will be roughed out in two levels B is positive Defaults to tool diameter depth less finish stock Z Feed Rate Z feedrate for plunge move The tool will feed to the first depth of cut with a plunge move Defaults to last programmed feedrate RoughFeed J Feedrate of rough cycle used to mill out the pocket Defaults to last programmed feedrate FinishFeed K Finish pass feedrate Defaults to last programmed feedrate Finish stock amount per side including bottom Positive leave stock and execute finish pass Negative leave stock without executing a finish pass If no value is given no finish stock is left Retract Height Z axis absolute retract height must be equal to or above H Executed in rapid Defaults to H Z Start Height value Stepover Maximum tool stepover must be less than tool diameter Defaults to tool radius If not set uses 0 5 diameter of the active tool All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 43 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms You must position the start hole at the center of the pocket prior to G177 and drill to a sufficient depth The required position of the start hole is as follows 1 For inward to outward cutting A Stepover at the hole center 2 For outward to inward cutting A start hole must be at the 3 o clo
318. pressions follow the standard mathematics order of operations multiplication division addition and subtraction An expression must contain an operator or use a function Refer to Table 17 2 Table 17 2 Operators and Functions Ref Expression Function a JO Expression function parenthesis by 8 Multiplication division modification a gt lt Relation greater than lessthan e Relation equal notequal log S t u v w Logarithm Exponential I Unary logical not positive negative indirection The following topic is described a Examples All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 5 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Examples Ref from Previous Table G01 X 100 101 All calculations must be enclosed in parentheses This defines an expression b G00 Y amp A 102 103 So OOP 5 2 01 Example of multiplication division and modification C G01 X 3 2 ME 100 122 105 Addition and Subtraction IF 101 gt 0 THEN Greater than gt less than lt IF 144 143 GOTO Equal to not equal to f TOMM n convert n to mm If n s type is inch TOMM n n 25 4 TOIN n convert n to inch If n s type is mm TOIN n 25 4 TODE n convert to current IN or MM mode TONU n force the type of n to the modal inch or mm j ROUND n will round the valu
319. programs Program repetitive sequences or patterns in a subprogram Enter subprograms in the program after the end of the main program Call subprograms from the main program Refer to Table 5 32 Table 5 32 Subprogram Addresses M98 Pn Jump to subprogram M9 Return to main program Oxxxx Subprogram label Up to 4 digits Poo Subprogram number to jump to A subprogram can use any code or move type For example to cut a contour twice one rough pass and one finish pass program it as a subprogram You can call the subprogram from the main program as many times as required but you enter the parameters only once Subprogram s must be stored in the same file as the main program that calls them The following topics are described Subprogram Addresses Repetition of Subprogram Loop Calling a Subprogram from a Subprogram End of Subprogram M99 with a P Code Subprogram for Multiple Parts Programming Loop Function DOOUOUODO OU 5 48 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Subprogram Addresses Examples M98 P2000 commands a jump to subprogram O2000 Following the program number blocks in a subprogram are numbered as in normal programming as in the following example N2000 02000 SUBPROGRAM 2000 N2001 blocks in program N2002 N2003 etc You can store subprograms anywhere in the program after the ma
320. r s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Special Tools G153 Format G153 Tn Dn En Mn Sn Rn This cycle is used to measure the diameter of irregularly shaped tools or tools with a hole in the center of the bottom Refer to Table 5 42 Table 5 42 G153 Address Words Address Word Description Tool number Required The T cycle parameter must be the same as the current tool in the spindle This is the rough diameter of the tool Required The diameter specified in this cycle parameter should be larger then the actual diameter of the tool being measured but no more then 0 04 1 0 mm over If you have a left handed tool you would give a negative value to the diameter so the spindle will turn on in the forward direction The distance to go down along the side of the probe stylus when doing a diameter pick The maximum E value is 0 55 13 97 mm or the tool may crash into the probe or table If you enter a value larger than 0 55 13 97 mm the control will issue an error message If E is not set the cycle will use a default value of 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Default 0 1 Ball nose cutters and special cutters that require a move down more than 0 55 13 97 mm are not supported This is the override for the medium feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate Medium Sometimes there may be a tool that has a large diameter
321. r K FinFeed the CNC executes feed moves at the current feedrate J RoughFeed controls the feedrate of the roughing cycle K FinFeed controls the feedrate of the finishing cycle All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 37 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Mill Cycle G175 5 38 Format G175 Xn Yn Hn Zn Bn Dn In Jn Kn Sn The Mill Cycle G175 is intended for contour milling operations Cutter compensation Z pecking Z finish stock RoughFeed and FinishFeed are supported The cycle will rapid to the XY start point compensated if ToolComp D parameter is used rapid to the start height and then feed to the ZDepth Z or DepthCut B using the ZFeed 1 Subsequent milling blocks are then executed using the ToolComp D parameter and Feed specified The feedrate can be changed in the blocks that are being milled Cutter Compensation cannot be changed from within the cycle The cycle is terminated with the EndMill G176 block at which point it rapids up to the StartHgt H and returns to the un comped XStart X YStart Y location Activate a tool prior to G175 so the CNC knows the tool diameter If the D parameter is used for cutter compensation the lines of code in the mill cycle must start with an uncompensated ramp on move and end with an uncompensated ramp off move as the first and last lines in the mill cycle will not be automatically co
322. r a description of the Draw screen soft keys 3 Draw runs the highlighted program and the machine remains idle gt N a j one gt 7 me PF itt View Adjust Single DRAW1 Figure 8 1 Draw Screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Viewing Programs with Draw Table 8 1 Draw Screen Soft Keys Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function Run the program and start Draw Simulation Mode Edit F2 Edittheprogram Stop F3 Stoptheprogram View Type Open the type view screen See Figure 8 3 View Type Screen Rotate Open the rotate screen See Figure 8 4 Rotate Screen Adjust Bik Form Changes the work piece size to simulate a cut away feature See Figure 8 5 Adjust Block Form Screen Cursor Change a cross section in 3 View Type only Display Program Displays program and dashboard screen See Figure 8 2 Single Step Execute the program one block at a time Return to Program screen Press Display Program F8 to open the Display Program and dashboard screen Refer to Figure 8 2 59_Example 1 g 1 G90 G17 G71 G40 4 2 G120 X32 Y22 Z 6 I 3 G53 00 4 T1 D1 L 25 M6 Program 5 GO X0 YO 6 1000 M3 7 G162 Defines the Is 8 G162 A10 B20 9 G169 Calls the Irrec Dashboard A a a View Adjust Single PROG DASHBOARD Figure 8 2 Display Program Screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice
323. rameter Settings Before you set the cycle parameters for the Spindle probe you must e Know the exact diameter of the Ring Gauge calibration standard e Know that the Ring Gauge is a standard that is specifically designed for calibrating the probe The D cycle parameter is the diameter of hole that comes in contact with the probe stylus during calibration and should be an exact measurement e When entering values in the probing machine parameters keep in mind that all values are entered in metric Set the following 60001 Machine Probing Parameters refer to the 6000 CNC Technical Manual P N 627787 21 The probing parameters can be found on the control by going into the machine configuration as follows refer to Figure 5 19 1 From the Manual mode press SHIFT then F3 Config 2 When asked for a password simply press the ENTER key 3 Go into System gt Probing gt CfgProbingParameters 4 Remember that all numeric values are in metric 5 76 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms ANILAM AP rob1ng EC tgProbingParameters aspindleProbeType Corded TtoolProbeType Standard TnominalProbestylusDiameter 40 omaxitrokeFromHome FirstPick 400 T ocalibindToolMeasurementAPHM subo oprobeOrientation 1 T aFirstPickFeedRate Fast 000 aFirstPickFeedRate Medium 125 c 4FirstPickFeedRate Slow 10 42RetractaAmo
324. rate Number of roughing cuts to be taken NOTE If Stock is not set or set to zero and E is 1 or O the cycle will make just one pass at the full depth If Stock is set to greater than zero and E is 1 or 0 the cycle will make one pass at the stock depth and one pass at full thread depth NOTE If you would like all non cutting positioning moves to be rapid set E to a negative number Tool Length Offset is set the same as with any other tool or operation A tool diameter also has to be set in the tool table as cutter compensation is built into this cycle cutter compensation is not allowed during the use of this cycle If X XCenter and Y YCenter are not programmed position tool center of the thread before the G181 line e Xand Y will rapid to the starting position of the thread e Z will rapid to the safe height specified in P ZSafePosn All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 41 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms e The Z axis will feed down to the start cut position H ZStart This could be above or below the Z position specified in the Z ZFinish finish position e Depending on what is in the R ArcinRad parameter the tool will arc into the first cut position e Spiral up or down depending on the difference between Z and H and go counterclockwise or clockwise depending if D MajorDia is plus or minus e Then arc out and
325. rce rae E Er E RE 15 2 Programming EXa mpl Secs a O a a a a a a a E a a aa 15 2 Example illa riada 15 3 Exam Ml tarada ciao eceda 15 4 EXAMPLES Mil sas O AS AA ee Oe co 15 5 AAA A A er ea 15 5 Section 16 DXF Converter Feature Redgulemenle ssm ireua a co adl 16 1 OMAE SONNIE Aei A 16 1 ME aN wae aera ro 16 1 Entry 10 the DAF Cone e asusta ii a ita 16 2 AS A A eh cla eae Sate eset daaaae eae nae 16 3 COMO ced tel oat a a RON Sth act Os aae hae eae a ane 16 3 Bafta a eter teers tect nee tr ere etn te Re ere re A E ATE eee eee E E ere OE 16 3 OR COS enio 16 4 Mouse Operations es 16 4 DR ee ae eee ee ee ee ee ee ee 16 5 Fitting the Display to the Viewing WWINdOW coooccocccoccccccocncocococononononcnnncoronoronnnoncnnnconoronancnnnnos 16 6 Using TNE VVINGCOW ZOOM siseasi A n a E AEEA 16 6 HAM DIS DIA OZE sae o o e aes eleaeceeee 16 6 Doubling Display SIZ Eaa oca 16 6 X All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Contents DX Entes SUPPONE dE qero E E 16 7 Drawing EnNtites NOCSUDDONSO rerien a i 16 7 Ples FOAMS A A An 16 8 DAF ERAMOS a Uc O 16 8 Unedited Conversational Program Listing oocccocccccccconnconncconncocnnnnnnoncncnononanonononannnonnnnnns 16 10 Unedited G Code Program Listin o a cad a 16 11 Unedited Program Run IA DW tai caries eiuoe serenade A E a R Eiaa 16 12 Edited Conversational Program Listing c
326. re 11 1 Single Step Screen Press SHIFT Parts Counter F4 to display the Part Counter pop up window Type the New Value to display the new value in the Parts field 11 10 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Running Programs Jog Return Jog Return is a function in the CNC that allows the tool to be removed from the cut while in Auto or Single Step Modes without switching the CNC to Manual It has an automatic return capability that will return the tool to its departure point It is generally used to check the tool s wear and to change a cutting tool offset in case of tool breakage or excessive wear in the middle of an operation or inspect a critical dimension or cut The following topics are described a Initiating Jog Return Operations Allowed While In Jog Return Jog Return Soft Keys EXAMPLES Notes on Jog Return Doo DO Initiating Jog Return The Jog Return function may be initiated from the Auto or Single Step modes of the CNC To use the Jog Return feature the HOLD key must be pressed first before pressing JOG F2 This ensures that the machine cannot be stopped accidentally while cutting by pressing JOG F2 In this way the axes must be halted before the Jog Return feature may be used Operations Allowed While In Jog Return Several motions functions are allowed after the CNC has been put into Jog Return
327. re described a Macro Body Structure a Setting and Passing Parameters All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 17 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Macro Body Structure The macro body is defined in the same way as a subprogram Format Oxxx O identifies it as a macro xxx is the label number Example N200 O 201 Terminate the macro with an M99 code Use local variables within the body of a macro or subprogram only You cannot use them to transfer data to other macros or subprograms If further subprogram calls are made from the macro body you must transfer data from the local variables to common variables The common variables can then be referenced to transport data to the further subprogram N220 100 20 Common variables range from 100 to 220 The macro must either be part of the program from which it is called or included using the file inclusion code Refer to File Inclusion in this section Setting and Passing Parameters The following topics are described e G65 Macro Programming Main e G65 Macro Programming Macro Subprogram e G66 G6 Macro Programming e SLOTMAC G Program e Macro Programming Hole Milling Macro You can set parameters for a macro before the subprogram call M98 Pn Refer to Example 1 Blocks 10 to 12 define variable values for the subprogram called in Block 13 Example 1 N10 151 2 N11 152 3
328. rent programs Copy one or more program blocks and place them elsewhere in the same Program Listing Table 6 5 describes two ways to copy program blocks Table 6 5 Copying Program Blocks Method Description _ Mark and copy blocks Copies and stores marked blocks Leaves original blocks unchanged Mark and cut blocks Cuts and stores marked blocks Deletes Original blocks To Mark and Copy Blocks 1 In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the first block to be copied 2 Mark the blocks to be copied See Marking Programming Blocks 3 Press Edit Funct F8 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 4 Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu 4 Select Copy The CNC saves the blocks in memory and the original blocks remain in the Program Listing To Mark and Cut Blocks 1 In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the first block to be copied 2 Mark the blocks to be copied See Marking Programming Blocks 3 Press Edit Funct F8 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 4 Edit Funct F8 Pop up Menu 4 Select Cut The CNC saves the blocks in memory and deletes the original blocks from the Program Listing Pasting Blocks within a Program To paste copied or cut blocks into another section of the program 1 In Edit Mode place the cursor where you want to paste the copied blocks 2 Press Edit Funct F8 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 6 4 Edit Funct F8 Pop
329. reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Editor Undeleting a Block You can restore deleted blocks with the Edit Undo SHIFT F3 soft key Refer to Figure 6 2 Program Editor SHIFT Screen The last block deleted is the first block restored To restore a block 1 In Edit Mode place the cursor at the point where the restored block is displayed 2 Press the Undo SHIFT F3 soft key and the last line deleted from the program displays at the cursor NOTE Up to 128 consecutively deleted blocks can be restored Canceling Edits to a Program Block Use the Undo feature to cancel edits made to a program block and restore the block to its original form To cancel edits to a program block 1 In Edit Mode press SHIFT to display the SHIFT Edit soft keys Refer to Figure 6 2 Program Editor SHIFT Screen 2 Press Undo SHIFT F3 soft key The last line s deleted will be restored Restore Canceled Edits to a Program Block Use the Redo feature to reverse cancel edits made to a program block and restore the block to its original form To restore cancel edits to a program block 1 In Edit Mode press SHIFT to display the SHIFT Edit soft keys Refer to Figure 6 2 Program Editor SHIFT Screen 2 Press Redo SHIFT F4 soft key The CNC reverses the canceled edits one character at a time to restore the original block Inserting Text without Overwriti
330. ribes the concepts programming commands and CNC programming formats used to program ANILAM CNC products Use the Contents and Index to locate topics of interest In general topics are presented in order of complexity For example Section 1 describes basic CNC topics while later sections describe Drawing Exchange Format DXF converter programming and special programming features that require a firm grasp of CNC programming The following topics are described in this section Effectivity Notation Getting Started Programming Concepts Programs Axis Descriptions Defining Positions Angle Measurement Plane Selection Arc Direction DO O OC CO DOC O O Effectivity Notation Some sections of this manual apply only to specific ANILAM CNC product s In these sections icons in the left margin identify the product s to which the information applies Table 1 1 lists the icons for each CNC product and the number of axes supported by each product Table 1 1 CNC Effectivity Icon Description Icon Product Axes Supported Peon 6000i 3X Systems 3 6000i 4X 6000i 4X Systems 4 NOTE All systems also support one spindle axis The main difference between the products is the number of axes supported Generally this manual describes the 6000i 3X systems The 6000i 4X operates exactly as the 6000i 3X system except for features that include the additional axes All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 1 1 25 January 08
331. right hand fixture 19 JL 1 1 w N in co a gt BE Delete Page Page Edit f Figure 6 6 Goto Block Dialog Prompt 3 Type in the appropriate line number Press ENTER The CNC places the cursor at that line number Scrolling Through the Program In Edit Mode press the up and down ARROWS to scroll up and down in the Program Listing Paging Through the Program With long programs it is convenient to move the Program Listing display up and down a whole page at a time 1 In Edit Mode press Page Up F5 to go backward one page or press Page Down F6 to advance down one page in the program The CNC advances or goes back one page at a time Inserting a Blank Line Insert a line at the cursor position with the Insert Line feature All subsequent lines will be moved down one line in the program To insert a blank line 1 In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the string and press ENTER to add a blank line before the string Place the cursor at the end of the string and press ENTER to add a blank line after the string 2 You can type a new program block on the blank line 6 14 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Editor Copying Program Blocks NOTE You can cut copy and paste blocks within a Program Listing The Cut Copy and Paste features work for copying and pasting blocks between two diffe
332. rilling conditions for holes For maximum efficiency in deep hole drilling set parameters to accommodate the material and tool types used Generally the deeper the hole the smaller the peck distance J This prevents the binding of chips tool and workpiece Set U to retract the drill completely at set depth intervals Table 5 7 G87 Address Words Address Label Word Description ZDepth z Absolute hole depth Required StartHgt R Initial Z start point in rapid Required First peck distance positive dimension Required PeckDecr J Amount to subtract from previous peck positive dimension Required Minimum peck distance positive dimension Required Feed F__ Feedrate RetractDep Incremental depth between full retracts positive dimension Z return point after hole depth in rapid P must be higher than R ChipBrkinc Chip break increment positive dimension All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 7 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Flat Bottom Boring Cycle G89 Format G89 Zn Rn Dn Fn Pn G89 is a boring cycle generally used to program a pass in each direction with a dwell at the bottom The tool feeds from the R plane to Z depth dwells for specified time then feeds to the retract P dimension Refer to Table 5 8 Table 5 8 G89 Address Words Address Label Word Description Finish Depth Z Absolute hole depth
333. rline UO at a pre milled keyway on the cylinder Set the tool offset so that the centerline of the 0 25 inch ball end mill is at the centerline of the 3 inch diameter part with Y axis at 0 Table 15 2 Four Axis Example 2 4 AX MILL SET shortestDistance TO off G90 G70 GO M5 G28 Z0 G53 O1 GO X0 YO U0 T1 25 BALL END MILL S2400 M3 M98 P1 L6 G90 G0 M5 G28 Z0 GO X0 YO U0 M2 O1 GROOVE G90 GO X 225 GO 22 625 G1 X 125 F5 G18 G91 G2 X 25 2 25 25 KO U 2 G17 G1 X 3 25 2 125 U 13 G90 GO 23 225 GO X 225 G91 GO U 45 M99 15 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC Programming and Operations Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Four Axis Programming Example 3 Mill Mount a fourth axis as described above Mount a part 4 inches in diameter and 8 inches long on the face of the rotary table Support the part on the X end by a live center The part has a 0 25 inch 45 degree chamfer on one end shortestDistance is set to on This will prevent the need to unwind the U axis saving operation time Table 15 3 shows a thread milling example Assume that a 4 8 UN 2A thread must be milled from the right end 6 inches long The tool is tapered to conform to the thread Set XO at the right end YO at the cylinder s centerline UO at a pre milled keyway on the cylinder Measure the tool offset from the top of the part with Y axis at 0 The X start position will be one pitch 0 125 in t
334. robing NOTE On machines that allow the spindle probe to be installed in the spindle with more than one orientation or machines that cannot orient the spindle the probe stylus must be indicated true to the spindle centerline or the probe will not be accurate once removed and replaced into the spindle again 5 80 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Edge Finding G141 Format G141 Qn Wn Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe and that tool offset active before using this cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating tool length offsets A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate active before using this cycle in a program See Section 9 Tool Length Offsets for setting and activating work coordinate offsets The G141 Edge Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from the manual mode Refer to Table 5 45 Table 5 45 G141 Address Words Address Word Description Axis and direction to find edge 0 X 1 X 2 Y 3 Y 4 Z 5 Z Required Work Coordinate to update with edge location in X or Y axes If set work coordinate will be updated if 1 through 4 are specified for Q or tool length offset will be set for t
335. rogram 1 In the Program Manager highlight a program 2 Press Utils F9 to display the Utils pop up menu refer to Figure 10 6 Utils Pop up Menu and Table 10 3 Utils Soft Keys from Program Screen Select Rename and press ENTER 3 Type new program name and press ENTER The new name replaces the old name Marking and Unmarking Programs You can perform some operations on more than one program at a time The Program Manager enables you to select Mark one some or all of the programs in the USER listing The following topics are described a Marking Programs Unmarking Marked Programs a a Marking All Programs a Unmarking All Marked Programs Marking Programs To mark a program 1 Highlight a program in the Program Manager 2 Select Mark SHIFT F6 3 Press ARROWS to highlight another program in the list and select Mark SHIFT F6 4 Repeat these steps to mark as many program as required Unmarking Marked Programs To unmark a program 1 Highlight any marked program and press ENTER The program is no longer marked The CNC unmarks the program in the Program Manager The Program is no longer highlighted All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 10 11 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Management Marking All Programs To mark all programs in the Program Manager 1 Inthe Program Manager press Utils F9 to display the pop up menu Refer to Figure 10
336. rograms Table 11 4 describes the active soft keys on the Block Search gt Find screen Table 11 4 Block Search gt Find oe Screen Soft Keys Soft Key Find ee the program display one page previous backward Moves the program display one page forward a Displays the Find pop up with the message Find what and an entry field for you to type the case sensitive string that you want COCO Retu to tne Sock Search soroen Switching from Single Step Mode to Auto Mode To switch from Single Step Mode to Auto Mode 1 In Single Step Mode press Auto F6 to complete the current move then hold 2 Press START to restart the CNC and run the rest of the program in Auto Mode Position Display Modes Position Displays for X Y Z and U show Program Movement to the programmed commanded position in reference to Part Zero or datum Distance to Go Distance to go to reach the commanded position Automatic Program Execution The Auto Mode is the CNC s production mode All or any part of a program can be executed in the Auto Mode Put the CNC in Auto Mode from either the Manual or Single Step Modes The Auto screen is similar to a Manual screen but has fewer soft keys The Auto F6 soft key label highlights when the Auto Mode is active Refer to Figure 11 2 Auto Screen 11 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Running Programs To run a progra
337. rt zero Required The negative most edge in the Y axis of the stock from part zero Required The depth of the part from top to bottom in relation to part zero Required All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 35 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Programmable Temporary Path Tolerance G1000 Format G1000 Xx G1000 is used to temporarily override the parameter for path tolerance G1000 should only be used in program and should be programmed by itself The value in configuration is restored at the end of the program The typical default is 0 010 mm 0 0004 This can be useful if the CNC hesitates between small moves such as a 3 D surface output from CAD CAM 4 36 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Feedrate FEED Format Fn n A Feed block sets the feedrate for Line moves arcs and cycles that do not contain specifically programmed feedrates Feed blocks also set the feedrate for modal moves Add Feed blocks whenever necessary Refer to Table 4 32 NOTE A Feed block does not activate the Feed Mode Table 4 32 FEED Address Word Address Label Word Description Feedrates for Inch mode G70 are programmed as inch minute IPM F1 1 0 IPM Feedrates for MM metric mode G71 in mm min F1 1 mm min Required A
338. rtHgt then feeds to the depth of the first cut The machine feeds into the profile along Ramp 1 cuts the circle to the specified D Diameter then ramps away from the work along Ramp 2 When cutting an outside profile the tool ramps into the work along Ramp 1 and away from the work along Ramp 2 as illustrated in Figure 5 14 Diameter Diameter AD gt Ramp gt Ramp Inside Outside Figure 5 14 Ramp Position for Inside and Outside Profile The Circular Profile Cycle automatically compensates for tool diameter Activate the correct tool diameter before the G171 block Refer to Figure 7 6 Circular Profile Cycle Screen Table 5 24 describes the CIRCULAR PROFILE entry fields Table 5 24 G171 Address Words Address Label Word Description StartHgt Z absolute starting rapid height must be 0 1 inch or 2 mm above surface to be cut into Executed in rapid Required ZDepth Z Absolute depth of the finished profile Required Diameter Finished diameter of circle If you enter a negative value both the direction of cut and the starting and endpoints reverse Required Ramp R Ramp distance used for each pass Required Continued All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 24 G171 Address Words Continued Address Label Word Description XCenter X X coordinate of the ce
339. running program area label 3 11 red program hold program area 3 11 IF GOTO conditional statement 17 27 Index 14 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index IF conditional statement 17 27 IN POSN program area label 3 11 inch mode format G70 4 32 inch G70 edit help 7 5 incremental G90 edit help 7 5 jog mode 3 18 mode center angle arc illustration 7 7 change to G91 4 33 move execute 3 19 positioning 1 7 inequality operators description 17 31 In Position Mode G64 cancel G61 4 23 modal exact stop check G61 4 23 modal exact stop G61 4 12 non modal exact stop check G9 4 23 non modal exact stop G9 4 12 insert block feature 6 8 line feature 6 14 text mode 2 8 text no overwrite 6 9 text with overwrite 6 10 Insert F3 inserting a program block 6 8 F3 text no overwrite 6 9 F3 text with overwrite 6 10 Block inserting a program block 6 8 Off overwrite F8 typing over text 2 8 On F8 inserting text 2 8 inside corner finding G143 5 84 inside or outside hole or boss center find G144 defined 5 76 description 5 86 inside or outside web or slot center find G145 defined 5 76 description 5 88 inside part corner find G143 defined 5 75 description 5 84 inside profile ramp moves illustration 5 36 ramp position illustration 5 34 inside outside boss hole finding G144 5 86 inside outside web finding G145 5 88 inspecting programmed m
340. ry by using the ARROW keys Display directory name in status area at bottom which defaults to current drive If copying to current location need to create file with copy of If copying to a new location and file exists need to prompt to overwrite OK F1 and Cancel F10 Move To move a program Copies currently highlighted file and files that were previously marked o Expanded by using the right ARROW Compressed by using the left ARROW Traverse the directory using up and down ARROW keys Go to parent directory of current directory by using the ARROW keys Display directory name in status area at bottom which defaults to current drive If copying to a new location and file exists need to prompt to overwrite OK F1 and Cancel F10 Deletes source file after copying Rename Use to rename a program See Renaming Programs Mark All To mark all programs in the Program Manager See Marking and Unmarking Programs UnMark All To unmark all marked programs See Marking and Unmarking Programs All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 10 9 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Management Copying Programs from to Other Directories Use Copy to copy programs to or from another directory such as a subdirectory or a Universal Serial Bus USB Refer to Figure 10 6 Utils Pop up Menu To copy programs to or from another directory 1 In the Program Manager highlight
341. s active to the intermediate point and then rapids or feeds to Machine Home The intermediate point is always in reference to Machine Home All offsets and transformations rotation mirror and scaling are automatically canceled by G28 before traversing to Machine Home All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 15 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Return from Reference Point G29 Return from Reference Point Machine Home G29 is used in conjunction with Reference Point Return G28 G29 returns the CNC to the intermediary point programmed in G28 then to the coordinates programmed in the G29 block Return move will be rapid or feed depending on active GO or G1 to a program start position Refer to Table 4 13 Format G29 Xx Yy Zz Vu xyzu coordinates X Y Z and U of G29 move The CNC commands a move from Machine Home to an intermediate point specified in G28 command then to the G29 coordinates Table 4 13 G29 Address Words Label Address Description Word Mid Point X G29 move in X Mid Point Y G29 move in Y Mid Point Z G29 move in Z Mid Point U G29 move in U Table 4 14 G29 Program List Block Format Description of Variables N1 G28 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 N1 coordinates of intermediary point The CNC traverses to the programmed coordinate N1 then traverses to Machine Home N2 G29 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 N2 coordinates of point to which CNC
342. s reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Table 5 25 G172 Address Words Continued Address Label Word Description XCenter X coordinate of the center If no coordinate is entered the CNC centers the profile at its present position YCenter Y Y coordinate of the center If no coordinate is entered the CNC centers the profile at its present position CornerRad Corner radius setting If the programmer enters a negative value both direction of cut and the starting and endpoints reverse Zea 1 Zeister O RoughFeed J Rough pass feedrate FinFeed K Finishrpass feedrate DepthCut B Maximum Z axis increment used for each pass Amount of stock left by the machine before the fish pass Default 0 If the programmer enters a negative value the CNC will leave the stock without making a finish pass RetractHgt P Retract Height When you enter a value the CNC executes the number of passes required to get from the H StartHgt to the Z ZDepth cutting the B DepthCut on each pass When you enter an S FinStock value the CNC leaves the specified stock on the profile and depth for a finish pass The CNC cuts the rectangle to the M Length W Width and Z ZDepth dimensions on the finish pass Enter a negative S FinStock to leave the finish stock without making a finish pass When you do not enter a J RoughFeed o
343. same manner at feedrate K 7 When the pocket is complete tool rapids to P then to the center of the pocket rated 2 X 4 OVERALL Figure 5 9 G78 Programming Example All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 23 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Irregular Pocket Cycle G169 9 24 Format G169 Wn Xn Yn Hn Zn Mn An Bn In Jn Sn Kn Pn Use G169 to mill irregular pockets You must enter the perimeter of the shape into a subprogram The main irregular pocket needs to be a closed contiguous line and arc movements starting and ending at the same point The first line in the input subroutine for outside shape or islands needs a G41 left or G42 right to indicate which side of the contour the cutter needs to be as viewed from the direction of travel No ramp on or off movement is allowed The cycle will calculate these moves on and off the defined shape Do not include parametric programming or feedrates in the subprogram only the exact perimeter of the pocket In a closed shape the start point of the first rapid move and the endpoint of the last move line or arc are the same The CNC will automatically calculate the moves necessary to clear out the shape Refer to Table 5 18 Roughing will always climb mill and finish will always conventional mill unless a negative K FinFeed value is used lfa negative K FinFeed is used the finish pass will also clim
344. se Address Words X Y 1 J together To program a move from P1 to P2 calculate arc centers I and J and endpoints X and Y Refer to Figure 4 5 1941 gt _ e R 75 i P2 R75 J 7244 R 15 deg P1 15 deg G2 G3C Figure 4 5 Partial Arc Sample From P1 to P2 the block format is G91 G3 X 5559 Y 7244 1941 J 7244 Construct a triangle at a right angle to the given angle 15 deg Using the given angle 15 and the hypotenuse 75 radius calculate the lengths of the unknown sides opposite side and J adjacent side A Sine 15 deg times hypotenuse 2588 x 75 1941 Since I is in an X minus direction I X arc center 1941 B Cosine 15 deg times hypotenuse J 9659 x 75 7244 Since J is in a Y positive direction J Y arc center 7244 C Radius X 750 1941 5559 X moves in a positive direction X endpoint 5559 D Y endpoint J Y arc center Y J 7244 NOTE Ifthe endpoint P2 does not lie along the arc path the CNC displays an error message All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 9 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Circles Since the endpoint and starting point of a circle are the same you do not need to program an endpoint for a circle Position the tool at the required starting point before you execute the arc move Refer to Figure 4 6 Format G91 G3 J 5 Since X Y and
345. served Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index V variable direct transfer 17 13 indirect transfer 17 13 programming description 17 10 example 1 17 15 example 2 17 16 register description 17 11 setting 17 13 vectored feedrate display 15 2 View Type F4 display Draw view types 8 4 8 5 View Type screen illustration 8 4 8 5 view programs with Draw 8 1 W warranty iii WHILE conditional statement 17 28 WHILE DO END conditional statement 17 28 window zoom display DXF 16 6 wired probe spindle description 5 80 wireless probe spindle description 5 80 X XO YO ZO Position 1 5 X axis description 1 4 XY plane G17 4 12 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM XY plane G17 edit help 7 5 XY plane G17 spindle probe cycles 5 75 XY RetractAmount description 5 59 XZ plane G18 4 12 XZ plane G18 edit help 7 5 Y Y axis description 1 4 YZ plane G19 4 12 YZ plane G19 edit help 7 5 Z Z position enter manually 9 15 ZO quill position 9 12 Z axis description 1 4 move startup 9 22 part zero 9 12 position display 9 12 zero degree reference 1 7 zero set G92 edit help 7 11 ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast description 5 59 5 65 ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium description 5 59 5 65 ZFirstPickFeedRate_ Slow description 5 59 5 65 ZRapidToStartPositionFr
346. served Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM changing jog mode 3 18 character to delete 6 7 chip break cycle G87 description 5 7 edit help 7 9 circular interpolation absolute mode 4 8 CCW G3 description 4 7 circle example 4 10 CW G2 description 4 7 incremental mode 4 8 parameters 4 7 partial arc example 4 8 4 9 circular move plane you select 1 8 circular pocket cycle G77 description 5 20 edit help 7 10 circular profile cycle G171 description 5 34 edit help 7 9 screen illustration 7 21 CLEAR key Illustration 2 6 single value to clear 9 5 Clear Line F7 tool page row to clear 9 5 Clear MDI SHIFT F2 clear MDI history page 3 20 clearing a halted program 11 8 entries 2 8 CNC DXF converter description 16 4 file creation 16 1 files created 16 8 parts counter description 11 10 timer description 11 10 codes order of execution 12 4 command line manual screen area 3 10 command abbreviations listed 17 29 comments include in program listing 6 16 common global variables description 17 9 comparative terms description 17 30 compensated move ramping 9 19 compensation LEFT G41 edit help 7 5 left hand 9 16 OFF G40 edit help 7 5 RIGHT G42 edit help 7 5 right hand 9 16 computation storing result 17 14 Index 3 ANILAM conditional statements description 17 27 config data parameter screen illustration 5 58 5 76 co
347. soft keys F1 F4 to return the axes to their positions 14 Press START to continue program The axes will return to the position they were jogged from when the Jog Return function was initiated in the described path Notes on Jog Return e Jog Return is generally only used in trouble situations where a tool breaks or a tolerance must be checked It allows the program to be interrupted in Auto or Single Step mode without having to switch to Manual e The HOLD key must be pressed prior to JOG e Manual Panel moves are allowed while in Jog Return e Manual Data Input MDI moves are not allowed e Tool length or wear offset on the tool may be altered while in Jog Return However the new values will not take effect until the tool is reactivated again in the part program e The mode can be cancelled at any time by pressing F4 Manual e The Manual Panel is fully active Handwheel also if present All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 11 15 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N627785 21 M Functions Section 12 S and M Functions This section covers S and M code formats Refer to Table 12 1 The codes are included in the part program or activated in Manual Mode Table 12 1 S and M Codes Cade Function S Spindle Speed Commands spindle speeds S M Miscellaneous Performs miscellaneous M functions such as spindle ON OFF and coolant ON OFF The following topics are descri
348. specified in the calibAndToolMeasurementRPM machine setup parameter and then the calibration standard will move over an incremental amount that is equal to Half the value entered in the D cycle parameter Half the value entered in the nominalProbeStylusDiameter machine setup parameter The value in the XYRetractAmount machine setup parameter The direction the probe will move over depends on what is placed in the probeOrientation machine setup parameter 1 Go first to the left 1 Go first to the right 2 Go first to the front 2 Go first to the back 7 The Z axis will then do a guarded Z move down 0 1 2 54 mm or whatever amount was placed in the E cycle parameter and then move over toward the probe stylus 0 3 7 62 mm or until it touches the probe stylus If contact is not made with the probe or if contact is made during a guarded move then an alarm will be generated and the canned cycle will terminate 8 After the probe stylus is touched on the first side the machine will then rapid up and over the stylus then down on the opposite side then over to the other two sides until it has touched the probe stylus on all four quadrants This will establish the center of the probe stylus 9 The spindle will then turn off and the machine will touch off on two sides of the probe with the spindle off finding the effective probe stylus diameter Then will rapid up above the probe stylus and over to the center 10 Remove the calibra
349. splays additional options on the soft key menu Allows access to additional soft keys CLEAR Clears selected messages values commands and program blocks ARROW Allows you to move highlight bars and cursor around the screen ENTER Activates menu selections activates alphanumeric entry or creates new line Use Editing Keys to control machine movements manually Refer to E Section 3 Manual Operation and Machine Setup for a detailed description of the Manual Panel CNC Keyboard Option The CNC supports most standard USB PC keyboards Refer to Section 13 Machine Software and Peripherals Installation All keypad inputs except E STOP and SERVO RESET have assigned keyboard equivalents Soft Keys F1 to F10 Labeled soft keys F1 to F10 also called function keys are located just below the monitor Soft key functions are not hardwired their functions change with changes in mode Labels indicate the function of each soft key Unlabeled soft keys are inactive Manual Panel Refer to Section 3 Manual Operation and Machine Setup for information on the manual panel and the optional handwheel 2 6 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 CNC Console and Software Basics Software Basics ANILAM The CNC s screens change as different modes are activated Basic procedures and features of the software remain the same regardless
350. ster production If you only need one pass to size and you want the positioning moves to be rapid set E to 1 5 42 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle G177 Format G177 Zn Hn Dn Xn Yn Bn In Jn Kn Sn Pn An Use the plunge circular pocket cycle G177 for carbide tooling when a multiple axis ramp in move is not possible The Z axis will plunge single axis to programmed depths You must drill a start hole prior to using this cycle Activate the tool prior to G177 so that tool diameter is known The tool is not required to be at the center of the pocket as the cycle has variable words for X and Y center If you do not program X and Y variable words with G177 then the CNC will use the current position as the pocket center Refer to Figure 7 15 Plunge Circ Pocket Cycle Screen Refer to Table 5 29 Table 5 29 G177 Address Words Address Label Word Description Z Depth abs PZ Absolute depth of pocket Required Z Start Height The Absolute Z position before beginning to mill the pocket This must be 0 1 inch or 2 mm above the surface an Executed in rapid Required Diameter Diameter of pocket D dimension climb CCW D dimension conventional CW Required Center of the pocket in X axis Defaults to current position Center of the pocket in Y axis Defaults to current
351. stock amount sides only Finish Feed K _ Finish pass feedrate Flat 0 Ball 1 Flat end mill 0 Ball end mill 1 Default is flat end mil 0 RoughFeed Roughing feedrate Lower Left Rad Draft Angle Draft angle to be machined on vertical walls of pocket Required 5 14 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Example This program will cut the draft angle pocket shown in the figure The drawing does not show the finish pass Assume an existing rectangular pocket 4 in long x 2 in wide x 1 in deep with a theoretical sharp lower left corner at X2 Y2 The following program will machine a draft angle onto the existing pocket Refer to Figure 5 5 and Table 5 13 Figure 5 5 G73 Programming Example Table 5 13 G73 Programming Example T1 M3 S2000 1 2 FLAT END MILL G90 GO X2 5 Y2 5 F30 4 x 2 x 1 DP RCT PKT ALREADY EXISTS G73 X4 Y2 H 1 Z 1 A 5 E10 1 1 S 01 Q 02 R35 GO TO Z0 M5 XO YO M2 Position the tool above the center of the lower left corner radius The tool path starts and ends at the center of the lower left corner radius after each perimeter pass for all roughing passes During finish passes the tool will step down the draft angle and make passes around the perimeter If a ball end mill is programmed W 1 the following points must be considered If W 1 the length X and wid
352. t Screen from Tool Page All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Tool Number Length Wear SiS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a Bea el ea ley el el ea e Find in Teach msgs cong ruc omm e ren Figure 9 2 Shift Screen from Tool Page For a description of the Tool Page soft keys see Table 9 2 Tool Page secondary Soft Keys The following topics are described in this section DOUOODOCOCOO Do O O O Activating the Tool Page Using the Tool Page Finding Tools by Number Changing Tool Page Values Tool Page Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys T Codes and Tool Activation Tool Length Offsets Diameter Offset in Tool Page Compensation G40 G41 G42 Activating Offsets via the Program Activating the Tool Page 9 2 Activate the Tool Page as follows 1 2 Go to the Manual screen In the Manual screen press TOOL F9 The Tool Page activates refer to Figure 9 1 The Tool Page Press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Shift screen from Tool Page refer to Figure 9 2 The SHIFT Message F1 functions are described in Section 3 Messages Msgs SHIFT F1 Press SHIFT again to return to the Tool Page All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Using the Tool
353. t can be used as guidelines to create the desired program Also these sample commands enable the user to instantly run the generated program in Draw and visualize the tool path without having the edit it first The unedited G Code program can be edited to fix and or add tool numbers feed rates cutter comp on or off and so forth When the edits are complete use Draw to check the tool path See Figure 16 4 Unedited Program Run in Draw 16 12 The unedited program run is draw is illustrated in Figure 15 4 A f Adjust Al Single Robla Bik Forro Cursor Se Step ra ca E ve Figure 16 4 Unedited Program Run in Draw The edited program listings are shown in the following Tables UNEDITED RUN IN DRAW a Table 16 6 Edited Conversational Program Listin Q Table 16 7 Edited G Code Program Listin All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 DXF Converter Feature Edited Conversational Program Listing See Table 16 6 Table 16 6 Edited Conversational Program Listing Dim Abs Unit Inch DrillOff MCode 5 FIXTURE OFFSET Offset Fixture 1 TOOL CALL SET OFFSET IN TOOL TABLE 375 DIA MILL Tool 1 MCode 6 SET SPINDLE SPEED RPM 1500 TURN ON SPINDLE MCode 3 TURN ON COOLANT MCode 8 POCKET USING SUBR 1 Pocket Sub 1 X 2 00 Y 1 500 StartHgt 0 100 ZDepth 0 375 Stepover 0 250 DepthCut 0 125 FinStock 0 005 RampFeed 10
354. t may be in RAM is saved to the hard drive The shutdown process Is very easy pressing Shut Down SHIFT F10 displays the Shut Down screen with the following soft keys Refer to Table 14 1 Table 14 1 Shut Down Screen Soft Keys Soft Key ShutDown F1 Confirm the shutdown Cancel F2 _ Cancel the shutdown Follow the same procedure to shutdown the 6000i off line as on the machine If for some reason the 6000i off line stops responding try using the Shutdown 60001 option in the program group Left click on Start at the bottom right of the Windows display select All Programs highlight Anilam and select SHUTDOWN 6000I Refer to Figure 14 1 FP Picture Package fa Anan Die See 50001 OFF LINE SHUTDOWN 6000 Figure 14 1 6000i Off line Program Group As the software starts to come up both machine and off line a counter is displayed showing the progress of the start up sequence The counter reaches into the 70s when the main application screen i e manual mode is displayed At this point a homing sequence must be done by pressing Home F4 and START or for the off line ALT S For off line use ALT H to Hold the program Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 14 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Off line Software Installati
355. t notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Index macro call modal G66 edit help 7 11 single G65 edit help 7 11 manual mode feed to activate 3 16 jog continuous move 3 19 jog incremental move 3 19 move types 3 12 rapid to activate 3 16 screen illustration 3 10 settings 3 12 operation 3 1 panel illustration 3 7 keys listed 3 8 LEDs 3 9 screen illustration 3 2 3 10 soft keys listed 3 13 soft keys secondary listed 3 13 Manual Data Input See MDI manual tool diameter measure for special tools G153 5 71 manual tool diameter preset G153 defined 5 61 description 5 71 manual tool length offset preset G152 defined 5 61 for special tools description 5 69 mark all programs 10 12 program 10 11 Mark All marking all programs 10 12 Mark Blk OFF Edit Funct F8 pop menu unmarking blocks 6 7 Mark Blk ON Edit Funct F8 pop menu marking blocks 6 7 Mark program to mark 10 11 marking program blocks 6 7 Match Case F4 find replace screen 6 11 Replace with feature 6 13 matrix pattern illustration 5 11 maxStrokeFromHome FirstPick description 5 59 MC_ 5003 default spindle orientation angle 5 6 M Code control codes description 12 3 control codes table 12 3 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM controlled functions table 12 2 function description 12 1 groups listed 7 12 listing 7 19 M9387 probe sele
356. tStopMode G64 G66 G81 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 1 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Table 4 1 G Codes Continued Non Modal G Code Function _ CounterBore Drill Cycle Manual Tool Diameter Preset Peck Drill Cycle Tool Breakage Length and Diameter Wear Protection m 684 Tapping Cycle 685 ess O O Q D Q Boring Bidirectional Cycle Boring Unidirectional Cycle G170 687 Chip Break Cycle Flat Bottom Boring Cycle Absolute ncrementa ero Set rroring 178 lockForm G179 Drill Pattern Cycle eedrate Thread Mill Cycle Programmable Temporary Path Tolerance For G Codes not described in this Section refer to Section 5 Canned Cycles and Subprograms 4 2 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes The following topics are described in this section Rapid Move End Point GO Feed Move End Point F1 Angular Motion Programming Example Circular Interpolation G2 or G3 Dwell G4 Programming Non modal Exact Stop F9 Plane Selection G17 G18 G19 Setting Stroke Limit G22 Reference Point Return G28 Return from Reference Point G29 Move Reference from Machine Home G30 Probe Move G31 Fixture Offset Work Coordinate System Select G53 Modal Corner R
357. tarting block using the ARROW keys Press Return F10 Press START to begin automatic program execution from the selected block a w NN Clearing a Halted Program When the CNC encounters a program block that generates an error it displays a Warning or error message and halts the program Go back to Manual Mode to correct the problem A program error could generate more than one message Refer to Section 2 CNC Console and Software Basics for instructions on reviewing undisplayed error messages After you correct the program load and restart it at the appropriate block Using Draw While Running Programs In Real Time Draw the CNC displays moves as it executes them The active Single Step F5 or Auto F6 highlights as does Draw F1 Refer to Figure 11 3 Draw Real Time Mode All display options in Draw Simulation Mode are available in the Real Time Draw Mode To activate Draw while running a program 1 Load the required program and put the CNC in Single Step or Auto Mode 2 Press Draw F1 to activate the Real Time Draw screen and change the soft keys 3 Press START to run the program The CNC displays moves as it executes them 11 8 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Running Programs 4 G1 Z1 F60 5 t1 M6 6 G1 X 2 Y 2 F80 7 1500 M3 8 Z 2 gt 0 F90 Block Single DRAW REAL TIME Figure 11 3 Draw
358. ted position In Position Mode remains active until changed A As Cancels G61 and activates the Contouring Mode also called Continuous Path Mode NOTE In Position and Continuous Path Tolerances are defined in the Setup Utility The In Position Tolerance should be closer to target than the Continuous Path Tolerance The In Position Mode will be active only for the block containing the G9 command Use G61 to initiate modal Exact Stop In Position Mode Plane Selection G17 G18 G19 Make plane changes prior to circular interpolation G2 G3 blocks Refer to Table 4 10 for the G Codes that activate different planes XY G17 is the default plane at power on Refer to Figure 4 7 Plane Selection Table 4 10 Plane Selection G Codes Cutting Plane XY plane G18 XZ plane G19 YZplane All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes YZ Plane y XZ Plane XY Plane X The three planes are shown as viewed from the rear of the e machine This view is the only one that shows all arcs in their normal orientations Z Figure 4 7 Plane Selection To determine arc direction look toward the negative direction of the non used axis Refer to Figure 4 8 Example for XY plane look along Z Z Cow XY Y Cw YZ X Ccw XZ TA Cw XZ X Ccw YZ Cw XY Z ARCDIR Figure 4 8 Arc Direc
359. tents on the screen The PRINT variable can be abbreviated as follows P See Short Form Addressing Table 17 6 Abbreviations for a list of abbreviations to activate the corresponding command 17 12 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Setting and Transferring Variables When using parametric programming with axis addresses and expressions including unary minus the complete expression needs to be in parenthesis For example X 151 is correct X 151 or X 151 are not correct Setting and Direct Transfer Variables are loaded or set when they appear on the left side of an equation That is the left side of the equal sign Example 1 N200 100 5 56 Variable 100 contains number 5 560000 until changed Example 2 N200 100 25 4m Variable 100 sets variable 100 to 25 4mm Similarly 100 5i sets variable 100 to 5 inches If neither i nor m are used when assigning a variable then the value of the variable is modal For example 100 8 sets variable 100 to 8 no unit Example 3 N200 100 20 Variable 100 contains the number held by 20 until changed Equating one variable with another is called a direct transfer NOTE When a direct transfer is requested the variable on the right side of the equation must contain a value Otherwise the CNC displays an error message n
360. th Y at the bottom of the pocket is measured at the tangency point of the ball radius and the draft angle If W 1 the start height H must be set to 1 ball radius above surface to be cut If W 1 set the tool length offset so that the ball is buried up to its centerline when at the part surface touch off the tip and add the ball radius or touch off tip and use a negative length wear equal to the ball radius All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 15 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Frame Pocket Cycle G75 Format G75 Mn Wn Zn Un Hn Cn Xn Yn Bn In Jn Vn Kn Sn An Pn Frame milling G75 will mill a frame or trough around an island of material You must position the XY axes at the lower left theoretical sharp corner of the island before you program G75 Refer to Table 5 14 Prior to G75 activate a tool so that the CNC will consider the tool diameter The relation of the outside corner radius to the frame width must be geometrically possible or an Error Message is displayed Table 5 14 G75 Address Words Address Label Word Description Length m Lengi ofisland in X axis Required Width w Width of island in Y axis Required ZDepth z Absolute depth of frame Required InsideRad U Inside corner radius of frame corner radius of island Required a Z absolute starting rapid height must be 0 1 inch or 2 mm abov
361. the D 4 L addresses if an M6 is required by the tool change of your machine All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 17 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Tool Modification Programming Example This program will mill the square shape four times The CNC executes the first pass using the tool diameter entered in the Tool Page Each subsequent pass will use a different modified tool diameter as programmed in Blocks 8 10 and 12 T D L and H are the only word addresses allowed on the block N1 041 TOOL MOD G N2 G90 G70 GO G17 N3 TO N4 ZO N5 XO YO N6 T1 8000 DIA N7 M98 P1 N8 T1 D 6 N9 M98 P1 N10 T1 D 4 N11 M98 P1 N12 T1 D 2 N13 M98 P1 N14 TO N15 GO ZO N16 M2 N17 N18 O1 SUBPGM 1 N19 G1 Z 25 F10 N20 G41 Y1 N21 X 1 N22 Y 1 N23 X1 N24 Y1 N25 XO N26 G40 YO N27 M99 The main program calls the subprogram that contains the compensation on off commands between each tool modification NOTE When tool modifiers are activated the CNC still applies any wear offset entered in the Tool Page All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Advanced Programming Features Expressions and Functions You can program some values as expressions Parentheses enclose expressions The CNC displays an error message if the expression is incorrectly entered Ex
362. the Machine Continuous MOVES ccoccccccncccncoccccncncncnoncncnncnonnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnonanenoss 3 19 Manual Date IN PU WOCG ii ao do 3 20 Using Manual Data Input Mode cooccoocccoccconcccnoncnoncocononononcnnononononononnnnnnonanonannnnnnaninaninaninns 3 21 Operating the Handwheel OptionNal ooocccocccconoconicocncocnococcnonnonononanonncnonnnonaronannnnanonaninnnnnnos 3 22 Section 4 Preparatory Functions G Codes Rapid Move iEnd P Ont GO a uateandewevanant 4 4 Feed Move End Point GA st A t 4 5 Angular Motion Programming ExamMple ooccoccccccccccocncocononononcncnoncnnnconnnoncnnnnonnnoncnnnnonanonnncnnnnarenanos 4 6 Circular Interpolation G2 ANd G3 rreran aieas iE ie ENEO EET E E EEE E EE 4 7 Examples of Circular Interpolation cccceccsseceeccececeeeeseeeseteeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeesetseeteeeeeetaeeeseesaeees 4 8 DW I GA Poeren a nn one eee 4 11 Programming Non modal Exact Stop G9 ooccoocccccccoccccccnconnconcncncnononcnnnnonnnonnnnoncnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnncnanos 4 12 Plane selection 617 G16 G19 bi isdscetscesrsssanaidits saan daaahanedids ida 4 12 seting Stroke LIME a o 4 14 Reference Point Return G28 occcoonncconccocncccnococononnononononnnnnnonnnnnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnaninaninnnnnnnons 4 15 Return from Reference Point G29 oococonccocccccncconccocconanonanocononnnnonanononnnnnnonanonnnnnnnnonanenannnnnninaness 4 16 Move Reference
363. the Tool change position turning off any auxiliary functions Tool Offsets Spindle and Coolant The last block M2 ends the program Typical final blocks M9 M5 GO G28 Z0 XO YO M2 7 After you write a program verify it Run it in Draw Graphics Mode to troubleshoot for errors Verify that all programmed moves are safe and accurate to the part print dimensions Now load the stock material into the selected work holding device Set the Tool Offsets for each tool in the Tool Page 10 Before running the part in the Auto Mode run it in Single Step Mode to verify that both the program and the setting of Tool Offsets have been correctly completed Single Step Mode allows you to execute the program block by block 11 After you test the program make any necessary corrections 12 When the finished program is ready for production back it up ona USB Memory Stick 1 2 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Introduction Programming Concepts This section contains programming concepts for the beginning programmer You must master these concepts and be familiar with the terminology in order to write programs Programs A program is the set of instructions that the CNC uses to direct the machine movements Each line of instructions is called a block Each block runs independently thus allowing the program to be stepped along one block at a time A
364. the center of the pocket prior to G178 and drill to a sufficient depth All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 45 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Engrave Cycle G190 5 46 Format G190 A Text Hn Zn En Xn Yn Cn Un Vn Fn The Engraving cycle provides a quick and easy way to engrave part numbers legends or any alpha numeric inscription The usual type of cutter is a sharp point or center drill type tool Options are given for engraving on an angle and mirror is supported for engraving molds When executed the CNC rapids to the start point then to the StartHgt the H parameter It then feeds to the ZDepth the Z parameter specified and begins cutting the Text selected Programming the Engrave Cycle To program the Engrave Cycle 1 In Edit mode press Help F1 then select G190 Engrave Cycle and press ENTER to display the G190 Engrave Cycle menu refer to Figure 7 11 Engrave Cycle Screen 2 Complete the entry fields refer to Table 5 31 and press Use F10 Table 5 31 G190 Address Word O tes Label Word Description Text When the cursor is on Text the A parameter it displays an entry field for the letters E be engraved Letters A Z numbers 0 9 and space ampersand plus minus comma period and slash right are supported No lower case letters are allowed Press ENTER to accept the text Required
365. tion All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 13 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Setting Stroke Limit G22 The G22 Xn Yn Zn In Jn Kn format activate software limits is modal Use G22 alone to cancel software limits Refer to Table 4 11 Format G22 Xn Yn Zn In Jn Kn Activates software limits Format G22 Cancels software limits and enables free movement within the machine limits Table 4 11 G22 Address Words Address Word Format Description a Programmable Travel Limits zw Z positive software limit ptf xxx X negative software limit pK xxx x Z negative software limit The software limits feature creates an envelope that limits the tool s range of travel It is also called the Stored Stroke Limit feature The X Y and Z limits represent the extreme distance the tool can travel in the positive X Y and Z directions The I J and K limits represent the extreme distance the tool can travel in the negative X Y and Z directions Refer to Figure 4 9 Software limits are referenced to Absolute Zero Machine Home The values of the positive and negative limits depend on where you locate Machine Home XYZ G22 IJK Figure 4 9 Software Limits Envelope Parameters 4 14 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes
366. tion standard You are now ready to start running the G151 to set your tool length offsets or tool diameter registers All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 63 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Tool Length and Diameter Offset Preset G151 Format G151 Tn Dn Qn En Fn Mn Sn Rn e Each tool must have the length set once before trying to set the diameter Call this cycle up the first time using Q2 because it will automatically set the length first then the diameter e Calibrate the tool probe at least once before trying to automatically preset a tool This is done initially but if the stylus is ever changed or the probe is moved then you must again calibrate the tool probe e This tool preset G151 can be run from within a program or from the manual mode Refer to Table 5 40 Table 5 40 G151 Address Words Address Word Description Tool number Required With only the T cycle parameter present the canned cycle will not step over half the tool s diameter but come straight down measuring the tool length and storing it in the tool register This option specifies to measure length diameter or both and the appropriate tool registers are updated Optional Default Q1 Q0 Measure the diameter only Q1 Measure the length only Q2 Measure both length and diameter If Q is not set the cycle will measure the tool length only If Q0 or Q2 are programmed y
367. tivated at the beginning of the subprogram and then canceled with a G40 prior to the end of the subprogram N8 calls the G68 rotation function origin I J at XO YO starting angle S of zero degrees First call of subprogram will not be rotated angle increment C of 45 deg CW is negative call subprogram P 1 and loop count L equals eight N9 returns back to the starting position in the Y axis N10 to N12 brings the Z axis to machine home then move the X and Y axes to position and ends the program N16 to N22 define the 45 degree section for the shape from 12 o clock position to 1 30 position turning on and off cutter radius compensation for each iteration of the rotation loop NOTE If you are using S and L format you do not need to cancel G68 NOTE Select the plane prior to G68 default is G17 Program dimensions for both axes of the active plane The CNC interprets IJKABC values in the current Absolute Incremental Mode If C is absolute the 3 o clock position is O degrees If C is incremental G91 the current angle is O degrees It is better to use incremental G91 dimensions All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 4 31 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Preparatory Functions G Codes Activating Inch G70 or MM G71 Mode Inch Mode Format G70 MM Mode Format G71 Change the unit of measurement displayed by the CNC by using Inch Mode G70 or MM Mode G71 Re
368. tributes follow Bin Number Bin number CNC provides Tool Number Row Numbers link the values on a row of the Tool Page to a tool number A program block that activates a tool number activates the values and settings on that row of the Tool Page CNC provides Reserved Press ENTER to assign R Reserved to the Bin number Press ENTER again to clear the Reserved field Fixed Tool Press ENTER to toggle between Not Fixed and Fixed When a tool is fixed it is assigned to a specific pocket Bin Locked Press ENTER to toggle between Not Locked and Locked All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Offset Tool Information On the Tool Screen refer to Figure 9 1 The Tool Page press Offset F3 to display the Offset screen The Offset F3 soft key highlights and new screen field attributes display which can be optionally set These screen field attributes are necessary for fixture offsets G53 The Offset F3 screen field attributes follow Offset Fixture offset number X Axis X axis shift from Machine Home Y Axis Y axis shift from Machine Home Z Axis Z axis shift from Machine Home Find Tool Number On the Tool Screen refer to Figure 9 1 The Tool Page press Find F8 to display the Find Tool line below the Column Description Type in the Find Tool line the tool number that
369. ts for a job that center drills drills and mills a part Tools 1 No 3 center drill 2 0 3750 diameter Twist drill 3 0 5000 diameter End mill Typically you would perform the following steps to activate TLOs 1 Insert and tighten all tools in their appropriate holders 2 Set the CNC to Manual Mode 3 Ensure the Z axis has been homed or Machine Zero is set to its fully retracted position 4 Ifthe machine is a vertical knee mill place the longest tool in the spindle and raise the knee until the tip of the tool is approximately half an inch from the top of the work Place Tool 1 in the spindle Jog the tool over the work Carefully jog the tip of the tool down to meet the top of the work Use MDI moves and or the Manual Panel Jog selections 8 Press TOOL F9 to open the Tool Page 9 Ensure that the cursor is on Tool 1 row 1 10 Press Teach F9 to input the Z value in the Length column 11 Press Exit F10 12 Raise the tool from the work to Z Home Z0 13 Repeat Steps 7 to 12 for all tools 14 Use a micrometer to measure tool diameters and type those values in their respective columns 15 Press Exit F10 to return to Manual Mode 9 14 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Entering the Z Position Manually 1 Retract the Z axis to the Machine TO ZO position Load the tool and manually posit
370. ts usseienstyaenedgasien ceases A aE 6 15 Pasting BIOCKS WITMIN Prog Mi ent o to DO 6 15 Including Comments in a Program LiStiNQ occcocccoccccocnconnccncnnnononononnnnonononanonnnnnnnnnnnnnnaninnnnnnonos 6 16 Section 7 Edit Help Edit Help SOM KEYS cui di A 7 2 Using Help Graphic Screens to Enter Program BIOCKS oocccocccccnccccncocnconcncncnccnnonannnncnnnoncnncnnos 7 3 ETFs Dos 7 4 Basic Modal FUNCIONS meiprate loci iniciando anteeadin TR 7 5 Tool Radius COMPCHSATION ui dei caida 1 5 A aa A TE hs Oaduntaacecmmaaauelastecuate 7 6 Miling and gel o ieee eae ent ema ae a ne eee ee eae 7 9 ECG CY CES tocata a ictericia 7 9 Pocket CY GIOS bschtet scien sic dene iedanesndsdoscidtanhiidetewons daa nend tracbia hance Sncadeasie 7 10 Rotation SCALING and MITO AG dis 7 10 Other G FUNCIONS std Sola 7 11 MEFUNCIONS cuy ai esei n aa lec idicinlatrats piola tr incas 7 12 Basic WM FUNCIONS asia adds 7 12 Cooling Cleaning and LubricCatiON ocoocccoccconcocnconnconnconoocncnroconocanonnnnornnnronononononnonanennnnnnnnnons 7 12 SPINS FUNCIONS inira ad 7 12 TOO ERAN diia lada 7 12 A A A A oo O ude ae aaahahag deinen tee 7 13 E A A 7 14 ENT AICA a ee 7 18 M COde LASTING seoir eaan ou teutigendesdatd saqslend dntamismeratuichadgubnds E a em caes 7 19 Typing ACCESS VV OFS seins a nas 7 20 TY DING I MAC OCS dl 7 20 Examples of G Code Help Screens cccccccceseceecceeceseteeeceeeceeeceeeesecseeteecseceuetse
371. ubject to change without notice 1 9 25 January 08 ANILAM 7 10 Pocket Cycles CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help The Pocket Cycles enables G73 G75 G76 G77 G78 G162 G169 G177 G178 Draft Angle Pocket Cycle Refer to Section 5 Draft Angle Pocket Cycle G73 Frame Pocket Cycle Refer to Section 5 Frame Pocket Cycle G 5 Hole Mill Cycle Refer to Section 5 Hole Mill Cycle G76 Circular Pocket Cycle Refer to Section 5 Circular Pocket Cycle G77 Rectangular Pocket Cycle Refer to Section 5 Rectangular Pocket Cycle G78 Islands Refer to Section 5 Islands G162 Irregular Pocket Cycle Refer to Section 5 Irregular Pocket Cycle G169 Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle Refer to Section 5 Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle G177 Plunge Rectangular Pocket Cycle Refer to Section 5 Plunge Rectangular Pocket G178 Rotation Scaling and Mirroring The Rotation Scaling and Mirroring enables G68 G72 G100 Rotation Axis Refer to Section 4 Axis Rotation G68 Scaling Refer to Section 4 Scaling G72 Mirroring Refer to Section 4 Mirroring G100 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Edit Help Other G Functions ANILAM The Other G Functions enables G04 G09 G22 G28 G29 G53 G61 G64 G65 G66 G67 G92
372. ugh all available Jog Modes Choose Rapid or Feed mode The CNC displays the active Feed or Rapid Mode in the Machine Status Display Area Adjusting Rapid Move Speed The FEEDRATE OVERRIDE rotary switch also adjusts the speed of Rapid moves The switch provides a range of 0 to 100 Set the switch to 100 to set the rapid rate The maximum override rate for rapid speeds is 100 NOTE The machine builder determines the default rapid rate at setup Adjusting Feedrate You can run the CNC at a percentage of the programmed feedrate by adjusting the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE switch Each click of the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE switch adjusts the feedrate by an increment of ten percent the range is 0 to 120 Set FEEDRATE OVERRIDE to 100 to set the feedrate to 100 of the programmed feedrate CAUTION If the CNC is shut down the setup file will reload a default feedrate at the next power on All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Manual Operation and Machine Setup Absolute Mode In Absolute Mode all positions are measured from Absolute Zero Absolute Zero is XO YO ZO when the Absolute Mode is active You can move Absolute Zero to any convenient location All absolute XYZ positions are measured from this point Refer to G53 and G92 in Section 4 Preparatory Functions G Codes for more information on setting absolute zero Setting Absolute Zero to a location on the
373. umber The tool numbers are listed in the first column Column CNC provides Column Displays a brief description of the column on which Description the cursor is located Column Value Displays the column value type or limits range Limits or Range Soft Key Labels Identify the functions of the active soft keys All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 9 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management The following tool attributes display on the Tool Page Tool Number Diameter Length Diameter Wear Length Wear Type Finding Tools by Number 9 4 Row Numbers link the values on a row of the Tool Page to a tool number A program block that activates a tool number activates the values and settings on that row of the Tool Page CNC provides Tool diameter applied when you activate tool diameter compensation or use some canned cycles Tool length offset which enable the CNC to adjust the Z axis tool tip reference position Diameter wear offset which compensate for wear on the tool diameter or an incorrectly sized tool Length wear offset which compensate for wear on the tool length or an incorrectly sized tool Type any character or press ENTER to display the options Milling cutter Touch probe or Undefined Use the UP and DOWN ARROWS to highlight a type and press ENTER to select the type To find a specific tool number in the Tool Page 1 Press Fi
374. un program without pause 8 7 F1 Shape DXF converter 16 3 F1 Shut Down shut down screen 3 6 14 1 F10 Exit Draw to exit 8 7 edits saving 6 7 F10 Return exit Find Replace screen 6 11 jog return screen description 11 12 F2 Cancel shut down screen 3 6 14 1 F2 Create new program 10 7 F2 Delete delete a character 6 7 F2 Edit Draw screen 6 2 F2 Extra tool information 9 8 F2 Find next Replace with feature 6 13 search specific text 6 11 F2 Jog initiate jog return 11 11 F2 Program from Manual screen 1 2 F3 Block search use to select a starting block 11 5 F3 Delete delete a program 10 8 F3 Edit manual screen 6 2 F3 Insert inserting a program block 6 8 text no overwrite 6 9 text with overwrite 6 10 F3 Log Files referenced 3 15 F3 Offset description 9 9 fixture offset table to activate 4 19 F4 Bin description 9 8 F4 Delete Block deleting program block 6 8 F4 Goto use to select a starting block 11 5 F4 Home power on CNC 3 2 start up screen 14 1 F4 Match Case find replace screen 6 11 Replace with feature 6 13 F4 View Type display Draw view types 8 4 8 5 F5 Page Up paging through program 14 F6 Page Down paging through program 6 14 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 ANILAM F6 F7 Replace Replace with feature 6 13 Clear Line tool page row to clear 9 5 F7 Delete to delet
375. unt 4 ivRetract mount 4 2RapidTostartPositionFromHome 200 adiameterOfToolProbeGauge de opositioningFeedRate Normally 1000 T opositioningFeedRate FirstTouch E ds TnominalProbesStylusBallRadius pog adiameterotspindleProbeGauge 25 4 a HEJC tqTouchProbe HHC E qProbeTool FHECiqghingSauge Figure 5 19 Config Data Parameter Screen Capture Additional Parameters Displayed e Set spindleProbeType to Corded Cordless or Cordless SG Strain Gauge depending on the probe style refer to 60001 CNC Technical Manual P N 627787 21 e Set positioningFeedrate_Normally the feedrate the control will use while positioning the probe around the part For example set to 1000 mm min e Set positioningFeedrate_FirstTouch the feedrate the control will use while making its initial touch finding the surface it is measuring For example 125 mm min e Set nominalProbeStylusBallRadius the diameter as measured with a micrometer For example set to 5 mm e Set diameterOfSpindleProbeGauge the exact diameter of the ring gauge used to calibrate the spindle probe For example 25 4 mm All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 77 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms Description of Spindle Probe Cycles This section contains detailed descriptions of the spindle probe cycles Spindle Probe Calibration G140 Edge Finding G141 Outside
376. up Menu 3 Select Paste The CNC pastes the copied blocks into the Program Listing behind the current cursor position All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 6 15 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Program Editor Including Comments in a Program Listing Use an asterisk to make comments within a Program Listing or to mask all or part of a block from the CNC When an asterisk is placed before a string of text the CNC ignores all the text to the right of the asterisk Table 6 6 shows various ways to use the asterisk in a Program Listing Table 6 6 Comment Blocks Commented Block Ignored Text N20 Gi X5 Z6 CNC ignores the entire block The N30 next block is executed N20 G1 X5 Z6 CNC activates Linear Interpolation N21 G1 Then programmed move to X5 Z6 is ignored The next block is executed N10 G70 G90 GO XO ZO TO Block N20 activates Tool 1 The N20 T1 FACE TURN TOOL comment contains the type of tool used as a note to the operator only 6 16 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Edit Help Section 7 Edit Help Edit Help provides diagrams and entry fields to program move types and Canned Cycles The following section describes how to activate a Help Screen for a G Code command and type values in the appropriate entry fields Refer to Figure 7 1 1 G Code Assist Description G G
377. urface on an outside corner of a part and store that location in a work or fixture offset register if programmed G143 Inside Part Corner Find This cycle will find the X amp Y surface in an inside corner of a part and store that location in a work or fixture offset register if programmed All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 75 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Canned Cycles and Subprograms G144 Inside or Outside Hole or Boss Center Find This cycle will find the X amp Y center of an inside hole or outside standing boss on a part and store that location in a work or fixture offset register if programmed G145 Inside or Outside Web or Slot Center Find This cycle will find the X or Y center of an inside or outside web or slot on a part and store that location in a work or fixture offset register if programmed The slot or standing web must be parallel to either the X or Y axes G146 Protected Positioning Move This cycle allows for safe positioning of the probe around the part and will generate an alarm and stop the program if an obstruction is encountered G147 Skew Error or Angle Find This cycle will make two touches on a surface in the X or Y axes and stores the angle relative to the 3 O clock position This cycle can also activate the SkewComp at the same time as it is measured or in a subsequent call at another place in the program without measuring again by using Q2 Canned Cycle Pa
378. ust be pre positioned 3 Type G147 Qn Sn If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated every time you wish to find a skew angle CAUTION When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions above in this document or use the I J or K parameters for the same purpose 4 Execute that line in Manual by pressing START All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 5 93 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Editor Section 6 Program Editor The following topics are described in this section Activating the Program Editor Editing Soft Keys Marking Programming Blocks Unmarking Program Blocks Saving Edits Canceling Unsaved Edits Deleting a Character Deleting a Program Block Inserting a Program Block Undeleting a Block Canceling Edits to a Program Block Restore Canceled Edits to a Program Block Inserting Text without Overwriting Previous Text Inserting Text and Overwriting Previous Text Advancing to the Beginning or End of a Block Advancing to the First or Last Block of a Program Searching the Program Listing for Specific Text Replacing Typed Text with New Text Going to a Block of the Program Listing Scrolling Through the Program Paging Through the Program Inserting a Blank Line Copying Program Blocks Pasting Blocks within a Program Including Comments in a
379. wn ARROW keys o Goto parent directory of current directory by using the ARROW keys SHIFT F6 To mark a program See Marking and Unmarking Programs Show Details SHIFT F7 Show the Program Manager details Refer to Figure 10 4 Show Details Screen SHIFT F8 Used to move the highlighter to Program Name to enable search Change SHIFT F9 Shows the Program Manager structure Layout Refer to Figure 10 3 Change Layout Screen SHIFT F10 Shows the Program Manager structure Refer to Figure 10 5 Up Dir Screen Activating the Program Screen Activate the Program screen as follows 1 Go to the Manual screen 2 In the Manual screen press Program F2 The Program screen activates refer to Figure 10 1 Program Screen 3 Press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Shift screen from Program screen refer to Figure 10 2 Shift Screen from Program Screen Press SHIFT again to return to the Program screen All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Program Management Changing the Program Manager Display You can change the Program Manager display to one of the following e Select Change Layout SHIFT F9 to show the Program Manager structure Refer to Figure 10 3 El My CNC 10 MERC3 G ac i i T polyLines dxf D 3414 6 8 sample dxf sE 6KIFANI G Sample g SF BUTISL DXF SpdiTest dxf o V COMP W SML M
380. wo consecutive compensated moves the tool follows the offset path for the first move until it reaches the offset path for the second move The tool may intersect the offset path for the second move either before or after the endpoint of the first move depending on the geometry Refer to Figure 9 8 ox Move 2 Move 1 End Point Tool Path Move 1 COMP2 Figure 9 8 Consecutive Compensated Moves The moves to and from compensated moves are called ramp moves Ramp moves give the CNC time to position the tool The ramp move must be at least half the active tool s diameter in length Refer to Figure 9 9 Ramping into a Compensated Move All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Tool Page and Tool Management Workpiece A First cut is a left hand compensated Feed move Programmed along Offset path of edge of workpiece ramp intersects offset path of cut Tool moves directly to position perpendicular to On Ramp Move starting point Ramp move programmed to starting point of first cut Tool Starts Centered Ramp move must be at least 1 2 of a tool diameter in length to be effective COMPS Figure 9 9 Ramping into a Compensated Move At the start of a ramp move the tool centers on the programmed path At the end of the ramp move starting point of the compensated move the tool centers perpen
381. xis Descriptions The machine moves along its axes of motion All movements along an axis are either in a positive or negative direction Not all machines use the same system to identify axes The descriptions used in this manual are commonly used to identify 3 axis mills NOTE To visualize machine movements correctly imagine tool motion rather than table motion The following topics are described ao X Axis ao Y Axis QO ZAxis All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 1 3 25 January 08 ANILAM CNC User s Manual P N 627785 21 Introduction X Axis Table movement along the X axis is to the left and right Positive motion is table movement to the left negative motion is table movement to the right Refer to Figure 1 1 Figure 1 1 Mill Axes of Motion Y Axis Table movement along the Y axis is inward and outward Positive motion is table movement outward negative motion is table movement inward Z Axis Spindle movement along the Z axis is upward and downward Positive motion is tool movement upward away from the workpiece negative motion is tool movement downward into the workpiece 1 4 All rights reserved Subject to change without notice 25 January 08 CNC User s Manual ANILAM P N 627785 21 Introduction Defining Positions The intersection of the X Y and Z axes is the reference point from which to define most positions Refer to Figure 1 2 This point is the XO YO ZO position

6000i CNC User`s Manual - Acu-Rite

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents